Wal Mohsanat وَالْمُحْصَنَاتُ
Part 5 of 30 • 124 Verses
۞ وَٱلْمُحْصَنَٰتُ مِنَ ٱلنِّسَآءِ إِلَّا مَا مَلَكَتْ أَيْمَٰنُكُمْ ۖ كِتَٰبَ ٱللَّهِ عَلَيْكُمْ ۚ وَأُحِلَّ لَكُم مَّا وَرَآءَ ذَٰلِكُمْ أَن تَبْتَغُوا۟ بِأَمْوَٰلِكُم مُّحْصِنِينَ غَيْرَ مُسَٰفِحِينَ ۚ فَمَا ٱسْتَمْتَعْتُم بِهِۦ مِنْهُنَّ فَـَٔاتُوهُنَّ أُجُورَهُنَّ فَرِيضَةً ۚ وَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْكُمْ فِيمَا تَرَٰضَيْتُم بِهِۦ مِنۢ بَعْدِ ٱلْفَرِيضَةِ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ عَلِيمًا حَكِيمًا
4:26; 5:6.
4:5; 60:11.
تَمَتَّعَ بِالْمَرْأَةِ (Tamatta‘a bil Mar’ati) 意指他从妇女那里得到暂时的好处。اِسْتَمْتَعَ بِكَذَا (Istamta‘a bi Kadha) 意指他从中长期得益。阿拉伯习俗不允许把 اِسْتِمْتَاعْ (Istimt‘a)作 “暂时的关系” 这意思来用于妇女 (لِسَانْ, Lisan)。还可以注意到的是, 正如上面例句中那样, 每当名词 تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘) 用来表明妇女的暂时性关系时, 后接置于代表妇女这词之前的介词 ب (ba’)。一位阿拉伯诗人说, تَمَتَّعْ بِهَا مَا سَاعَفَتْكَ وَ لَا تَكُنْ عَلَيْكَ شَجًا فِی الْحَلْقِ حِيْنَ تَبِيْنُ (Tamatt‘a biha ma Sa‘afatka wa la Takun ‘alaika Shajan fil Halqi hina Tabinu) (حَمَاسَة, Hamasah), 即只要她合你的意, 可从她得益, 但当她与你分离时, 不要让她像骨梗在喉般地成为你经久烦恼的祸根。可是在本节经文中, هُنَّ (Hunna) 这个指妇女们的代词之前置有介词 مِنْ (min)。对 مُتْعَة (Mut‘ah) 的误解, 看来是对 تَمَتُّعْ(Tamattu‘) 与 اِسْتِمْتَاعْ (Istimta‘)两词之间的差别未能理解而引起。 (لِسَانْ, Lisan) 的作者引述 زَجَّاجْ (Zajjaj) 说: “由于他们对阿拉伯语的无知, 有些人根据这节经文推断出 مُتْعَة (Mut‘ah) 的合法性, 而伊斯兰宗教学家之间意见一致, 声称不合法, فَمَا اسْتَمْتَعْتُمْ بِهِ مِنْهُنَّ (Fa-mastamta‘tum bihi Minhunna) 这个词语的简单的意思是依照上述条文所履行的婚姻。” 如果在这里早对 مُتْعَة (Mut‘ah) 加以注意的话, 所用的介词应该是 ب (ba’), 而不是 مِنْ (min)。而且, 所用的词是 اِسْتَمْتَعَ (Istamta‘a), 而不是与此具有不同意义的 تَمَتَّعَ (Tamatta‘a)。也不能从 اُجُوْرَهُنَّ (Ujurahunna) 这词得出有利于 مُتْعَة (Mut‘ah) 的推断; اُجُوْرَهُنَّ (Ujurahunna) 的意思是 “她们的嫁妆”, 这在 «古兰经» 33:51中也表示过。因此 «古兰经» 断然禁止 مُتْعَة (Mut‘ah) 并把超出正式婚姻之外的两性关系看作通奸。
مراد یہ ہے کہ وہ عورتیں جن سے نکاح جائز ہے وہ تو نکاح کے بعد جائز ہوں گی اور پہلی لسٹ والی عورتیں نکاح کے ساتھ بھی جائز نہیں ہو سکتیں‘ ہاں جنگی قیدی عورتیں نکاح کے ساتھ جائز ہو سکتی ہیں۔ اور جب ان کو کوئی نہ چھڑوائے تو ان کی اجازت کی ضرورت نہیں۔ قومی اخلاق کو درست رکھنے کے لئے حکومت ان کا ولی مقرر کرکے ان کا نکاح کر سکتی ہے۔
یہ مطلب نہیں کہ مومن زنا کرے گا‘ بلکہ مطلب یہ ہے کہ ہم مومن سے یہی امید کرتے ہیں کہ وہ شادی کے وقت سب تقویٰ کی راہوں کو مدنظر رکھے گا۔ اور زنا کی صورت کے قریب نہ جائے گا۔
4:26; 5:6.
4:5; 60:11.
Muhsanat is the plural of Muhsanah which means, a married woman; a free woman; a chaste woman (Lane).
This means that whereas a woman who is already married to a man cannot be taken in marriage by another person, an exception is made here in case of women who are taken prisoner in a war waged by a non-Muslim State against an Islamic State. This is the significance of the words Ma Malakat Aimanukum. Such married women, if they become converted to Islam and therefore could not be sent back to their non-Muslim husbands, may be married to Muslim husbands. For a detailed note on "What your right hands possess" see {561}.
Tamatta‘a bil Mar’ati means, he benefited by the woman temporarily. Istamta‘a bi Kadha means, he benefited by it for a long time. The Arabic idiom does not countenance the use of Istimta‘ with regard to a woman in the sense of temporary connection (Lisan). It may also be noted that whenever the noun Tamattu‘ is used to denote temporary connection with a woman, it is followed by the preposition ba’ put before the word standing for the woman, as in the above example. An Arab poet says, Tamatta‘ biha ma Sa‘afatka wa la Takun ‘alaika Shajan fil Halqi hina Tabinu (Hamasah), i.e. be benefited by her as long as she is agreeable to you, but when she gets separated from you, do not let her be a source of constant trouble for you like a piece of bone which remains stuck in the throat. But in this verse the pronoun Hunna referring to women is preceded by the preposition min. Misunderstanding about Mut‘ah seems to have arisen from the f
4:26; 5:6.
4:5; 60:11.
Important Words:
المحصنات (married) is the plural of محصنة and is derived from حصن meaning, he or it was or became inaccessible, fortified or protected against attack. حصن المرأة means, the woman was chaste, i.e. protected against moral or sexual sinfulness. احصنت المرأة means, the woman got married. محصنة therefore, means a married woman; a chaste woman who abstains from what is unlawful; a free or noble woman as opposed to a bondwoman. Similarly محصن means, a married man; chaste man who abstains from what is unlawful: a free or noble man. حصن means, a fort or a fortress. The word محصنات would, therefore, mean, women who have protected themselves by entering, as it were, the fortress of marriage. The word has been used in the Quran in all the different senses, i.e. (1) married women, (2) chaste women and (3) free women; but in the present verse it has been used in the sense of married women (Lane & Aqrab).
مسافحین (committing fornication) is the active participle from سافح which is derived from سفح. They say سفح الدم i.e. he shed blood or made it flow. سفح الدمع means, tears began to flow. Thus the word is both transitive and intransitive. سافحة means, he vied with the other party in shedding blood; he committed fornication. مسافحة means, a fornicator and مسافحة means, a fornicatress (Lane & Aqrab).
اجور (dowries) is the plural of اجر which means, reward or wages. اجر المرأة means, dowry of a woman (Taj). Also, in 33:51 the word has been used in the sense of dowry.
استمتعتم (the benefit you receive) is formed from متع. They say متعھا بکذا i.e. he gave her (his wife) such a thing. تمتع بالمرأةmeans, he benefited by the woman temporarily. استمتع بکذا means, he benefited by it for a long time. The Arabic idiom does not countenance the use of استمتاع with regard to a woman in the sense of temporary connection (Lisan). It must also be noted that whenever the noun تمتع (tamattu‘) is used to denote temporary connection with a woman, it is followed by the preposition با (ba) put before the word standing for the woman, as in the above example. But in the expression فما استمتعم به منھن to pronoun ھن referring to women is preceded by the preposition من.
ماملکت ایمانکم (what your right hands possess). The Arabs say ھذا ملک یمینی i.e. he or it is in the possession of my right hand, meaning, he or it is in my possession and I can deal with him or it as I like (Lisan & Aqrab). The expression ما ملکت ایمانکمgenerally signifies, men or women taken prisoner in war and being in the custody and control of their Muslim captors. In this verse, the expression means women prisoners only. The term has been used by the Quran in preference to عباد or اماء (slaves and bondwomen) to point to just and rightful possession, the word ایمان (right hands) also pointing to the same fact.
Commentary:
The expression, such as your right hands possess, has been used in the Quran with regard to those men or women who took part in aggressive wars against Islam and fell prisoners into the hands of Muslims. The context, however, shows that the expression used in the present verse means female prisoners of war. Islam does not allow women taken prisoner in ordinary wars to be taken as wives. This exceptional injunction becomes operative only when a hostile nation wages a religious war against Islam with a view to extirpating it and compelling Muslims to abandon their religion at the point of the sword, and treats their prisoners as slaves, as was done in the days of the Holy Prophet when the enemy took away Muslim women as prisoners and treated them as slaves. The Islamic injunction was thus only a retaliatory measure and also served the additional purpose of protecting the morals of captive women who were generally in large numbers and whom war separated from their kith and kin. A people who seek to compel others to forsake their religion at the point of the sword and reduce them to slavery are mere brutes and not respectable human beings. They must be paid back in their own coin in order to bring them to their senses. For a fuller exposition of this subject see General Introduction.
It may be noted that it is not permitted to take into marriage such female relations of a bondwoman who is treated as wife, as correspond to the relations of a free woman within the prohibited degree. For instance, the mothers, sisters, daughters etc. of such bondwomen cannot be taken in marriage.
The advocates of mut‘a (temporary marriage) have endeavoured in vain to infer its legality from this verse. The Quran and the Arabic language both contradict this manifestly unfounded inference. The misunderstanding about mut‘aseems to have arisen from the failure to understand the difference between the meanings of تمتع and استمتاع given under Important Words. The author of Lisanul-‘Arab quotes Zajjaj as saying: "This is a verse in the interpretation of which some men have committed a great blunder, owing to their ignorance of the Arabic language. They have inferred from it the legality of mut‘a which, by the consensus of opinion among Muslim theologians, has been declared to be unlawful, whereas the words simply mean marriage performed in accordance with the conditions mentioned above."
According to Arabic usage, the legality of mut‘a, as asserted by some people, cannot, therefore, be inferred from this verse. If there had been any reference to mut‘a, the preposition used ought to have been با (ba) and not من (min). Moreover, the expression used here is not تمتع but استمتع which possesses a sense different from that of the former word.
Nor can any inference in favour of mut‘a be drawn from the expression اجورھن which, as explained under Important Words, means "their dowries", in which sense it has been used in the Quran elsewhere also (33:51).
On principle, the dowry must be paid immediately at marriage; but with the wife’s consent the payment can be suitably deferred. The husband can increase the amount of the dowry later, if he so desires; but he cannot decrease it except with the permission of the wife or the qadi.
a
4:26; 5:6.
b
4:5; 60:11.
323
تَمَتَّعَ بِالْمَرْأَةِ (Tamatta‘a bil Mar’ati) 意指他从妇女那里得到暂时的好处。اِسْتَمْتَعَ بِكَذَا (Istamta‘a bi Kadha) 意指他从中长期得益。阿拉伯习俗不允许把 اِسْتِمْتَاعْ (Istimt‘a)作 “暂时的关系” 这意思来用于妇女 (لِسَانْ, Lisan)。还可以注意到的是, 正如上面例句中那样, 每当名词 تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘) 用来表明妇女的暂时性关系时, 后接置于代表妇女这词之前的介词 ب (ba’)。一位阿拉伯诗人说, تَمَتَّعْ بِهَا مَا سَاعَفَتْكَ وَ لَا تَكُنْ عَلَيْكَ شَجًا فِی الْحَلْقِ حِيْنَ تَبِيْنُ (Tamatt‘a biha ma Sa‘afatka wa la Takun ‘alaika Shajan fil Halqi hina Tabinu) (حَمَاسَة, Hamasah), 即只要她合你的意, 可从她得益, 但当她与你分离时, 不要让她像骨梗在喉般地成为你经久烦恼的祸根。可是在本节经文中, هُنَّ (Hunna) 这个指妇女们的代词之前置有介词 مِنْ (min)。对 مُتْعَة (Mut‘ah) 的误解, 看来是对 تَمَتُّعْ(Tamattu‘) 与 اِسْتِمْتَاعْ (Istimta‘)两词之间的差别未能理解而引起。 (لِسَانْ, Lisan) 的作者引述 زَجَّاجْ (Zajjaj) 说: “由于他们对阿拉伯语的无知, 有些人根据这节经文推断出 مُتْعَة (Mut‘ah) 的合法性, 而伊斯兰宗教学家之间意见一致, 声称不合法, فَمَا اسْتَمْتَعْتُمْ بِهِ مِنْهُنَّ (Fa-mastamta‘tum bihi Minhunna) 这个词语的简单的意思是依照上述条文所履行的婚姻。” 如果在这里早对 مُتْعَة (Mut‘ah) 加以注意的话, 所用的介词应该是 ب (ba’), 而不是 مِنْ (min)。而且, 所用的词是 اِسْتَمْتَعَ (Istamta‘a), 而不是与此具有不同意义的 تَمَتَّعَ (Tamatta‘a)。也不能从 اُجُوْرَهُنَّ (Ujurahunna) 这词得出有利于 مُتْعَة (Mut‘ah) 的推断; اُجُوْرَهُنَّ (Ujurahunna) 的意思是 “她们的嫁妆”, 这在 «古兰经» 33:51中也表示过。因此 «古兰经» 断然禁止 مُتْعَة (Mut‘ah) 并把超出正式婚姻之外的两性关系看作通奸。
1
مراد یہ ہے کہ وہ عورتیں جن سے نکاح جائز ہے وہ تو نکاح کے بعد جائز ہوں گی اور پہلی لسٹ والی عورتیں نکاح کے ساتھ بھی جائز نہیں ہو سکتیں‘ ہاں جنگی قیدی عورتیں نکاح کے ساتھ جائز ہو سکتی ہیں۔ اور جب ان کو کوئی نہ چھڑوائے تو ان کی اجازت کی ضرورت نہیں۔ قومی اخلاق کو درست رکھنے کے لئے حکومت ان کا ولی مقرر کرکے ان کا نکاح کر سکتی ہے۔
2
یہ مطلب نہیں کہ مومن زنا کرے گا‘ بلکہ مطلب یہ ہے کہ ہم مومن سے یہی امید کرتے ہیں کہ وہ شادی کے وقت سب تقویٰ کی راہوں کو مدنظر رکھے گا۔ اور زنا کی صورت کے قریب نہ جائے گا۔
a
4:26; 5:6.
b
4:5; 60:11.
504
Important Words:
المحصنات (married) is the plural of محصنة and is derived from حصن meaning, he or it was or became inaccessible, fortified or protected against attack. حصن المرأة means, the woman was chaste, i.e. protected against moral or sexual sinfulness. احصنت المرأة means, the woman got married. محصنة therefore, means a married woman; a chaste woman who abstains from what is unlawful; a free or noble woman as opposed to a bondwoman. Similarly محصن means, a married man; chaste man who abstains from what is unlawful: a free or noble man. حصن means, a fort or a fortress. The word محصنات would, therefore, mean, women who have protected themselves by entering, as it were, the fortress of marriage. The word has been used in the Quran in all the different senses, i.e. (1) married women, (2) chaste women and (3) free women; but in the present verse it has been used in the sense of married women (Lane & Aqrab).
مسافحین (committing fornication) is the active participle from سافح which is derived from سفح. They say سفح الدم i.e. he shed blood or made it flow. سفح الدمع means, tears began to flow. Thus the word is both transitive and intransitive. سافحة means, he vied with the other party in shedding blood; he committed fornication. مسافحة means, a fornicator and مسافحة means, a fornicatress (Lane & Aqrab).
اجور (dowries) is the plural of اجر which means, reward or wages. اجر المرأة means, dowry of a woman (Taj). Also, in 33:51 the word has been used in the sense of dowry.
استمتعتم (the benefit you receive) is formed from متع. They say متعھا بکذا i.e. he gave her (his wife) such a thing. تمتع بالمرأةmeans, he benefited by the woman temporarily. استمتع بکذا means, he benefited by it for a long time. The Arabic idiom does not countenance the use of استمتاع with regard to a woman in the sense of temporary connection (Lisan). It must also be noted that whenever the noun تمتع (tamattu‘) is used to denote temporary connection with a woman, it is followed by the preposition با (ba) put before the word standing for the woman, as in the above example. But in the expression فما استمتعم به منھن to pronoun ھن referring to women is preceded by the preposition من.
ماملکت ایمانکم (what your right hands possess). The Arabs say ھذا ملک یمینی i.e. he or it is in the possession of my right hand, meaning, he or it is in my possession and I can deal with him or it as I like (Lisan & Aqrab). The expression ما ملکت ایمانکمgenerally signifies, men or women taken prisoner in war and being in the custody and control of their Muslim captors. In this verse, the expression means women prisoners only. The term has been used by the Quran in preference to عباد or اماء (slaves and bondwomen) to point to just and rightful possession, the word ایمان (right hands) also pointing to the same fact.
Commentary:
The expression, such as your right hands possess, has been used in the Quran with regard to those men or women who took part in aggressive wars against Islam and fell prisoners into the hands of Muslims. The context, however, shows that the expression used in the present verse means female prisoners of war. Islam does not allow women taken prisoner in ordinary wars to be taken as wives. This exceptional injunction becomes operative only when a hostile nation wages a religious war against Islam with a view to extirpating it and compelling Muslims to abandon their religion at the point of the sword, and treats their prisoners as slaves, as was done in the days of the Holy Prophet when the enemy took away Muslim women as prisoners and treated them as slaves. The Islamic injunction was thus only a retaliatory measure and also served the additional purpose of protecting the morals of captive women who were generally in large numbers and whom war separated from their kith and kin. A people who seek to compel others to forsake their religion at the point of the sword and reduce them to slavery are mere brutes and not respectable human beings. They must be paid back in their own coin in order to bring them to their senses. For a fuller exposition of this subject see General Introduction.
It may be noted that it is not permitted to take into marriage such female relations of a bondwoman who is treated as wife, as correspond to the relations of a free woman within the prohibited degree. For instance, the mothers, sisters, daughters etc. of such bondwomen cannot be taken in marriage.
The advocates of mut‘a (temporary marriage) have endeavoured in vain to infer its legality from this verse. The Quran and the Arabic language both contradict this manifestly unfounded inference. The misunderstanding about mut‘aseems to have arisen from the failure to understand the difference between the meanings of تمتع and استمتاع given under Important Words. The author of Lisanul-‘Arab quotes Zajjaj as saying: "This is a verse in the interpretation of which some men have committed a great blunder, owing to their ignorance of the Arabic language. They have inferred from it the legality of mut‘a which, by the consensus of opinion among Muslim theologians, has been declared to be unlawful, whereas the words simply mean marriage performed in accordance with the conditions mentioned above."
According to Arabic usage, the legality of mut‘a, as asserted by some people, cannot, therefore, be inferred from this verse. If there had been any reference to mut‘a, the preposition used ought to have been با (ba) and not من (min). Moreover, the expression used here is not تمتع but استمتع which possesses a sense different from that of the former word.
Nor can any inference in favour of mut‘a be drawn from the expression اجورھن which, as explained under Important Words, means "their dowries", in which sense it has been used in the Quran elsewhere also (33:51).
On principle, the dowry must be paid immediately at marriage; but with the wife’s consent the payment can be suitably deferred. The husband can increase the amount of the dowry later, if he so desires; but he cannot decrease it except with the permission of the wife or the qadi.
a
4:26; 5:6.
b
4:5; 60:11.
588
Muhsanat is the plural of Muhsanah which means, a married woman; a free woman; a chaste woman (Lane).
589
This means that whereas a woman who is already married to a man cannot be taken in marriage by another person, an exception is made here in case of women who are taken prisoner in a war waged by a non-Muslim State against an Islamic State. This is the significance of the words Ma Malakat Aimanukum. Such married women, if they become converted to Islam and therefore could not be sent back to their non-Muslim husbands, may be married to Muslim husbands. For a detailed note on "What your right hands possess" see {561}.
590
Tamatta‘a bil Mar’ati means, he benefited by the woman temporarily. Istamta‘a bi Kadha means, he benefited by it for a long time. The Arabic idiom does not countenance the use of Istimta‘ with regard to a woman in the sense of temporary connection (Lisan). It may also be noted that whenever the noun Tamattu‘ is used to denote temporary connection with a woman, it is followed by the preposition ba’ put before the word standing for the woman, as in the above example. An Arab poet says, Tamatta‘ biha ma Sa‘afatka wa la Takun ‘alaika Shajan fil Halqi hina Tabinu (Hamasah), i.e. be benefited by her as long as she is agreeable to you, but when she gets separated from you, do not let her be a source of constant trouble for you like a piece of bone which remains stuck in the throat. But in this verse the pronoun Hunna referring to women is preceded by the preposition min. Misunderstanding about Mut‘ah seems to have arisen from the f
وَمَن لَّمْ يَسْتَطِعْ مِنكُمْ طَوْلًا أَن يَنكِحَ ٱلْمُحْصَنَٰتِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنَٰتِ فَمِن مَّا مَلَكَتْ أَيْمَٰنُكُم مِّن فَتَيَٰتِكُمُ ٱلْمُؤْمِنَٰتِ ۚ وَٱللَّهُ أَعْلَمُ بِإِيمَٰنِكُم ۚ بَعْضُكُم مِّنۢ بَعْضٍ ۚ فَٱنكِحُوهُنَّ بِإِذْنِ أَهْلِهِنَّ وَءَاتُوهُنَّ أُجُورَهُنَّ بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ مُحْصَنَٰتٍ غَيْرَ مُسَٰفِحَٰتٍ وَلَا مُتَّخِذَٰتِ أَخْدَانٍ ۚ فَإِذَآ أُحْصِنَّ فَإِنْ أَتَيْنَ بِفَٰحِشَةٍ فَعَلَيْهِنَّ نِصْفُ مَا عَلَى ٱلْمُحْصَنَٰتِ مِنَ ٱلْعَذَابِ ۚ ذَٰلِكَ لِمَنْ خَشِىَ ٱلْعَنَتَ مِنكُمْ ۚ وَأَن تَصْبِرُوا۟ خَيْرٌ لَّكُمْ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ
4:16, 20; 24:20.
本节经文规定了三条重要原则: (a) 女奴应先正式结婚而后才发生夫妻关系。这在 2:222; 4:4; 及24:33各章中也明确说明。因此伊斯兰教根除了它诞生以前阿拉伯社会非常盛行的男女非法同居。(b) 如果女奴犯了通奸, 其处罚为自由妇女犯同样罪恶, 打100鞭子的一半, 这说明用石头砸死并非 (像被误解的那样) 是对通奸的惩罚, 因为用石头砸死是无法减半的。(c) 顺便提一下, 经文似乎指出, 在阿拉伯社会, 结婚的女奴比结婚的自由妇女享有较低的社会地位, 这也许因为女奴曾参加过摧毁伊斯兰教国家的战争。
یہ مطلب نہیں کہ پاکباز ہوں تو مہر دو ورنہ نہ دو۔ بلکہ مطلب یہ ہے کہ ایسی ہی لونڈیوں سے نکاح کرو جن کی پاک دامنی تم پر ثابت ہو۔ اور پھر ان کے مہر آزاد عورتوں کی طرح ادا کرو۔
یعنی لونڈیوں سے شادی کرنا صرف اضطراری حالت میں جائز ہے۔ کیونکہ وہ غیر مذہب اور غیر قوم سے تعلق رکھتی ہیں۔ بہتر یہی ہے کہ اپنی ہم مذہب اور ہم قوم آزاد عورت سے شادی کرو۔
4:16, 20; 24:20.
In Islam no stigma attaches to the status of a handmaid as such; but owing to her relationships and associations she may not prove such a perfect companion as a free believing woman.
This means that only such of them may be married as are chaste and virtuous. Once they are married their dowries must be paid just as in the case of free women.
The verse has laid down three vital principles: (a) Bondwomen should be properly married before conjugal relations are had with them. This is also clear from 2:222; 4:4; and 24:33. Thus Islam has cut at the root of concubinage which was so prevalent in Arab society before its advent. (b) If they commit adultery, bondwomen are to have half the punishment which is 100 stripes for free women for the same offence which shows that stoning to death is not the punishment for adultery, as mistakenly understood, because stoning to death cannot be halved. (c) Incidentally, the verse seems to indicate that a bondwoman taken in marriage had a lower social status in Arab society than a free woman taken in marriage, perhaps because of her having taken part in a war waged to destroy an Islamic State.
4:16, 20; 24:20.
Important Words:
طولا (to afford) is noun from طال i.e. he or it was or became long, tall or high. طول means, bounty or gift; ampleness of means; excellence; excess or increase; power or ability; wealth or competence. It may also mean, dowry or expenses of marriage (Lane, Aqrab & Mufradat).
اخدان (secret paramours) is the plural of خدن. They say خادنه i.e. he was or became his friend or companion; or he was or became his secret or private friend. اخدان means friends or secret friends; amorous companions or associates; companions or associates affected with sensual appetency (Lane & Mufradat).
العنت (sins) is the noun-infinitive from عنت i.e. he fell into a difficulty; or he committed a sin or a crime or an act of disobedience; or he committed fornication or adultery. عنت therefore, means, severe difficulty or hardship; a state of perdition; a corrupt or evil state or conduct; a sin or crime, or an act of disobedience deserving punishment; a wrong action (intentional or unintentional); fornication or adultery (Lane & Aqrab). See also 3:119, 2:221.
Commentary:
As God attaches great value to the faith of a Muslim, He does not like it to become impaired by his marrying disbelieving women. Hence the condition that even the bondwoman a Muslim may marry should be a believer.
The words, you are all one from another, are meant to raise believing bondwomen in the estimation of Muslims, who are hereby required not to despise them or treat them with contempt on account of their so-called lower status.
The words, half the punishment, mean 50 stripes, the punishment for (unmarried) free women being 100 stripes. See also 24:3. The word half shows that the verse refers to a punishment which can be halved, and not to stoning to death, which was inflicted on married free women. The punishment definitely prescribed in the Quran (24:3) for a fornicator and a fornicatress is only a hundred stripes, but as the Holy Prophet differentiated between married and unmarried persons, inflicting on the former the punishment of stoning to death, the aforesaid verse has been taken as only applying to unmarried persons.
The expression, this is for him among you who fears lest he should commit sin, shows that Muslims are enjoined to avoid, as far as possible, contracting conjugal relations with bond women taken prisoner from belligerent disbelievers. This is to be done only if, on the one hand, one is not able to marry a free woman and, on the other, by remaining unmarried, one fears to fall into sin. The Muslim Empire of Baghdad fell to pieces because the khalifahs took to contracting conjugal relations with bondwomen. The incompetent princes born of them ruined the State. In most cases, marital relations with bondwomen are calculated to have a demoralizing effect on both husbands and children.
a
4:16, 20; 24:20.
324
本节经文规定了三条重要原则: (a) 女奴应先正式结婚而后才发生夫妻关系。这在 2:222; 4:4; 及24:33各章中也明确说明。因此伊斯兰教根除了它诞生以前阿拉伯社会非常盛行的男女非法同居。(b) 如果女奴犯了通奸, 其处罚为自由妇女犯同样罪恶, 打100鞭子的一半, 这说明用石头砸死并非 (像被误解的那样) 是对通奸的惩罚, 因为用石头砸死是无法减半的。(c) 顺便提一下, 经文似乎指出, 在阿拉伯社会, 结婚的女奴比结婚的自由妇女享有较低的社会地位, 这也许因为女奴曾参加过摧毁伊斯兰教国家的战争。
3
یہ مطلب نہیں کہ پاکباز ہوں تو مہر دو ورنہ نہ دو۔ بلکہ مطلب یہ ہے کہ ایسی ہی لونڈیوں سے نکاح کرو جن کی پاک دامنی تم پر ثابت ہو۔ اور پھر ان کے مہر آزاد عورتوں کی طرح ادا کرو۔
4
یعنی لونڈیوں سے شادی کرنا صرف اضطراری حالت میں جائز ہے۔ کیونکہ وہ غیر مذہب اور غیر قوم سے تعلق رکھتی ہیں۔ بہتر یہی ہے کہ اپنی ہم مذہب اور ہم قوم آزاد عورت سے شادی کرو۔
a
4:16, 20; 24:20.
505
Important Words:
طولا (to afford) is noun from طال i.e. he or it was or became long, tall or high. طول means, bounty or gift; ampleness of means; excellence; excess or increase; power or ability; wealth or competence. It may also mean, dowry or expenses of marriage (Lane, Aqrab & Mufradat).
اخدان (secret paramours) is the plural of خدن. They say خادنه i.e. he was or became his friend or companion; or he was or became his secret or private friend. اخدان means friends or secret friends; amorous companions or associates; companions or associates affected with sensual appetency (Lane & Mufradat).
العنت (sins) is the noun-infinitive from عنت i.e. he fell into a difficulty; or he committed a sin or a crime or an act of disobedience; or he committed fornication or adultery. عنت therefore, means, severe difficulty or hardship; a state of perdition; a corrupt or evil state or conduct; a sin or crime, or an act of disobedience deserving punishment; a wrong action (intentional or unintentional); fornication or adultery (Lane & Aqrab). See also 3:119, 2:221.
Commentary:
As God attaches great value to the faith of a Muslim, He does not like it to become impaired by his marrying disbelieving women. Hence the condition that even the bondwoman a Muslim may marry should be a believer.
The words, you are all one from another, are meant to raise believing bondwomen in the estimation of Muslims, who are hereby required not to despise them or treat them with contempt on account of their so-called lower status.
The words, half the punishment, mean 50 stripes, the punishment for (unmarried) free women being 100 stripes. See also 24:3. The word half shows that the verse refers to a punishment which can be halved, and not to stoning to death, which was inflicted on married free women. The punishment definitely prescribed in the Quran (24:3) for a fornicator and a fornicatress is only a hundred stripes, but as the Holy Prophet differentiated between married and unmarried persons, inflicting on the former the punishment of stoning to death, the aforesaid verse has been taken as only applying to unmarried persons.
The expression, this is for him among you who fears lest he should commit sin, shows that Muslims are enjoined to avoid, as far as possible, contracting conjugal relations with bond women taken prisoner from belligerent disbelievers. This is to be done only if, on the one hand, one is not able to marry a free woman and, on the other, by remaining unmarried, one fears to fall into sin. The Muslim Empire of Baghdad fell to pieces because the khalifahs took to contracting conjugal relations with bondwomen. The incompetent princes born of them ruined the State. In most cases, marital relations with bondwomen are calculated to have a demoralizing effect on both husbands and children.
a
4:16, 20; 24:20.
591
In Islam no stigma attaches to the status of a handmaid as such; but owing to her relationships and associations she may not prove such a perfect companion as a free believing woman.
591A
This means that only such of them may be married as are chaste and virtuous. Once they are married their dowries must be paid just as in the case of free women.
592
The verse has laid down three vital principles: (a) Bondwomen should be properly married before conjugal relations are had with them. This is also clear from 2:222; 4:4; and 24:33. Thus Islam has cut at the root of concubinage which was so prevalent in Arab society before its advent. (b) If they commit adultery, bondwomen are to have half the punishment which is 100 stripes for free women for the same offence which shows that stoning to death is not the punishment for adultery, as mistakenly understood, because stoning to death cannot be halved. (c) Incidentally, the verse seems to indicate that a bondwoman taken in marriage had a lower social status in Arab society than a free woman taken in marriage, perhaps because of her having taken part in a war waged to destroy an Islamic State.
يُرِيدُ ٱللَّهُ لِيُبَيِّنَ لَكُمْ وَيَهْدِيَكُمْ سُنَنَ ٱلَّذِينَ مِن قَبْلِكُمْ وَيَتُوبَ عَلَيْكُمْ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ عَلِيمٌ حَكِيمٌ
4:177.
4:177.
4:177.
b
4:177.
a
4:177.
a
4:177.
وَٱللَّهُ يُرِيدُ أَن يَتُوبَ عَلَيْكُمْ وَيُرِيدُ ٱلَّذِينَ يَتَّبِعُونَ ٱلشَّهَوَٰتِ أَن تَمِيلُوا۟ مَيْلًا عَظِيمًا
9:104; 33:74; 42:26.
آیت میں عَظِیْم کا لفظ ہے مگر اردو میں ’’بہت جھک جاؤ‘‘ نہیں کہتے بلکہ ’’بالکل جھک جاؤ‘‘ کہتے ہیں۔ اس لئے ’’بالکل‘‘ ترجمہ کیا گیا ہے۔
9:104; 33:74; 42:26.
9:104; 33:74; 42:26.
Commentary:
In the matter of bondwomen, the Quran wants Muslims to exercise self-control, without which it is feared they may deviate from the path of moral rectitude.
a
9:104; 33:74; 42:26.
2
آیت میں عَظِیْم کا لفظ ہے مگر اردو میں ’’بہت جھک جاؤ‘‘ نہیں کہتے بلکہ ’’بالکل جھک جاؤ‘‘ کہتے ہیں۔ اس لئے ’’بالکل‘‘ ترجمہ کیا گیا ہے۔
a
9:104; 33:74; 42:26.
506
Commentary:
In the matter of bondwomen, the Quran wants Muslims to exercise self-control, without which it is feared they may deviate from the path of moral rectitude.
b
9:104; 33:74; 42:26.
يُرِيدُ ٱللَّهُ أَن يُخَفِّفَ عَنكُمْ ۚ وَخُلِقَ ٱلْإِنسَٰنُ ضَعِيفًا
安拉启示经典的原因是, 人的天性是懦弱的, 而且自己找不到精神提高的途径。安拉取走了人的这一负担。这节经文驳斥了基督教的赎罪教义, 这个教义以人性的弱点为根据, 拒绝经律 شَرِيْعَةْ (Shari‘ah)。伊斯兰教实际上声称, 人性的弱点就是启示经律的理由, 以便有助于人类完成崇高的天命。因此, 经典不是灾祸, 而是帮助, 是幸福。
The reason why God has revealed the Law is that man is by nature weak and cannot himself find out the ways of spiritual advancement. God has taken away this burden from him. The verse also constitutes a refutation of the Christian doctrine of Atonement which rejects the Law (Shari‘ah) on the ground of human weakness. As a matter of fact, Islam declares human weakness to be the very reason for the revelation of the Law, so that it may help man to fulfil his high destiny. The Law, therefore, is not a curse but a help and a blessing.
Commentary:
The reason why the Law is revealed is that man is by nature weak and cannot himself find out the ways of spiritual advancement. So God has taken this burden from him. It was far from God to entrust man with a work which he could not discharge.
The verse also constitutes refutation of the Christian doctrine of Atone-ment which rejects the Law (Shari‘ah) on the ground of human weakness. As a matter of fact, Islam declares human weakness to be the very reason for the revelation of the Law, so that it may help man to fulfil his high destiny. The Law is not, therefore, a curse but a help and a blessing.
325
安拉启示经典的原因是, 人的天性是懦弱的, 而且自己找不到精神提高的途径。安拉取走了人的这一负担。这节经文驳斥了基督教的赎罪教义, 这个教义以人性的弱点为根据, 拒绝经律 شَرِيْعَةْ (Shari‘ah)。伊斯兰教实际上声称, 人性的弱点就是启示经律的理由, 以便有助于人类完成崇高的天命。因此, 经典不是灾祸, 而是帮助, 是幸福。
507
Commentary:
The reason why the Law is revealed is that man is by nature weak and cannot himself find out the ways of spiritual advancement. So God has taken this burden from him. It was far from God to entrust man with a work which he could not discharge.
The verse also constitutes refutation of the Christian doctrine of Atone-ment which rejects the Law (Shari‘ah) on the ground of human weakness. As a matter of fact, Islam declares human weakness to be the very reason for the revelation of the Law, so that it may help man to fulfil his high destiny. The Law is not, therefore, a curse but a help and a blessing.
593
The reason why God has revealed the Law is that man is by nature weak and cannot himself find out the ways of spiritual advancement. God has taken away this burden from him. The verse also constitutes a refutation of the Christian doctrine of Atonement which rejects the Law (Shari‘ah) on the ground of human weakness. As a matter of fact, Islam declares human weakness to be the very reason for the revelation of the Law, so that it may help man to fulfil his high destiny. The Law, therefore, is not a curse but a help and a blessing.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ لَا تَأْكُلُوٓا۟ أَمْوَٰلَكُم بَيْنَكُم بِٱلْبَٰطِلِ إِلَّآ أَن تَكُونَ تِجَٰرَةً عَن تَرَاضٍ مِّنكُمْ ۚ وَلَا تَقْتُلُوٓا۟ أَنفُسَكُمْ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ بِكُمْ رَحِيمًا
2:189.
2:189.
2:189.
Commentary:
By unlawful means is meant all those means and methods which are forbidden by the Law.
The verse declares all commercial transactions without the mutual consent of seller and buyer to be null and void.
The clause, kill not yourselves, makes it clear that the devouring of other person’s property by unlawful means, or carrying on transaction without the free consent of the parties concerned brings about the moral death of the guilty party.
The words, kill not yourselves, also imply interdiction of suicide. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said, "Whosoever kills himself with a weapon, will be brought on the Day of Judgement with the said weapon in his hand and will be thrown into the Fire wherein he will abide. And whosoever kills himself with a poison will be thrown into the Fire, with that poison in his hand, where he will continue to take it" (Kathir).
b
2:189.
a
2:189.
508
Commentary:
By unlawful means is meant all those means and methods which are forbidden by the Law.
The verse declares all commercial transactions without the mutual consent of seller and buyer to be null and void.
The clause, kill not yourselves, makes it clear that the devouring of other person’s property by unlawful means, or carrying on transaction without the free consent of the parties concerned brings about the moral death of the guilty party.
The words, kill not yourselves, also imply interdiction of suicide. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said, "Whosoever kills himself with a weapon, will be brought on the Day of Judgement with the said weapon in his hand and will be thrown into the Fire wherein he will abide. And whosoever kills himself with a poison will be thrown into the Fire, with that poison in his hand, where he will continue to take it" (Kathir).
c
2:189.
وَمَن يَفْعَلْ ذَٰلِكَ عُدْوَٰنًا وَظُلْمًا فَسَوْفَ نُصْلِيهِ نَارًا ۚ وَكَانَ ذَٰلِكَ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ يَسِيرًا
إِن تَجْتَنِبُوا۟ كَبَآئِرَ مَا تُنْهَوْنَ عَنْهُ نُكَفِّرْ عَنكُمْ سَيِّـَٔاتِكُمْ وَنُدْخِلْكُم مُّدْخَلًا كَرِيمًا
42:38; 53:33.
42:38; 53:33.
There is no classification of less or more grievous sins in the Qur’an. The term is rather a relative one. The commission of anything forbidden by God is a sin and the commission of all sins which one finds difficult to avoid is grievous. The meaning of the verse seems to be that if a person avoids doing those things the giving up of which seems difficult and burdensome to him, he will be enabled to get rid of other sins as well. Some scholars interpret the word Kaba’ir (grievous sins) as signifying the last stage of each act of sin. If one restrains oneself from committing the final act, the preliminary ones will be forgiven him.
42:38; 53:33.
Commentary:
Truly speaking, there is no classification of more grievous and less grievous sins in the Quran. Rather, the term is a relative one. The commission of anything forbidden by God is a sin, and the commission of all sins which one finds difficult to shun is grievous. The meaning of the verse, therefore, is that if you avoid doing those things the giving up of which seems difficult and burdensome to you, the result will be that you will be enabled to get rid of other sins as well. Some scholars interpret the word کبائر (grievous sins) as signifying the last stage of each act of sin. For instance, a person contemplates committing a theft. Now, whereas the actual commitment of theft is "grievous", the preliminary acts leading up to it would be "minor evils." If one restrains oneself from committing the final act, the preliminary ones will be forgiven him.
c
42:38; 53:33.
a
42:38; 53:33.
509
Commentary:
Truly speaking, there is no classification of more grievous and less grievous sins in the Quran. Rather, the term is a relative one. The commission of anything forbidden by God is a sin, and the commission of all sins which one finds difficult to shun is grievous. The meaning of the verse, therefore, is that if you avoid doing those things the giving up of which seems difficult and burdensome to you, the result will be that you will be enabled to get rid of other sins as well. Some scholars interpret the word کبائر (grievous sins) as signifying the last stage of each act of sin. For instance, a person contemplates committing a theft. Now, whereas the actual commitment of theft is "grievous", the preliminary acts leading up to it would be "minor evils." If one restrains oneself from committing the final act, the preliminary ones will be forgiven him.
a
42:38; 53:33.
594
There is no classification of less or more grievous sins in the Qur’an. The term is rather a relative one. The commission of anything forbidden by God is a sin and the commission of all sins which one finds difficult to avoid is grievous. The meaning of the verse seems to be that if a person avoids doing those things the giving up of which seems difficult and burdensome to him, he will be enabled to get rid of other sins as well. Some scholars interpret the word Kaba’ir (grievous sins) as signifying the last stage of each act of sin. If one restrains oneself from committing the final act, the preliminary ones will be forgiven him.
وَلَا تَتَمَنَّوْا۟ مَا فَضَّلَ ٱللَّهُ بِهِۦ بَعْضَكُمْ عَلَىٰ بَعْضٍ ۚ لِّلرِّجَالِ نَصِيبٌ مِّمَّا ٱكْتَسَبُوا۟ ۖ وَلِلنِّسَآءِ نَصِيبٌ مِّمَّا ٱكْتَسَبْنَ ۚ وَسْـَٔلُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ مِن فَضْلِهِۦٓ ۗ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ بِكُلِّ شَىْءٍ عَلِيمًا
4:35.
4:35.
The verse establishes the equality of men and women so far as their works and rewards are concerned.
4:35.
Commentary:
The first part of the verse means that: (1) One should not pray that God may give one the very thing which another man possesses; (2) One may, however, pray that God may bestow on one "the like of that" which has been given to another man; (3) That while praying, one should not keep in view any particular favoured person, wishing that God may make one like that particular person, for it may be the will of God to bestow His favours upon one in even a greater measure. One should only pray to God generally for His bounty and grace, for Allah’s bounty and grace are unbounded.
The words, Men shall have a share of that which they have earned, etc., contain the key to national progress and advance. Both men and women get what they earn and deserve. So we should not wish evil for others but should work and pray. This is the way to succeed in life and to win the pleasure of God. The words also reveal the equality of men and women so far as their work and reward are concerned.
d
4:35.
b
4:35.
510
Commentary:
The first part of the verse means that: (1) One should not pray that God may give one the very thing which another man possesses; (2) One may, however, pray that God may bestow on one "the like of that" which has been given to another man; (3) That while praying, one should not keep in view any particular favoured person, wishing that God may make one like that particular person, for it may be the will of God to bestow His favours upon one in even a greater measure. One should only pray to God generally for His bounty and grace, for Allah’s bounty and grace are unbounded.
The words, Men shall have a share of that which they have earned, etc., contain the key to national progress and advance. Both men and women get what they earn and deserve. So we should not wish evil for others but should work and pray. This is the way to succeed in life and to win the pleasure of God. The words also reveal the equality of men and women so far as their work and reward are concerned.
b
4:35.
595
The verse establishes the equality of men and women so far as their works and rewards are concerned.
وَلِكُلٍّ جَعَلْنَا مَوَٰلِىَ مِمَّا تَرَكَ ٱلْوَٰلِدَانِ وَٱلْأَقْرَبُونَ ۚ وَٱلَّذِينَ عَقَدَتْ أَيْمَٰنُكُمْ فَـَٔاتُوهُمْ نَصِيبَهُمْ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ عَلَىٰ كُلِّ شَىْءٍ شَهِيدًا
4:8.
اس آیت کے متعلق مفسرین لکھتے ہیں کہ عَقَدَتْ اَیْمَانُکُمْ میں اشارہ ایسے دوستوں کی طرف ہے جن کو حلیف بنا لیا گیا تھا یعنی قسموں سے اپنے بھائی قرار دیا گیا تھا۔ وہ پہلے وارث ہوتے تھے بعد میں رسول کریم صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم نے ان کو ورثہ سے محروم کر دیا۔ لیکن یہ معنے درست نہیں کیونکہ اس آیت میں تو عَقَدَتْ اَیْمَانُکُمْ والوں کو وارث قرار دیا ہے۔ پس منسوخی کا سوال ہی نہیں۔ اگر مفسرین کی بات مانی جائے تو پھر یہ معنے کرنے ہوں گے کہ اس آیت سے ان کو وارث قرار دیا گیا تھا۔ مگر حدیث نے ان کو غیر وارث قرار دے دیا یعنی حدیث قرآن کی ناسخ ہے اور یہ بات اکثر فقہاء کے نزدیک
4:8.
Mawali is the plural of Maula which among other things means, an heir.
Besides the meaning given in the text the words may mean: "To every one We have appointed heirs to what he leaves, they are the parents, the relations and those, with whom your oaths have ratified contracts. So give them their portion." The words may also be rendered as, "to everything which parents and relations leave We have appointed heirs, etc."
4:8.
Important Words:
موالی (heirs) is derived from ولی and is the plural of مولی which means, lord or chief; master or owner; son of a paternal uncle; or a relation such as a son of a paternal uncle and the like; a freedman whom the emancipator is bound to aid and whose property he inherits if he dies leaving no heir; a slave; emancipator of a slave; a neighbour; an ally; a friend or helper; a follower; a partner; an heir, etc. (Lane & Lisan).
Commentary:
The verse may also be rendered thus: "To every one We have appointed heirs to what he leaves. They are the parents, the relations and those with whom your oaths have ratified a contract. So give them their portion." Again, the verse may also be rendered as: "To everything which parents and relations leave we have appointed heirs, etc."
The words, with whom your oaths have ratified a contract, signify "spouses" embracing both husbands and wives. The pronoun "them" in the clause, so give them their portion, refers to, and stands for, the noun "heirs" in the opening clause.
a
4:8.
1
اس آیت کے متعلق مفسرین لکھتے ہیں کہ عَقَدَتْ اَیْمَانُکُمْ میں اشارہ ایسے دوستوں کی طرف ہے جن کو حلیف بنا لیا گیا تھا یعنی قسموں سے اپنے بھائی قرار دیا گیا تھا۔ وہ پہلے وارث ہوتے تھے بعد میں رسول کریم صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم نے ان کو ورثہ سے محروم کر دیا۔ لیکن یہ معنے درست نہیں کیونکہ اس آیت میں تو عَقَدَتْ اَیْمَانُکُمْ والوں کو وارث قرار دیا ہے۔ پس منسوخی کا سوال ہی نہیں۔ اگر مفسرین کی بات مانی جائے تو پھر یہ معنے کرنے ہوں گے کہ اس آیت سے ان کو وارث قرار دیا گیا تھا۔ مگر حدیث نے ان کو غیر وارث قرار دے دیا یعنی حدیث قرآن کی ناسخ ہے اور یہ بات اکثر فقہاء کے نزدیک
a
4:8.
511
Important Words:
موالی (heirs) is derived from ولی and is the plural of مولی which means, lord or chief; master or owner; son of a paternal uncle; or a relation such as a son of a paternal uncle and the like; a freedman whom the emancipator is bound to aid and whose property he inherits if he dies leaving no heir; a slave; emancipator of a slave; a neighbour; an ally; a friend or helper; a follower; a partner; an heir, etc. (Lane & Lisan).
Commentary:
The verse may also be rendered thus: "To every one We have appointed heirs to what he leaves. They are the parents, the relations and those with whom your oaths have ratified a contract. So give them their portion." Again, the verse may also be rendered as: "To everything which parents and relations leave we have appointed heirs, etc."
The words, with whom your oaths have ratified a contract, signify "spouses" embracing both husbands and wives. The pronoun "them" in the clause, so give them their portion, refers to, and stands for, the noun "heirs" in the opening clause.
c
4:8.
596
Mawali is the plural of Maula which among other things means, an heir.
597
Besides the meaning given in the text the words may mean: "To every one We have appointed heirs to what he leaves, they are the parents, the relations and those, with whom your oaths have ratified contracts. So give them their portion." The words may also be rendered as, "to everything which parents and relations leave We have appointed heirs, etc."
ٱلرِّجَالُ قَوَّٰمُونَ عَلَى ٱلنِّسَآءِ بِمَا فَضَّلَ ٱللَّهُ بَعْضَهُمْ عَلَىٰ بَعْضٍ وَبِمَآ أَنفَقُوا۟ مِنْ أَمْوَٰلِهِمْ ۚ فَٱلصَّٰلِحَٰتُ قَٰنِتَٰتٌ حَٰفِظَٰتٌ لِّلْغَيْبِ بِمَا حَفِظَ ٱللَّهُ ۚ وَٱلَّٰتِى تَخَافُونَ نُشُوزَهُنَّ فَعِظُوهُنَّ وَٱهْجُرُوهُنَّ فِى ٱلْمَضَاجِعِ وَٱضْرِبُوهُنَّ ۖ فَإِنْ أَطَعْنَكُمْ فَلَا تَبْغُوا۟ عَلَيْهِنَّ سَبِيلًا ۗ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ عَلِيًّا كَبِيرًا
2:238; 4:33.
2:229.
قَوّٰمُوْن (Qawwamun) 源自 قَامَ عَلَى الْمَرْأَةِ (Qama ‘Alal-Mar’ati) 意指他负责赡养妇女; 他保护她。因此, قَوّٰمُوْن (Qawwamun) 意指赡养者, 事务管理人; 保护人 (لِسَانْ, Lisan)。经文对男人为什么一直作为家庭之主, 说明了两条道理: (a) 他优越的智力与体力; (b) 他是家庭中谋生者和赡养人。因此, 为赡养家庭而谋生计并给钱的他, 处理家事中享有监管的地位, 这是自然而公正的。
نَشَزَتِ الْمَرْأَةُ عَلٰی زَوْجِهَا (Nashazatil-Mar’atu ‘ala Zauji-ha) 意指妇女起来反对她的丈夫; 反抗他; 遗弃他 (Lane & تَاجْ, Taj)。
这一句话可以解释为 (a) 违避夫妻关系; (b) 分床睡觉; (c) 不与她们讲话。这些办法并不是无限期实行的方法, 因为妻子不可能像东西那样悬挂起来。(4:130) 按照 «古兰经» 戒绝夫妻关系即实际分离, 最长期限为四个月。(2:227) 如果丈夫认为事情很严重, 他将必须奉行4:16中所提到的各项条件。
据传穆圣说过, 如果一个穆斯林既然非得打他妻子不可, 也不能在她身上打出伤痕来。(تِرْمِذِی, Tirmidhi & مُسْلِمْ, Muslim) 但打妻子的丈夫总不是你们男人中最好的。(كَثِيْر, Kathir, iii)
نافرمانی سے اس جگہ زنا مرادنہیں بلکہ اس سے اتر کر گناہ مراد ہے جن سے ہمسایوں میں انسان کی بے عزتی ہوتی ہے۔ اس لئے ایسی سزا مقرر کی جس سے عورت عام طور پر محلہ میں نہ پھر سکے۔ ہاں اگر اس میں مرد ظلم سے کام لے تو عورت کو قاضی کے پاس شکایت کرنے کی اجازت ہے۔
2:229.
2:238; 4:33.
Qawwamun is derived from Qama and Qama ‘Alal-Mar’ati means, he undertook the maintenance of the woman; he protected her. Qawwamun, therefore, means, maintainers, managers of affairs; protectors (Lisan). The verse gives two reasons why man has been made the head of the family, (a) his superior mental and physical faculties; and (b) his being the bread-earner and maintainer of the family. It is, therefore, natural and fair that he, who earns and supplies the money for the maintenance of the family, should enjoy a supervisory status in the disposal of its affairs.
Nashazatu-Mar’atu ‘ala Zauji-ha means, the woman rose against her husband; resisted him; deserted him (Lane & Taj).
The clause may signify, (a) abstention from conjugal relations; (b) sleeping in separate beds; (c) ceasing to talk to them. These measures are not to remain in force for an indefinite period, for wives are not to be left like a thing suspended (4:130). Four months, according to the Qur’an, is the maximum limit for abstention from conjugal relations, i.e. practical separation (2:227). If the husband deems the affair to be sufficiently grave, he will have to observe the conditions mentioned in 4:16.
The Holy Prophet is reported to have said that if at all a Muslim has to beat his wife, the beating should not be such as to leave any mark on her body (Tirmidhi & Muslim) but the husbands who beat their wives are not the best among men (Kathir, iii).
2:229.
2:238; 4:33.
Important Words:
قوامون (guardians) is derived from قام i.e. he stood. They say قام علیه i.e. he tended or took care of it or him. قام بالیتم means, he maintained the orphan. قام علی المرأة means, he undertook the maintenance of the woman; he undertook or managed her affairs; he protected her, or became her guardian. قوم الشیء (qawwama) means, he set the thing right, or made it straight or even. قوام therefore means, one who manages affairs well; a ruler or governor; one in a position to issue orders (Lane & Aqrab).
قانتات (obedient) is the plural of قانتة being the active participle from قنت. They say قنت لله i.e. he was obedient to God. امرأة قنوت means, a woman humble, submissive and obedient to her husband (Lane). See also 2:117.
نشوز (disobedience) is the noun-infinitive from نشز i.e. he rose or raised himself. نشزت المرأة علی زوجھا means, the woman rose against, or was disobedient to her husband and exalted herself against him and resisted him and was an evil companion to him. نشز المرء علی زوجته means, the husband treated his wife unjustly and was unkind to her or forsook her or hated her and was an evil companion to her (Lane & Aqrab).
اھجروھن (leave them alone). ھجر means, he cut him off from friendly or loving communion or intercourse; he forsook or abandoned him; he "cut" him, i.e. he boycotted him and ceased to speak to him or to associate with him. ھجر الشیء means, he forsook, or abandoned the thing; he shunned or avoided it. ھجر زوجته means, he separated himself from his wife or kept away from her (Lane & Mufradat).
اضربوھن (chastise them) is derived from ضرب. They say ضربه i.e. he beat, struck, smote or hit him (with hand, stick, etc.); hence, he chastised him.
علیا (High) is derived from علا i.e. he or it was or became high, elevated, lofty or exalted. تعالی means, he was or became high, elevated, exalted or supremely exalted or extolled. علی means high, elevated or lofty in rank, condition or state. العلیwhich is one of the attributive names of God (e.g. 2:256) means, the High; the Most High; He above Whom is nothing. المتعالی is also an attributive name of God (e.g. 13:10) meaning, He Who is Great or Supremely Great, the High or the Most High; One Higher than every other high one. تعال means, come thou, as if said by a man in a high place when calling upon a man in a low place, but is also used generally (Lane).
Commentary:
The verse gives two reasons why man has been made the head of the family: (a) his superior mental and physical powers; (b) his being bread-earner and maintainer of the family. It is natural and fair that he who earns and supplies the money should have the final say in the disposal of affairs.
The word قانتات (obedient) spoken of wives may mean either obedient to God, or to husbands.
The expression, guard the secrets of their husbands, means that when the husbands are at home, they are obedient to them and guard their secrets; and when they are away, they not only guard their secrets but take care of their property and guard their own chastity.
The clause, leave them alone in their beds, may mean: (a) abstention from conjugal relations with them; (b) sleeping in separate beds; or (c) ceasing to talk to them. The use of the word "beds" also incidentally implies that the disobedient wives are to stay at home and are not to be allowed to leave or be turned out of their homes.
The measures mentioned in the verse are not to remain in force for an indefinite period, for wives are not to be left like a thing suspended (4:130). Four months, according to the Quran, is the utmost limit for abstention from conjugal relations, i.e. for practical separation (2:227).
If the husband deems the affair to be sufficiently grave, he will have to observe the conditions mentioned in 4:16.
Regarding "chastisement" mentioned as a last resort in the verse under comment a Companion reports the Holy Prophet to have said that if at all a Muslim has to beat his wife, the beating should not be such as to leave any mark on her body (Tirmidhi, ch. on Rida‘). According to Abu Dawud and Nasa’i, the Holy Prophet forbade the beating of women at all, but when ‘Umar complained that they had become refractory, he gave the permission with the aforementioned condition; but on complaint of ill-treatment of women by their husbands he indignantly said that the husbands who beat their wives were not the best among men (Kathir, iii). On another occasion the Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "The best among you is he who treats his wife best and I am the best of you in this respect" (Tirmidhi).
The Divine attributes of "High and Great" mentioned at the end of the verse are also intended to warn husbands that the chastisement of their wives, if at all resorted to should not be unjust or vindictive or highhanded; for if they are high and great above their wives, there is One Who is High and Great above all and He shall call husbands to account for any improper use of the qualified authority given to them over their wives.
b
2:238; 4:33.
c
2:229.
326
قَوّٰمُوْن (Qawwamun) 源自 قَامَ عَلَى الْمَرْأَةِ (Qama ‘Alal-Mar’ati) 意指他负责赡养妇女; 他保护她。因此, قَوّٰمُوْن (Qawwamun) 意指赡养者, 事务管理人; 保护人 (لِسَانْ, Lisan)。经文对男人为什么一直作为家庭之主, 说明了两条道理: (a) 他优越的智力与体力; (b) 他是家庭中谋生者和赡养人。因此, 为赡养家庭而谋生计并给钱的他, 处理家事中享有监管的地位, 这是自然而公正的。
327
نَشَزَتِ الْمَرْأَةُ عَلٰی زَوْجِهَا (Nashazatil-Mar’atu ‘ala Zauji-ha) 意指妇女起来反对她的丈夫; 反抗他; 遗弃他 (Lane & تَاجْ, Taj)。
328
这一句话可以解释为 (a) 违避夫妻关系; (b) 分床睡觉; (c) 不与她们讲话。这些办法并不是无限期实行的方法, 因为妻子不可能像东西那样悬挂起来。(4:130) 按照 «古兰经» 戒绝夫妻关系即实际分离, 最长期限为四个月。(2:227) 如果丈夫认为事情很严重, 他将必须奉行4:16中所提到的各项条件。
329
据传穆圣说过, 如果一个穆斯林既然非得打他妻子不可, 也不能在她身上打出伤痕来。(تِرْمِذِی, Tirmidhi & مُسْلِمْ, Muslim) 但打妻子的丈夫总不是你们男人中最好的。(كَثِيْر, Kathir, iii)
2
نافرمانی سے اس جگہ زنا مرادنہیں بلکہ اس سے اتر کر گناہ مراد ہے جن سے ہمسایوں میں انسان کی بے عزتی ہوتی ہے۔ اس لئے ایسی سزا مقرر کی جس سے عورت عام طور پر محلہ میں نہ پھر سکے۔ ہاں اگر اس میں مرد ظلم سے کام لے تو عورت کو قاضی کے پاس شکایت کرنے کی اجازت ہے۔
b
2:229.
c
2:238; 4:33.
512
Important Words:
قوامون (guardians) is derived from قام i.e. he stood. They say قام علیه i.e. he tended or took care of it or him. قام بالیتم means, he maintained the orphan. قام علی المرأة means, he undertook the maintenance of the woman; he undertook or managed her affairs; he protected her, or became her guardian. قوم الشیء (qawwama) means, he set the thing right, or made it straight or even. قوام therefore means, one who manages affairs well; a ruler or governor; one in a position to issue orders (Lane & Aqrab).
قانتات (obedient) is the plural of قانتة being the active participle from قنت. They say قنت لله i.e. he was obedient to God. امرأة قنوت means, a woman humble, submissive and obedient to her husband (Lane). See also 2:117.
نشوز (disobedience) is the noun-infinitive from نشز i.e. he rose or raised himself. نشزت المرأة علی زوجھا means, the woman rose against, or was disobedient to her husband and exalted herself against him and resisted him and was an evil companion to him. نشز المرء علی زوجته means, the husband treated his wife unjustly and was unkind to her or forsook her or hated her and was an evil companion to her (Lane & Aqrab).
اھجروھن (leave them alone). ھجر means, he cut him off from friendly or loving communion or intercourse; he forsook or abandoned him; he "cut" him, i.e. he boycotted him and ceased to speak to him or to associate with him. ھجر الشیء means, he forsook, or abandoned the thing; he shunned or avoided it. ھجر زوجته means, he separated himself from his wife or kept away from her (Lane & Mufradat).
اضربوھن (chastise them) is derived from ضرب. They say ضربه i.e. he beat, struck, smote or hit him (with hand, stick, etc.); hence, he chastised him.
علیا (High) is derived from علا i.e. he or it was or became high, elevated, lofty or exalted. تعالی means, he was or became high, elevated, exalted or supremely exalted or extolled. علی means high, elevated or lofty in rank, condition or state. العلیwhich is one of the attributive names of God (e.g. 2:256) means, the High; the Most High; He above Whom is nothing. المتعالی is also an attributive name of God (e.g. 13:10) meaning, He Who is Great or Supremely Great, the High or the Most High; One Higher than every other high one. تعال means, come thou, as if said by a man in a high place when calling upon a man in a low place, but is also used generally (Lane).
Commentary:
The verse gives two reasons why man has been made the head of the family: (a) his superior mental and physical powers; (b) his being bread-earner and maintainer of the family. It is natural and fair that he who earns and supplies the money should have the final say in the disposal of affairs.
The word قانتات (obedient) spoken of wives may mean either obedient to God, or to husbands.
The expression, guard the secrets of their husbands, means that when the husbands are at home, they are obedient to them and guard their secrets; and when they are away, they not only guard their secrets but take care of their property and guard their own chastity.
The clause, leave them alone in their beds, may mean: (a) abstention from conjugal relations with them; (b) sleeping in separate beds; or (c) ceasing to talk to them. The use of the word "beds" also incidentally implies that the disobedient wives are to stay at home and are not to be allowed to leave or be turned out of their homes.
The measures mentioned in the verse are not to remain in force for an indefinite period, for wives are not to be left like a thing suspended (4:130). Four months, according to the Quran, is the utmost limit for abstention from conjugal relations, i.e. for practical separation (2:227).
If the husband deems the affair to be sufficiently grave, he will have to observe the conditions mentioned in 4:16.
Regarding "chastisement" mentioned as a last resort in the verse under comment a Companion reports the Holy Prophet to have said that if at all a Muslim has to beat his wife, the beating should not be such as to leave any mark on her body (Tirmidhi, ch. on Rida‘). According to Abu Dawud and Nasa’i, the Holy Prophet forbade the beating of women at all, but when ‘Umar complained that they had become refractory, he gave the permission with the aforementioned condition; but on complaint of ill-treatment of women by their husbands he indignantly said that the husbands who beat their wives were not the best among men (Kathir, iii). On another occasion the Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "The best among you is he who treats his wife best and I am the best of you in this respect" (Tirmidhi).
The Divine attributes of "High and Great" mentioned at the end of the verse are also intended to warn husbands that the chastisement of their wives, if at all resorted to should not be unjust or vindictive or highhanded; for if they are high and great above their wives, there is One Who is High and Great above all and He shall call husbands to account for any improper use of the qualified authority given to them over their wives.
a
2:229.
b
2:238; 4:33.
598
Qawwamun is derived from Qama and Qama ‘Alal-Mar’ati means, he undertook the maintenance of the woman; he protected her. Qawwamun, therefore, means, maintainers, managers of affairs; protectors (Lisan). The verse gives two reasons why man has been made the head of the family, (a) his superior mental and physical faculties; and (b) his being the bread-earner and maintainer of the family. It is, therefore, natural and fair that he, who earns and supplies the money for the maintenance of the family, should enjoy a supervisory status in the disposal of its affairs.
599
Nashazatu-Mar’atu ‘ala Zauji-ha means, the woman rose against her husband; resisted him; deserted him (Lane & Taj).
600
The clause may signify, (a) abstention from conjugal relations; (b) sleeping in separate beds; (c) ceasing to talk to them. These measures are not to remain in force for an indefinite period, for wives are not to be left like a thing suspended (4:130). Four months, according to the Qur’an, is the maximum limit for abstention from conjugal relations, i.e. practical separation (2:227). If the husband deems the affair to be sufficiently grave, he will have to observe the conditions mentioned in 4:16.
601
The Holy Prophet is reported to have said that if at all a Muslim has to beat his wife, the beating should not be such as to leave any mark on her body (Tirmidhi & Muslim) but the husbands who beat their wives are not the best among men (Kathir, iii).
وَإِنْ خِفْتُمْ شِقَاقَ بَيْنِهِمَا فَٱبْعَثُوا۟ حَكَمًا مِّنْ أَهْلِهِۦ وَحَكَمًا مِّنْ أَهْلِهَآ إِن يُرِيدَآ إِصْلَٰحًا يُوَفِّقِ ٱللَّهُ بَيْنَهُمَآ ۗ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ عَلِيمًا خَبِيرًا
4:129.
4:129.
The pronoun, "you" in the expression, "if you fear" refers to the Muslim State or to the whole community collectively or the people generally.
The arbiters should preferably be chosen from the relations of the contending parties, because they are expected to be acquainted with the real causes of differences and because also it is easier for both parties to put their differences before them.
4:129.
Important Words:
حکما (arbiter) is fromحکم. They say حکمه i.e. he made him judge. حکمor حاکم means, one who judges, a judge, an arbiter, an arbitrator or umpire between people; a ruler or governor (Lane).
Commentary:
The pronoun, used in the plural number, in the expression إن خفتم (if you fear) refers to a Muslim State, or community, or the people generally. The arbiters should prefer-ably be chosen from the relations of the contending parties, because they are expected to be acquainted with the real cause of differences and it is easier also for both parties to put their case before them. The verse makes it clear that Islam leaves no avenue unexplored to bring about reconciliation between husband and wife before it allows them to sever the tie of marriage.
a
4:129.
a
4:129.
513
Important Words:
حکما (arbiter) is fromحکم. They say حکمه i.e. he made him judge. حکمor حاکم means, one who judges, a judge, an arbiter, an arbitrator or umpire between people; a ruler or governor (Lane).
Commentary:
The pronoun, used in the plural number, in the expression إن خفتم (if you fear) refers to a Muslim State, or community, or the people generally. The arbiters should prefer-ably be chosen from the relations of the contending parties, because they are expected to be acquainted with the real cause of differences and it is easier also for both parties to put their case before them. The verse makes it clear that Islam leaves no avenue unexplored to bring about reconciliation between husband and wife before it allows them to sever the tie of marriage.
a
4:129.
602
The pronoun, "you" in the expression, "if you fear" refers to the Muslim State or to the whole community collectively or the people generally.
603
The arbiters should preferably be chosen from the relations of the contending parties, because they are expected to be acquainted with the real causes of differences and because also it is easier for both parties to put their differences before them.
۞ وَٱعْبُدُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَلَا تُشْرِكُوا۟ بِهِۦ شَيْـًٔا ۖ وَبِٱلْوَٰلِدَيْنِ إِحْسَٰنًا وَبِذِى ٱلْقُرْبَىٰ وَٱلْيَتَٰمَىٰ وَٱلْمَسَٰكِينِ وَٱلْجَارِ ذِى ٱلْقُرْبَىٰ وَٱلْجَارِ ٱلْجُنُبِ وَٱلصَّاحِبِ بِٱلْجَنۢبِ وَٱبْنِ ٱلسَّبِيلِ وَمَا مَلَكَتْ أَيْمَٰنُكُمْ ۗ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يُحِبُّ مَن كَانَ مُخْتَالًا فَخُورًا
6:152; 7:34; 17:24, 25; 23:60.
6:152; 7:34; 17:24, 25; 23:60.
After having enjoined in the preceding verses that one should be kind to one’s wife, in the present verse the Qur’an directs a Muslim to make his kindness so comprehensive as to include in its scope the whole of mankind, from parents, who are the nearest, to strangers who are the farthest removed.
Slaves, bondwomen, servants, subordinates.
6:152; 7:34; 17:24; 23:60.
Important Words:
جار الجنب (neighbour that is a stranger) is a compound word made up of جار (neighbour) and جنب (stranger or one distant). The compound word thus means, a neighbour who is not from one’s own tribe or community; a distant neighbour (Aqrab & Mufradat).
صاحب بالجنب (companion by your side) is also a compound word made up of صاحب (companion) and جنب (one’s side). The compound word thus means, the immediate neighbour or the near neighbour; or simply companion or co-worker or colleague (Aqrab, Lisan & Mufradat).
Commentary:
After laying down in the preceding verses that one should be kind to one’s wife, in the present verse the Quran enjoins a Muslim to make his kindness so comprehensive as to include in its scope the whole of mankind, from parents who are the nearest, to strangers who are the farthest removed.
The Arabic expression rendered as, neighbour that is a kinsman, may also mean: (1) the neighbour that lives near; (2) the neighbour that is kindly.
Similarly, the words, neighbour that is a stranger, may also include: (1) the neighbour that lives at a distance; (2) the neighbour that is not kindly.
The expression, companion by your side, may mean:(1) wife or husband; (2) comrade on a journey; (3) fellow-partner in a trade or a co-worker; (4) associate; (5) immediate neighbour.
The words, those whom your right hands possess, may refer to slaves, bondwomen, servants and even subordinates.
A person who does not carry out the Divine commandments contained in this verse is condemned as "proud and boastful" because, instead of doing good to others and being kind to them, he looks down upon them and behaves arrogantly. The very act of abstaining from being kind to one’s fellow beings, whether relations or neighbours or strangers, is an act of pride condemned by Islam.
b
6:152; 7:34; 17:24, 25; 23:60.
b
6:152; 7:34; 17:24; 23:60.
514
Important Words:
جار الجنب (neighbour that is a stranger) is a compound word made up of جار (neighbour) and جنب (stranger or one distant). The compound word thus means, a neighbour who is not from one’s own tribe or community; a distant neighbour (Aqrab & Mufradat).
صاحب بالجنب (companion by your side) is also a compound word made up of صاحب (companion) and جنب (one’s side). The compound word thus means, the immediate neighbour or the near neighbour; or simply companion or co-worker or colleague (Aqrab, Lisan & Mufradat).
Commentary:
After laying down in the preceding verses that one should be kind to one’s wife, in the present verse the Quran enjoins a Muslim to make his kindness so comprehensive as to include in its scope the whole of mankind, from parents who are the nearest, to strangers who are the farthest removed.
The Arabic expression rendered as, neighbour that is a kinsman, may also mean: (1) the neighbour that lives near; (2) the neighbour that is kindly.
Similarly, the words, neighbour that is a stranger, may also include: (1) the neighbour that lives at a distance; (2) the neighbour that is not kindly.
The expression, companion by your side, may mean:(1) wife or husband; (2) comrade on a journey; (3) fellow-partner in a trade or a co-worker; (4) associate; (5) immediate neighbour.
The words, those whom your right hands possess, may refer to slaves, bondwomen, servants and even subordinates.
A person who does not carry out the Divine commandments contained in this verse is condemned as "proud and boastful" because, instead of doing good to others and being kind to them, he looks down upon them and behaves arrogantly. The very act of abstaining from being kind to one’s fellow beings, whether relations or neighbours or strangers, is an act of pride condemned by Islam.
b
6:152; 7:34; 17:24, 25; 23:60.
604
After having enjoined in the preceding verses that one should be kind to one’s wife, in the present verse the Qur’an directs a Muslim to make his kindness so comprehensive as to include in its scope the whole of mankind, from parents, who are the nearest, to strangers who are the farthest removed.
605
Slaves, bondwomen, servants, subordinates.
ٱلَّذِينَ يَبْخَلُونَ وَيَأْمُرُونَ ٱلنَّاسَ بِٱلْبُخْلِ وَيَكْتُمُونَ مَآ ءَاتَىٰهُمُ ٱللَّهُ مِن فَضْلِهِۦ ۗ وَأَعْتَدْنَا لِلْكَٰفِرِينَ عَذَابًا مُّهِينًا
3:181; 17:30; 25:68.
3:181; 17:30; 25:68.
3:181; 17:30; 25:68.
Commentary:
Some persons are so niggardly that, far from spending their wealth for the benefit of others, they do not spend it even upon themselves, lest people should come to know of it. These, as it were, conceal Allah’s bounty. They are not only deprived of the rewards and good results of charity but also become guilty of concealing God’s bounty which He has bestowed upon them for the good of mankind. Elsewhere the Quran says: Acknowledge the bounty of thy Lord in word and deed (93:12).
c
3:181; 17:30; 25:68.
a
3:181; 17:30; 25:68.
515
Commentary:
Some persons are so niggardly that, far from spending their wealth for the benefit of others, they do not spend it even upon themselves, lest people should come to know of it. These, as it were, conceal Allah’s bounty. They are not only deprived of the rewards and good results of charity but also become guilty of concealing God’s bounty which He has bestowed upon them for the good of mankind. Elsewhere the Quran says: Acknowledge the bounty of thy Lord in word and deed (93:12).
a
3:181; 17:30; 25:68.
وَٱلَّذِينَ يُنفِقُونَ أَمْوَٰلَهُمْ رِئَآءَ ٱلنَّاسِ وَلَا يُؤْمِنُونَ بِٱللَّهِ وَلَا بِٱلْيَوْمِ ٱلْءَاخِرِ ۗ وَمَن يَكُنِ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنُ لَهُۥ قَرِينًا فَسَآءَ قَرِينًا
خبر عربی میں بہت جگہ حذف کر دی جاتی ہے اور اسے عبارت سے نکالا جاتا ہے۔ ایسا ہی یہاں ہوا ہے۔ ہم نے ترجمہ میں اسے ظاہر کر دیا ہے۔
2:265.
43:37, 39.
Important Words:
قرین (companion) is the verbal adjective from قرن. They say قرن شیئا بشییء i.e. he connected, coupled or conjoined a thing with another. قرین means, an associate; a comrade; a companion; also a husband (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
Some people spend their money while they have no faith in God or in the Last Day. They do it to win the applause of men and not the pleasure of God. So, instead of winning reward, they earn God’s displeasure. Sometimes, however, money is spent openly in the cause of God with the object of inducing others to do the same. This display of charity belongs to an altogether different category and is commendable.
d
2:265.
e
43:37, 39.
1
خبر عربی میں بہت جگہ حذف کر دی جاتی ہے اور اسے عبارت سے نکالا جاتا ہے۔ ایسا ہی یہاں ہوا ہے۔ ہم نے ترجمہ میں اسے ظاہر کر دیا ہے۔
a
2:265.
b
43:37, 39.
516
Important Words:
قرین (companion) is the verbal adjective from قرن. They say قرن شیئا بشییء i.e. he connected, coupled or conjoined a thing with another. قرین means, an associate; a comrade; a companion; also a husband (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
Some people spend their money while they have no faith in God or in the Last Day. They do it to win the applause of men and not the pleasure of God. So, instead of winning reward, they earn God’s displeasure. Sometimes, however, money is spent openly in the cause of God with the object of inducing others to do the same. This display of charity belongs to an altogether different category and is commendable.
b
2:265.
c
43:37, 39.
وَمَاذَا عَلَيْهِمْ لَوْ ءَامَنُوا۟ بِٱللَّهِ وَٱلْيَوْمِ ٱلْءَاخِرِ وَأَنفَقُوا۟ مِمَّا رَزَقَهُمُ ٱللَّهُ ۚ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ بِهِمْ عَلِيمًا
إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يَظْلِمُ مِثْقَالَ ذَرَّةٍ ۖ وَإِن تَكُ حَسَنَةً يُضَٰعِفْهَا وَيُؤْتِ مِن لَّدُنْهُ أَجْرًا عَظِيمًا
10:45; 18:50; 28:85.
10:45; 18:50; 28:85.
No action of man goes unrequited. Wherever the Qur’an says that the deeds of disbelievers will not avail them, it only means that they will not succeed in their designs and efforts against Islam.
10:45; 18:50; 28:85.
Important Words:
مثقال (weight) is derived from ثقل meaning, it was or became heavy, weighty or ponderous. مثقال means, the weight of a thing whether great or small; a thing with which one weighs; a certain weight of which the quantity is well-known; a dirham; a dinar (Lane).
ذرة (atom) is derived from ذر meaning, he sprinkled or scattered. ذر of whichذرة is the singular means, the young of ants; ant’s eggs; small red ants; the smallest of ants; the motes that are seen in a ray of the sun that enters through an aperture (Lane).
Commentary:
No good deed, done even by a disbeliever, goes unrewarded. If the good deeds of disbelievers do not make them deserving of salvation, they at least serve to mitigate the severity, and lessen the duration of their punishment. In fact, wherever the Quran says that the deeds of disbelievers will not avail them, it means either that they will not succeed in their efforts against the truth or that their deeds will be of no help to them in securing for them admission into Heaven.
The reward promised in this verse is of two kinds: firstly, the direct result of one’s good acts; and secondly, their indirect consequence in the form of God’s pleasure.
a
10:45; 18:50; 28:85.
c
10:45; 18:50; 28:85.
517
Important Words:
مثقال (weight) is derived from ثقل meaning, it was or became heavy, weighty or ponderous. مثقال means, the weight of a thing whether great or small; a thing with which one weighs; a certain weight of which the quantity is well-known; a dirham; a dinar (Lane).
ذرة (atom) is derived from ذر meaning, he sprinkled or scattered. ذر of whichذرة is the singular means, the young of ants; ant’s eggs; small red ants; the smallest of ants; the motes that are seen in a ray of the sun that enters through an aperture (Lane).
Commentary:
No good deed, done even by a disbeliever, goes unrewarded. If the good deeds of disbelievers do not make them deserving of salvation, they at least serve to mitigate the severity, and lessen the duration of their punishment. In fact, wherever the Quran says that the deeds of disbelievers will not avail them, it means either that they will not succeed in their efforts against the truth or that their deeds will be of no help to them in securing for them admission into Heaven.
The reward promised in this verse is of two kinds: firstly, the direct result of one’s good acts; and secondly, their indirect consequence in the form of God’s pleasure.
d
10:45; 18:50; 28:85.
606
No action of man goes unrequited. Wherever the Qur’an says that the deeds of disbelievers will not avail them, it only means that they will not succeed in their designs and efforts against Islam.
فَكَيْفَ إِذَا جِئْنَا مِن كُلِّ أُمَّةٍۭ بِشَهِيدٍ وَجِئْنَا بِكَ عَلَىٰ هَٰٓؤُلَآءِ شَهِيدًا
16:90.
16:90.
Every Prophet will bear witness on the Day of Judgment concerning those to whom he was sent as a Messenger. The word "these" includes both believers and disbelievers, the nature of evidence being different in different cases.
16:90.
Commentary:
Every Prophet will bear witness on the Day of Judgement against or concerning those to whom he was sent as a Messenger. The word ھؤلاء(these) includes both believers and disbelievers, the nature of evidence being different in different cases.
b
16:90.
a
16:90.
518
Commentary:
Every Prophet will bear witness on the Day of Judgement against or concerning those to whom he was sent as a Messenger. The word ھؤلاء(these) includes both believers and disbelievers, the nature of evidence being different in different cases.
a
16:90.
607
Every Prophet will bear witness on the Day of Judgment concerning those to whom he was sent as a Messenger. The word "these" includes both believers and disbelievers, the nature of evidence being different in different cases.
يَوْمَئِذٍ يَوَدُّ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ وَعَصَوُا۟ ٱلرَّسُولَ لَوْ تُسَوَّىٰ بِهِمُ ٱلْأَرْضُ وَلَا يَكْتُمُونَ ٱللَّهَ حَدِيثًا
78:41.
آیت میں ’’ان پر زمین کو برابر کر دیا جاتا‘‘ کے الفاظ ہیں۔ لیکن بامحاورہ اردو میں اس کا وہی مطلب ہے جو ہم نے لکھا ہے۔
78:41.
Important Words:
حدیثا (anything) is derived from حدث meaning, it came into existence, not having been before. حدث (haddatha) means, he talked or related or narrated, etc.حدیث means, a piece of information; an announcement; news or tidings; an account; a narration or story; a tradition; a thing or matter that is talked of or narrated or transmitted; any talk or discourse that one hears. The word also means, new or recent or brought into existence newly (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The expression, will wish that the earth were made level with them, shows that the words 'earth and heaven' as mentioned in the Quran, do not always signify the physical earth and heaven but may represent one’s existing moral and spiritual condition. On the day when men will stand before God, the earth will have ceased to exist for them.
c
78:41.
1
آیت میں ’’ان پر زمین کو برابر کر دیا جاتا‘‘ کے الفاظ ہیں۔ لیکن بامحاورہ اردو میں اس کا وہی مطلب ہے جو ہم نے لکھا ہے۔
b
78:41.
519
Important Words:
حدیثا (anything) is derived from حدث meaning, it came into existence, not having been before. حدث (haddatha) means, he talked or related or narrated, etc.حدیث means, a piece of information; an announcement; news or tidings; an account; a narration or story; a tradition; a thing or matter that is talked of or narrated or transmitted; any talk or discourse that one hears. The word also means, new or recent or brought into existence newly (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The expression, will wish that the earth were made level with them, shows that the words 'earth and heaven' as mentioned in the Quran, do not always signify the physical earth and heaven but may represent one’s existing moral and spiritual condition. On the day when men will stand before God, the earth will have ceased to exist for them.
b
78:41.
608
Hadith means, a piece of information; an announcement; news or tidings (Lane).
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ لَا تَقْرَبُوا۟ ٱلصَّلَوٰةَ وَأَنتُمْ سُكَٰرَىٰ حَتَّىٰ تَعْلَمُوا۟ مَا تَقُولُونَ وَلَا جُنُبًا إِلَّا عَابِرِى سَبِيلٍ حَتَّىٰ تَغْتَسِلُوا۟ ۚ وَإِن كُنتُم مَّرْضَىٰٓ أَوْ عَلَىٰ سَفَرٍ أَوْ جَآءَ أَحَدٌ مِّنكُم مِّنَ ٱلْغَآئِطِ أَوْ لَٰمَسْتُمُ ٱلنِّسَآءَ فَلَمْ تَجِدُوا۟ مَآءً فَتَيَمَّمُوا۟ صَعِيدًا طَيِّبًا فَٱمْسَحُوا۟ بِوُجُوهِكُمْ وَأَيْدِيكُمْ ۗ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ عَفُوًّا غَفُورًا
اَوْ کے معنے عربی میں کبھی ’’یا‘‘ کے ہوتے ہیں اور کبھی ’’اور‘‘ کے ہوتے ہیں۔ (مُغْنی اللَّبِیب جلد اول ص۶۰) اس جگہ ہم نے اس کے معنے ’’اور‘‘ کے کیے ہیں۔ کیونکہ اس کے ساتھ آیت کا مفہوم واضح ہو جاتا ہے۔
یہ جُنُـبًا کا ہم مطلب ہے مگر جُنُـبًا کا لفظ چونکہ دور ہو گیا تھا اس لئے اس کے ہم معنے الفاظ اَوْ لٰمَسْتُمُ النِّسَآءَ استعمال کیے‘ ورنہ مضمون ایک ہی ہے۔
فَلَمْ تَجِدُوْا مَآءً درحقیقت اَوْ جَآءَ اَحَدٌ مِّنْکُمْ مِّنَ الْغَآئِطِ کی بھی خبر ہے۔ اور لٰمَسْتُمُ النِّسَآءَ کی بھی‘ اس لئے ہم نے دونوں کے ساتھ اسے لگا دیا ہے تاکہ ترجمہ ٹھیک ہو جائے۔
Sukara is the plural of Sakaran which means, a person who is drunk; or is in a fit of anger; in raptures of love; is stricken with fear; or is overpowered by sleep or some other disturbing element which may distract his attention or obscure his reason, etc. (Lane).
The expression, "nor when you are unclean," means that just as a man cannot perform Prayers when he is not in full possession of his senses, similarly he cannot perform Prayers when he is unclean until he performs total ablution by bathing. Sexual intercourse creates a sort of uncleanness in the body which must be removed by bathing in order to ensure proper state of purity, cheerfulness, and vivacity necessary for worship.
The clause, except when you are travelling along a way, means that though ordinarily a person who is in a state of "uncleanness" cannot perform his Prayers except after proper bathing, yet if he becomes "unclean" when he is actually travelling on the way, bathing is not obligatory for him. He can in this case perform Tayammum as ordered in the concluding part of the verse.
Of the four classes, viz. the sick; those on a journey; those coming from the privy; and those having gone in unto their wives, only the last two, being in a state of uncleanness, need ablution or washing as the case may be, and if they do not find water, they can perform Tayammum. For the former two classes no condition as to water is necessary. They may resort to Tayammum even if they find water. This is why the words "while unclean" have been added after the words if you are ill or you are on a journey. It must be noted that the expression "on a journey" is the same as the expression "travelling along a way", both signifying the state of actual travelling when one is, as it were, on the wing. Dust has been chosen as a substitute for water because, just as water reminds a person of his origin (77:21), thus creating in him a sense of humility; similarly dust calls to his mind the other humble substance from which he is created (30:21).
Important Words:
سکاری (not in full possession of your senses) is the plural of سکران which is derived from سکر i.e. he was or became intoxicated, inebriated or drunken. They say سکر علی فلان i.e. such a one became angry or violently angry with him. سکرت الریح means, the wind, became still after blowing. سکر الباب means, he closed or stopped up the door. سکرة الموت means, the intoxication or agony of death which causes confusion of intellect and deprives the sufferer of reason. سکرة الھم والنومmeans, the oppressive sensation, etc. attendant upon anxiety and upon sleep. سکر (sukrun) which is the noun-infinitive from the verb سکر means, the state of intoxication, inebriation or drunkenness; a state that intervenes as an obstruction between a man and his intellect, mostly used in relation to intoxicating drinks but sometimes as meaning such a state arising from anger or from the passion of love, etc. (Lane). For further explanation see 15:73; 22:3. In view of the different meanings of this word a person would be called سکران (intoxicated) when he is drunk; or is in a fit of anger; or in raptures of love; or has received a great and sudden shock; or is stricken with fear; or is overpowered by sleep or some other disturbing element which may distract his attention or obscure his reason, etc.
جنبا (unclean) is derived from جنب. They say جنبه i.e. he led him or it by his side; he put him or it at a distance. جنب الیهmeans he was or became disquieted by a vehement desire to see or meet him. جنابة means distance; the stage of being unclean owing to sexual intercourse or discharge of semen, when it becomes obligatory for one to perform total ablution by bathing. جنب means, stranger; one who is distant and remote; or ( who is under the obligation of performing total ablution (bathing) by reason of sexual intercourse or discharge of semen. The word is used both as masculine and feminine, singular and plural (Lane).
عابری سبیل (are travelling along a way) عابری is really عابرین which is the plural of عابر which is derived from عبر. They say عبرہ i.e. he crossed it, went across it, or passed over it from one side to another. عبر السبیل means, he travelled or passed along the way or road. عبر also means, he died, as though he had travelled the road of life (Lane). The expression عابری سبیل signifies one who is actually travelling. Every person away from home cannot be called عابری سبیل. Again, if a person is away from home on a journey but halts at a place or decides to stay in a town or village for a few days, he will not be reckoner as one of the عابری سبیل (those travelling along a way); but if, while travelling, he halts for a night on the roadside, for example in a inn or at a rest-house or at a railway station, etc., he will be regarded as one.
غائط (privy) is derived from غاط which means, he or it became hidden in the ground; he dug, excavated or hollowed out in the earth; it sank or became depressed in the ground; it descended or sloped downwards in the ground. غائط therefore means:(1) a wide and depressed piece of ground having acclivities bordering it; (2) a place in which one satisfies one’s want of nature, the custom being to do so in a depressed place where one may remain hidden; (3) human excrement or ordure because it is cast away in a غائط (a depressed place). The expression اتی الغائط means, he responded to the call of nature; he satisfied the want of nature; he voided excrement or ordure (Lane).
تیمموا (betake yourselves to) is derived from یممه. They say یممه i.e. he aimed at it or desired it, or he betook himself to it. تیمم المریض means, the sick man, instead of performing the usual ablution for Prayer, betook himself to pure dust and wiped his face and hands therewith. تیمم (tayammum) is technically the process of striking the palms of the hands on the surface of pure earth and then wiping or passing them over the face, etc., in the prescribed manner (Taj).
Commentary:
According to this verse, Prayer cannot be considered to have been properly performed if the devotee simply repeats the words of Prayer without understanding what he says. It is also implicit in the verse that a non-Arab Muslim, besides praying in the prescribed Arabic words, should also pray to God and supplicate to Him in his own tongue, in the language which he usually speaks and in which he can best express his thoughts and feelings.
The word سکاری though primarily meaning "intoxicated" is, as shown under Important Words, much wider in its significance. Any state or condition in which one is not in full possession of oneself, either through anger or love or hunger or sleep, etc. is included in this expression. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "If a man is sleepy, then he should not say his Prayers till the state of sleepiness has left him" (Bukhari, ch. on Wudu’). Again: "A man should not say his Prayers when he is hungry and the food has been placed before him (Bukhari, ch. on Salat), or when the call of nature demands his attention" (Dawud, ch. on Taharat).
The expression, nor when you are unclean, means that just as a man cannot perform Prayers when he is in a state of سکر (not in full possession of his senses). Similarly, he cannot perform Prayers in a state of being جنبا (for the meaning of which see Important Words above), until he performs total ablution by bathing. Sexual intercourse creates a sort of uncleanness in the body which must be removed by bathing in order to ensure proper state of purity, cheerfulness and readiness necessary for worship.
The clause, except when you are travelling along a way, means that though ordinarily a person who is in a state of "uncleanness" cannot perform his Prayers except after properly bathing, yet if he becomes "unclean" when he is actually travelling on the way, bathing is not obligatory on him for the performance of Prayers. He can in this case perform tayammum as ordered in the concluding part of the verse.
The sentence, if you are ill or you are on a journey (while unclean) or if one of you comes from the privy or you have touched women and you find no water, then betake yourselves to pure dust, mentions four classes of persons on whom وضوء (ablution) or غسل (total ablution) is not obligatory for the performance of Prayer, they being required to perform what is known as tayammum, i.e. betaking to pure dust and wiping therewith the face and the hands, as detailed in Hadith and Sunnah. These four classes are: (1) the sick; (2) those on a journey; (3) those coming from the privy; (4) those touching women, (i.e. having carnal knowledge of them). Out of these four classes only the last two are such as produce a state of uncleanness, necessitating the performance of وضوء (ablution) or غسل (total ablution), as the case may be. So the clause, and you find no water, only relates to them. The verse thus purports to say that if the last-mentioned two classes of men do not find water, they can perform tayammum, i.e. wipe their faces and hands with pure dust before saying their Prayers.
In the case of the former two clauses no condition as to water is necessary. These two classes of men may resort to تیمم (tayammum) even if they find water. This is why the words, "and you are unclean" have been supplied after the words, if you are ill or you are on a journey. It must be noted that the expression علی سفر (on a journey), in the present verse, is the same as the expression عابری سبیل (travelling along a way), both signifying the state of actual travelling when one is, as it were, on the wing.
Finally, it must be noted that dust has been chosen as a substitute for water because, just as water reminds a person of his origin (77:21), thus creating in him a sense of humility, similarly, dust calls to his mind the other humble substance from which he was created (He created you from dust, 30:21). But the dust used must be pure, which is a necessary condition for the performance of Prayers. Any excess should be blown away before it is used in order to ensure just the minimum quantity for the performance of تیمم.
From the verse it is clear that though performing proper ablution is ordinarily necessary for Prayers yet, Islam being a perfect religion, one is allowed to substitute tayammum in place of ablution in certain exceptional cases.
2
اَوْ کے معنے عربی میں کبھی ’’یا‘‘ کے ہوتے ہیں اور کبھی ’’اور‘‘ کے ہوتے ہیں۔ (مُغْنی اللَّبِیب جلد اول ص۶۰) اس جگہ ہم نے اس کے معنے ’’اور‘‘ کے کیے ہیں۔ کیونکہ اس کے ساتھ آیت کا مفہوم واضح ہو جاتا ہے۔
3
یہ جُنُـبًا کا ہم مطلب ہے مگر جُنُـبًا کا لفظ چونکہ دور ہو گیا تھا اس لئے اس کے ہم معنے الفاظ اَوْ لٰمَسْتُمُ النِّسَآءَ استعمال کیے‘ ورنہ مضمون ایک ہی ہے۔
4
فَلَمْ تَجِدُوْا مَآءً درحقیقت اَوْ جَآءَ اَحَدٌ مِّنْکُمْ مِّنَ الْغَآئِطِ کی بھی خبر ہے۔ اور لٰمَسْتُمُ النِّسَآءَ کی بھی‘ اس لئے ہم نے دونوں کے ساتھ اسے لگا دیا ہے تاکہ ترجمہ ٹھیک ہو جائے۔
520
Important Words:
سکاری (not in full possession of your senses) is the plural of سکران which is derived from سکر i.e. he was or became intoxicated, inebriated or drunken. They say سکر علی فلان i.e. such a one became angry or violently angry with him. سکرت الریح means, the wind, became still after blowing. سکر الباب means, he closed or stopped up the door. سکرة الموت means, the intoxication or agony of death which causes confusion of intellect and deprives the sufferer of reason. سکرة الھم والنومmeans, the oppressive sensation, etc. attendant upon anxiety and upon sleep. سکر (sukrun) which is the noun-infinitive from the verb سکر means, the state of intoxication, inebriation or drunkenness; a state that intervenes as an obstruction between a man and his intellect, mostly used in relation to intoxicating drinks but sometimes as meaning such a state arising from anger or from the passion of love, etc. (Lane). For further explanation see 15:73; 22:3. In view of the different meanings of this word a person would be called سکران (intoxicated) when he is drunk; or is in a fit of anger; or in raptures of love; or has received a great and sudden shock; or is stricken with fear; or is overpowered by sleep or some other disturbing element which may distract his attention or obscure his reason, etc.
جنبا (unclean) is derived from جنب. They say جنبه i.e. he led him or it by his side; he put him or it at a distance. جنب الیهmeans he was or became disquieted by a vehement desire to see or meet him. جنابة means distance; the stage of being unclean owing to sexual intercourse or discharge of semen, when it becomes obligatory for one to perform total ablution by bathing. جنب means, stranger; one who is distant and remote; or ( who is under the obligation of performing total ablution (bathing) by reason of sexual intercourse or discharge of semen. The word is used both as masculine and feminine, singular and plural (Lane).
عابری سبیل (are travelling along a way) عابری is really عابرین which is the plural of عابر which is derived from عبر. They say عبرہ i.e. he crossed it, went across it, or passed over it from one side to another. عبر السبیل means, he travelled or passed along the way or road. عبر also means, he died, as though he had travelled the road of life (Lane). The expression عابری سبیل signifies one who is actually travelling. Every person away from home cannot be called عابری سبیل. Again, if a person is away from home on a journey but halts at a place or decides to stay in a town or village for a few days, he will not be reckoner as one of the عابری سبیل (those travelling along a way); but if, while travelling, he halts for a night on the roadside, for example in a inn or at a rest-house or at a railway station, etc., he will be regarded as one.
غائط (privy) is derived from غاط which means, he or it became hidden in the ground; he dug, excavated or hollowed out in the earth; it sank or became depressed in the ground; it descended or sloped downwards in the ground. غائط therefore means:(1) a wide and depressed piece of ground having acclivities bordering it; (2) a place in which one satisfies one’s want of nature, the custom being to do so in a depressed place where one may remain hidden; (3) human excrement or ordure because it is cast away in a غائط (a depressed place). The expression اتی الغائط means, he responded to the call of nature; he satisfied the want of nature; he voided excrement or ordure (Lane).
تیمموا (betake yourselves to) is derived from یممه. They say یممه i.e. he aimed at it or desired it, or he betook himself to it. تیمم المریض means, the sick man, instead of performing the usual ablution for Prayer, betook himself to pure dust and wiped his face and hands therewith. تیمم (tayammum) is technically the process of striking the palms of the hands on the surface of pure earth and then wiping or passing them over the face, etc., in the prescribed manner (Taj).
Commentary:
According to this verse, Prayer cannot be considered to have been properly performed if the devotee simply repeats the words of Prayer without understanding what he says. It is also implicit in the verse that a non-Arab Muslim, besides praying in the prescribed Arabic words, should also pray to God and supplicate to Him in his own tongue, in the language which he usually speaks and in which he can best express his thoughts and feelings.
The word سکاری though primarily meaning "intoxicated" is, as shown under Important Words, much wider in its significance. Any state or condition in which one is not in full possession of oneself, either through anger or love or hunger or sleep, etc. is included in this expression. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "If a man is sleepy, then he should not say his Prayers till the state of sleepiness has left him" (Bukhari, ch. on Wudu’). Again: "A man should not say his Prayers when he is hungry and the food has been placed before him (Bukhari, ch. on Salat), or when the call of nature demands his attention" (Dawud, ch. on Taharat).
The expression, nor when you are unclean, means that just as a man cannot perform Prayers when he is in a state of سکر (not in full possession of his senses). Similarly, he cannot perform Prayers in a state of being جنبا (for the meaning of which see Important Words above), until he performs total ablution by bathing. Sexual intercourse creates a sort of uncleanness in the body which must be removed by bathing in order to ensure proper state of purity, cheerfulness and readiness necessary for worship.
The clause, except when you are travelling along a way, means that though ordinarily a person who is in a state of "uncleanness" cannot perform his Prayers except after properly bathing, yet if he becomes "unclean" when he is actually travelling on the way, bathing is not obligatory on him for the performance of Prayers. He can in this case perform tayammum as ordered in the concluding part of the verse.
The sentence, if you are ill or you are on a journey (while unclean) or if one of you comes from the privy or you have touched women and you find no water, then betake yourselves to pure dust, mentions four classes of persons on whom وضوء (ablution) or غسل (total ablution) is not obligatory for the performance of Prayer, they being required to perform what is known as tayammum, i.e. betaking to pure dust and wiping therewith the face and the hands, as detailed in Hadith and Sunnah. These four classes are: (1) the sick; (2) those on a journey; (3) those coming from the privy; (4) those touching women, (i.e. having carnal knowledge of them). Out of these four classes only the last two are such as produce a state of uncleanness, necessitating the performance of وضوء (ablution) or غسل (total ablution), as the case may be. So the clause, and you find no water, only relates to them. The verse thus purports to say that if the last-mentioned two classes of men do not find water, they can perform tayammum, i.e. wipe their faces and hands with pure dust before saying their Prayers.
In the case of the former two clauses no condition as to water is necessary. These two classes of men may resort to تیمم (tayammum) even if they find water. This is why the words, "and you are unclean" have been supplied after the words, if you are ill or you are on a journey. It must be noted that the expression علی سفر (on a journey), in the present verse, is the same as the expression عابری سبیل (travelling along a way), both signifying the state of actual travelling when one is, as it were, on the wing.
Finally, it must be noted that dust has been chosen as a substitute for water because, just as water reminds a person of his origin (77:21), thus creating in him a sense of humility, similarly, dust calls to his mind the other humble substance from which he was created (He created you from dust, 30:21). But the dust used must be pure, which is a necessary condition for the performance of Prayers. Any excess should be blown away before it is used in order to ensure just the minimum quantity for the performance of تیمم.
From the verse it is clear that though performing proper ablution is ordinarily necessary for Prayers yet, Islam being a perfect religion, one is allowed to substitute tayammum in place of ablution in certain exceptional cases.
609
Sukara is the plural of Sakaran which means, a person who is drunk; or is in a fit of anger; in raptures of love; is stricken with fear; or is overpowered by sleep or some other disturbing element which may distract his attention or obscure his reason, etc. (Lane).
610
The expression, "nor when you are unclean," means that just as a man cannot perform Prayers when he is not in full possession of his senses, similarly he cannot perform Prayers when he is unclean until he performs total ablution by bathing. Sexual intercourse creates a sort of uncleanness in the body which must be removed by bathing in order to ensure proper state of purity, cheerfulness, and vivacity necessary for worship.
611
The clause, except when you are travelling along a way, means that though ordinarily a person who is in a state of "uncleanness" cannot perform his Prayers except after proper bathing, yet if he becomes "unclean" when he is actually travelling on the way, bathing is not obligatory for him. He can in this case perform Tayammum as ordered in the concluding part of the verse.
612
Of the four classes, viz. the sick; those on a journey; those coming from the privy; and those having gone in unto their wives, only the last two, being in a state of uncleanness, need ablution or washing as the case may be, and if they do not find water, they can perform Tayammum. For the former two classes no condition as to water is necessary. They may resort to Tayammum even if they find water. This is why the words "while unclean" have been added after the words if you are ill or you are on a journey. It must be noted that the expression "on a journey" is the same as the expression "travelling along a way", both signifying the state of actual travelling when one is, as it were, on the wing. Dust has been chosen as a substitute for water because, just as water reminds a person of his origin (77:21), thus creating in him a sense of humility; similarly dust calls to his mind the other humble substance from which he is created (30:21).
أَلَمْ تَرَ إِلَى ٱلَّذِينَ أُوتُوا۟ نَصِيبًا مِّنَ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ يَشْتَرُونَ ٱلضَّلَٰلَةَ وَيُرِيدُونَ أَن تَضِلُّوا۟ ٱلسَّبِيلَ
4:90.
4:90.
4:90.
a
4:90.
a
4:90.
a
4:90.
وَٱللَّهُ أَعْلَمُ بِأَعْدَآئِكُمْ ۚ وَكَفَىٰ بِٱللَّهِ وَلِيًّا وَكَفَىٰ بِٱللَّهِ نَصِيرًا
4:174; 33:18.
4:174; 33:18.
4:174; 33:18, 66.
b
4:174; 33:18.
b
4:174; 33:18, 66.
b
4:174; 33:18.
مِّنَ ٱلَّذِينَ هَادُوا۟ يُحَرِّفُونَ ٱلْكَلِمَ عَن مَّوَاضِعِهِۦ وَيَقُولُونَ سَمِعْنَا وَعَصَيْنَا وَٱسْمَعْ غَيْرَ مُسْمَعٍ وَرَٰعِنَا لَيًّۢا بِأَلْسِنَتِهِمْ وَطَعْنًا فِى ٱلدِّينِ ۚ وَلَوْ أَنَّهُمْ قَالُوا۟ سَمِعْنَا وَأَطَعْنَا وَٱسْمَعْ وَٱنظُرْنَا لَكَانَ خَيْرًا لَّهُمْ وَأَقْوَمَ وَلَٰكِن لَّعَنَهُمُ ٱللَّهُ بِكُفْرِهِمْ فَلَا يُؤْمِنُونَ إِلَّا قَلِيلًا
یعنی منہ سے تو رَاعِنَا کہہ دیتے ہیں مگر ان کے دل اس سے متفق نہیں ہوتے۔ دل میں وہ رسول کریم صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم کو حقیر سمجھتے ہیں اور خیال کرتے ہیں کہ اس سے کسی رعایت کی طلب کی ہمیں کوئی ضرورت نہیں۔
عربی کے لفظ ہیں فَـلَا یُؤْمِنُوْنَ اِلَّا قَلِیْـلًا جن کا مطلب یہ ہے کہ وہ صرف قلیل ایمان لاتے ہیں۔ مگر محاورہ میں اس کے معنے بالکل ایمان نہ لانے کے ہیں۔
2:76; 3:79; 5:42.
2:105.
The expression Ghaira Musma‘in means; (1) mayest thou not hear by reason of deafness; (2) mayest thou not hear what may please thee; (3) mayest thou not be obeyed.
2:76; 3:79; 5:42.
2:105.
Commentary:
The verb یقولون (they say) is used in Arabic both for words of mouth, and for what one expresses by one’s condition or conduct (see 2:31). In this verse, the expression has been used of the Jews in both these senses, viz. "They say with their tongues that they have heard and obeyed, but their conduct shows that instead of obeying they disobey and defy."
The expression غیر مسمع (without being heard) gives a number of meanings: (1) mayest thou not be made to hear, i.e. mayest thou not hear by reason of deafness; (2) mayest thou not hear any speech or news which thou wouldst like or which may please thee; (3) may not what thou sayest be accepted, or may not thy invitation be accepted and thy call responded to; (4) mayest thou not be obeyed; or (5) the expression may mean, though it was not certainly intended by the Jews, mayest thou not hear anything offensive or unpleasant.
For the expression راعنا (ra‘ina) see note on 2:105.
The Jews used the aforesaid ambiguous expressions in order (1) to conceal what evil thoughts they entertained about the Holy Prophet; (2) to make Muslims imitate them and use analogous expressions while addressing the Holy Prophet; and (3) to taunt Muslims with regard to matters affecting their religion, saying to them in effect, "We speak to your Prophet jestingly and abuse him in ambiguous words; if he had been a true Prophet of God, he would have certainly come to know of this."
c
2:76; 3:79; 5:42.
d
2:105.
2
یعنی منہ سے تو رَاعِنَا کہہ دیتے ہیں مگر ان کے دل اس سے متفق نہیں ہوتے۔ دل میں وہ رسول کریم صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم کو حقیر سمجھتے ہیں اور خیال کرتے ہیں کہ اس سے کسی رعایت کی طلب کی ہمیں کوئی ضرورت نہیں۔
3
عربی کے لفظ ہیں فَـلَا یُؤْمِنُوْنَ اِلَّا قَلِیْـلًا جن کا مطلب یہ ہے کہ وہ صرف قلیل ایمان لاتے ہیں۔ مگر محاورہ میں اس کے معنے بالکل ایمان نہ لانے کے ہیں۔
a
2:76; 3:79; 5:42.
b
2:105.
521
Commentary:
The verb یقولون (they say) is used in Arabic both for words of mouth, and for what one expresses by one’s condition or conduct (see 2:31). In this verse, the expression has been used of the Jews in both these senses, viz. "They say with their tongues that they have heard and obeyed, but their conduct shows that instead of obeying they disobey and defy."
The expression غیر مسمع (without being heard) gives a number of meanings: (1) mayest thou not be made to hear, i.e. mayest thou not hear by reason of deafness; (2) mayest thou not hear any speech or news which thou wouldst like or which may please thee; (3) may not what thou sayest be accepted, or may not thy invitation be accepted and thy call responded to; (4) mayest thou not be obeyed; or (5) the expression may mean, though it was not certainly intended by the Jews, mayest thou not hear anything offensive or unpleasant.
For the expression راعنا (ra‘ina) see note on 2:105.
The Jews used the aforesaid ambiguous expressions in order (1) to conceal what evil thoughts they entertained about the Holy Prophet; (2) to make Muslims imitate them and use analogous expressions while addressing the Holy Prophet; and (3) to taunt Muslims with regard to matters affecting their religion, saying to them in effect, "We speak to your Prophet jestingly and abuse him in ambiguous words; if he had been a true Prophet of God, he would have certainly come to know of this."
a
2:76; 3:79; 5:42.
b
2:105.
613
The expression Ghaira Musma‘in means; (1) mayest thou not hear by reason of deafness; (2) mayest thou not hear what may please thee; (3) mayest thou not be obeyed.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ أُوتُوا۟ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ ءَامِنُوا۟ بِمَا نَزَّلْنَا مُصَدِّقًا لِّمَا مَعَكُم مِّن قَبْلِ أَن نَّطْمِسَ وُجُوهًا فَنَرُدَّهَا عَلَىٰٓ أَدْبَارِهَآ أَوْ نَلْعَنَهُمْ كَمَا لَعَنَّآ أَصْحَٰبَ ٱلسَّبْتِ ۚ وَكَانَ أَمْرُ ٱللَّهِ مَفْعُولًا
وَجْہٌ کے معنے قوم کے سردار کے ہوتے ہیں اور طمس کے معنے ہلاک کرنے کے ہوتے ہیں۔ عربی کے لحاظ سے قرآن مجیدنے تنوین کو کافی سمجھا ہے مگر ہم نے ترجمہ میں ’’تم میں سے‘‘ کے الفاظ بڑھا دئیے ہیں۔
یعنی خطرناک شکست دیں جس سے ان کا سب جوش ٹھنڈا ہو جائے۔
یہ لعنت جس کا ذکر اس آیت میں ہے اس کا تفصیلی ذکر سورۃ اعراف آیت ۱۶۴ تا ۱۶۷ میں آتا ہے۔
10:89.
2:66; 4:155; 7:164; 16:125.
The words signify that (1) either of the two punishments would befall the Jews; (2) some of them would be visited with one kind of punishment and others with the other.
10:89.
2:66; 4:155; 7:164; 16:125.
Important Words:
وجوھا (leaders) is the plural of وجه which gives a number of meanings: face; the outward appearance of a person or thing; the front or the side that confronts the eyes of the looker; the first part of a thing; the leader or chief of a people; motive or intention, etc. (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse contains two prophecies concerning the Jews: (1) God will destroy their leaders, and they will be vanquished and "turned on their backs", i.e. banished from and turned out of their country; (2) God will curse them as He had cursed the people who profaned the Sabbath. The words embodying the two prophecies are joined together by the conjunction او(or) not to express doubt but to show that either of the two punishments was to befall the Jews; or that some of them were to be visited with one kind of punishment and others with another. The expression: We will turn them on their backs, does not mean, as some commentators have thought, "We will physically disfigure them and put their faces on their backs." This meaning, besides being against Arabic idiom, is entirely uncorroborated by history. If the word وجوہ is taken in the sense of "faces", then the whole sentence will be taken in a figurative sense, signifying total transformation or ruin.
The verse also makes it clear that when speaking of the profaners of the Sabbath as having been turned into apes (2:66; 5:61; 7:164-169), the verses referred to do not mean that they were actually and physically transformed into apes; for, as the present verse shows, the same prophecy was made concerning the Jews who opposed the Holy Prophet and they were never actually transformed into apes.
e
10:89.
f
2:66; 4:155; 7:164; 16:125.
1
وَجْہٌ کے معنے قوم کے سردار کے ہوتے ہیں اور طمس کے معنے ہلاک کرنے کے ہوتے ہیں۔ عربی کے لحاظ سے قرآن مجیدنے تنوین کو کافی سمجھا ہے مگر ہم نے ترجمہ میں ’’تم میں سے‘‘ کے الفاظ بڑھا دئیے ہیں۔
2
یعنی خطرناک شکست دیں جس سے ان کا سب جوش ٹھنڈا ہو جائے۔
3
یہ لعنت جس کا ذکر اس آیت میں ہے اس کا تفصیلی ذکر سورۃ اعراف آیت ۱۶۴ تا ۱۶۷ میں آتا ہے۔
a
10:89.
b
2:66; 4:155; 7:164; 16:125.
522
Important Words:
وجوھا (leaders) is the plural of وجه which gives a number of meanings: face; the outward appearance of a person or thing; the front or the side that confronts the eyes of the looker; the first part of a thing; the leader or chief of a people; motive or intention, etc. (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse contains two prophecies concerning the Jews: (1) God will destroy their leaders, and they will be vanquished and "turned on their backs", i.e. banished from and turned out of their country; (2) God will curse them as He had cursed the people who profaned the Sabbath. The words embodying the two prophecies are joined together by the conjunction او(or) not to express doubt but to show that either of the two punishments was to befall the Jews; or that some of them were to be visited with one kind of punishment and others with another. The expression: We will turn them on their backs, does not mean, as some commentators have thought, "We will physically disfigure them and put their faces on their backs." This meaning, besides being against Arabic idiom, is entirely uncorroborated by history. If the word وجوہ is taken in the sense of "faces", then the whole sentence will be taken in a figurative sense, signifying total transformation or ruin.
The verse also makes it clear that when speaking of the profaners of the Sabbath as having been turned into apes (2:66; 5:61; 7:164-169), the verses referred to do not mean that they were actually and physically transformed into apes; for, as the present verse shows, the same prophecy was made concerning the Jews who opposed the Holy Prophet and they were never actually transformed into apes.
c
10:89.
d
2:66; 4:155; 7:164; 16:125.
614
The words signify that (1) either of the two punishments would befall the Jews; (2) some of them would be visited with one kind of punishment and others with the other.
إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يَغْفِرُ أَن يُشْرَكَ بِهِۦ وَيَغْفِرُ مَا دُونَ ذَٰلِكَ لِمَن يَشَآءُ ۚ وَمَن يُشْرِكْ بِٱللَّهِ فَقَدِ ٱفْتَرَىٰٓ إِثْمًا عَظِيمًا
4:117.
4:117.
Shirk which is tantamount to treason in spiritual terminology extends to loving or trusting a thing or a being as one should love or trust God. The verse only relates to the time after death, i.e. one who dies in a state of Shirk will not be forgiven.
4:117.
Important Words:
یشرك (associates partners) is derived from شرك . They say شرك فیه i.e. he shared or participated with him in it; he was or became his co-partner in it. أشرك بالله means, he attributed to God or associated with Him a partner or co-partner, whether in His person or attributes or dominion, etc. شرك means: (1) participation or co-partnership; (2) the attribution of a co-partner to, or associating a partner with, God, i.e. belief in the plurality of Gods (Lane & Aqrab). شرك in its wider sense is not confined to worshipping idols or looking upon certain beings or things as partners with God or possessing His attributes or sharing in His dominion, etc. It extends to loving a thing or a being as one should love God, or trusting in a thing or a being as one should trust in God, and so on. This latter kind of شرك is known as شرك خفی i.e. the hidden شرك being not easily discernible.
Commentary:
The reference in the verse is not only to idol-worship, but also to such idolatrous practices as are in vogue among common people, even among present-day Muslims, such as the adoration of saints and offering prayers and oblations to them. All such abominable practices are shirk in the sight of God. Butشرك خفی (hidden shirk), i.e. loving or trusting in a thing or being as one should love and trust in God, may be forgiven, if done in ignorance and through lack of proper care, provided one is a sincere believer in God and His Prophet and strives to do good works.
The expression, Allah will not forgive, does not mean that an idolatrous person can never repent or that his repentance cannot be accepted even in the present life. The expression relates to the time after death, i.e. one who dies in a state of shirk will not be forgiven.
a
4:117.
a
4:117.
523
Important Words:
یشرك (associates partners) is derived from شرك . They say شرك فیه i.e. he shared or participated with him in it; he was or became his co-partner in it. أشرك بالله means, he attributed to God or associated with Him a partner or co-partner, whether in His person or attributes or dominion, etc. شرك means: (1) participation or co-partnership; (2) the attribution of a co-partner to, or associating a partner with, God, i.e. belief in the plurality of Gods (Lane & Aqrab). شرك in its wider sense is not confined to worshipping idols or looking upon certain beings or things as partners with God or possessing His attributes or sharing in His dominion, etc. It extends to loving a thing or a being as one should love God, or trusting in a thing or a being as one should trust in God, and so on. This latter kind of شرك is known as شرك خفی i.e. the hidden شرك being not easily discernible.
Commentary:
The reference in the verse is not only to idol-worship, but also to such idolatrous practices as are in vogue among common people, even among present-day Muslims, such as the adoration of saints and offering prayers and oblations to them. All such abominable practices are shirk in the sight of God. Butشرك خفی (hidden shirk), i.e. loving or trusting in a thing or being as one should love and trust in God, may be forgiven, if done in ignorance and through lack of proper care, provided one is a sincere believer in God and His Prophet and strives to do good works.
The expression, Allah will not forgive, does not mean that an idolatrous person can never repent or that his repentance cannot be accepted even in the present life. The expression relates to the time after death, i.e. one who dies in a state of shirk will not be forgiven.
a
4:117.
615
Shirk which is tantamount to treason in spiritual terminology extends to loving or trusting a thing or a being as one should love or trust God. The verse only relates to the time after death, i.e. one who dies in a state of Shirk will not be forgiven.
أَلَمْ تَرَ إِلَى ٱلَّذِينَ يُزَكُّونَ أَنفُسَهُم ۚ بَلِ ٱللَّهُ يُزَكِّى مَن يَشَآءُ وَلَا يُظْلَمُونَ فَتِيلًا
4:78, 125; 17:72.
4:78, 125; 17:72.
4:78, 125; 17:72.
Important Words:
فتیلا (a whit) is derived from فتل. They say فتله i.e. he twisted it, as one twists a rope or a wick. One would say رجل محکم الفتلi.e. a man firm or compact, in respect of make, as though firmly twisted. فتیل means: (1) a twisted rope; (2) a small thread in the cleft of a date-stone; also the fine thread of dirt formed between two fingers or the palms of two hands when they are rubbed together; hence a thing of no worth or significance. They say ما اغنی عنك فتیلا meaning, I do not or cannot avail or profit thee a whit (Lane).
Commentary:
What led the Jews to shirk, or associating partners with God, was the erroneous idea that they were quite pure and needed no more Divine Reformers. Present-day Muslims, too, have fallen victim to similar deceptive notions. When a people become impure from the religious point of view, it is only God Who can bring about their reform by raising divinely inspired Reformers.
b
4:78, 125; 17:72.
a
4:78, 125; 17:72.
524
Important Words:
فتیلا (a whit) is derived from فتل. They say فتله i.e. he twisted it, as one twists a rope or a wick. One would say رجل محکم الفتلi.e. a man firm or compact, in respect of make, as though firmly twisted. فتیل means: (1) a twisted rope; (2) a small thread in the cleft of a date-stone; also the fine thread of dirt formed between two fingers or the palms of two hands when they are rubbed together; hence a thing of no worth or significance. They say ما اغنی عنك فتیلا meaning, I do not or cannot avail or profit thee a whit (Lane).
Commentary:
What led the Jews to shirk, or associating partners with God, was the erroneous idea that they were quite pure and needed no more Divine Reformers. Present-day Muslims, too, have fallen victim to similar deceptive notions. When a people become impure from the religious point of view, it is only God Who can bring about their reform by raising divinely inspired Reformers.
b
4:78, 125; 17:72.
ٱنظُرْ كَيْفَ يَفْتَرُونَ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ ٱلْكَذِبَ ۖ وَكَفَىٰ بِهِۦٓ إِثْمًا مُّبِينًا
5:104; 10:70; 16:117.
5:104; 10:70; 16:117.
It was tantamount to forging a lie on the part of the Jews to say that God would raise no more Prophets because they needed none. If the people had become corrupt, a Prophet was sure to appear and he did appear in the person of the Holy Prophet of Islam.
5:104; 10:70; 16:117.
Commentary:
It was tantamount to forging a lie on the part of the Jews to say that God would raise no more Prophets because they needed none. If the people had become corrupt, a Prophet was sure to appear, and he did appear in the person of the Holy Prophet of Islam.
c
5:104; 10:70; 16:117.
b
5:104; 10:70; 16:117.
525
Commentary:
It was tantamount to forging a lie on the part of the Jews to say that God would raise no more Prophets because they needed none. If the people had become corrupt, a Prophet was sure to appear, and he did appear in the person of the Holy Prophet of Islam.
c
5:104; 10:70; 16:117.
616
It was tantamount to forging a lie on the part of the Jews to say that God would raise no more Prophets because they needed none. If the people had become corrupt, a Prophet was sure to appear and he did appear in the person of the Holy Prophet of Islam.
أَلَمْ تَرَ إِلَى ٱلَّذِينَ أُوتُوا۟ نَصِيبًا مِّنَ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ يُؤْمِنُونَ بِٱلْجِبْتِ وَٱلطَّٰغُوتِ وَيَقُولُونَ لِلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ هَٰٓؤُلَآءِ أَهْدَىٰ مِنَ ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ سَبِيلًا
قرآن مجید میں جِبْت کا لفظ ہے اور لغت میں لکھا ہے کہ جِبْتٌ وہ چیز ہوتی ہے جس میں کوئی فائدہ نہ ہو (اقرب)
Al-Jibt means, an idol or idols; that wherein there is no good; a diviner; the Devil (Lane).
The Muslims believed in all the Prophets mentioned in the Bible and also in the Divine origin of the Law that was given to Moses, yet so great was the hatred of the Jews for them that they declared the idol-worshippers of Arabia, who rejected their Prophets as well as their Scriptures, to be better guided than the Muslims.
Important Words:
الجبت (evil things) means: (1) an idol or idols; or the name of a certain idol belonging to the Quraish; (2) that which is worshipped instead of God, whatever it be; (3) that wherein there is no good; (4) a diviner or an enchanter or the like; (5) the Devil or Satan; (6) enchantment or magic (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The Muslims believed in all the Prophets mentioned in the Bible and also in the Divine origin of the Law that was given to Moses, yet so great was the hatred of Jews for them that they declared the idol-worshippers of Arabia, who rejected their Prophets as well as their Scriptures, to be better guided than Muslims. It is regrettable that some present-day Muslims also have the hardihood to say that it is better to renounce Islam than to accept Ahmad, the Promised Messiah, than whom there is no greater champion of Islam.
4
قرآن مجید میں جِبْت کا لفظ ہے اور لغت میں لکھا ہے کہ جِبْتٌ وہ چیز ہوتی ہے جس میں کوئی فائدہ نہ ہو (اقرب)
526
Important Words:
الجبت (evil things) means: (1) an idol or idols; or the name of a certain idol belonging to the Quraish; (2) that which is worshipped instead of God, whatever it be; (3) that wherein there is no good; (4) a diviner or an enchanter or the like; (5) the Devil or Satan; (6) enchantment or magic (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The Muslims believed in all the Prophets mentioned in the Bible and also in the Divine origin of the Law that was given to Moses, yet so great was the hatred of Jews for them that they declared the idol-worshippers of Arabia, who rejected their Prophets as well as their Scriptures, to be better guided than Muslims. It is regrettable that some present-day Muslims also have the hardihood to say that it is better to renounce Islam than to accept Ahmad, the Promised Messiah, than whom there is no greater champion of Islam.
617
Al-Jibt means, an idol or idols; that wherein there is no good; a diviner; the Devil (Lane).
618
The Muslims believed in all the Prophets mentioned in the Bible and also in the Divine origin of the Law that was given to Moses, yet so great was the hatred of the Jews for them that they declared the idol-worshippers of Arabia, who rejected their Prophets as well as their Scriptures, to be better guided than the Muslims.
أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ ٱلَّذِينَ لَعَنَهُمُ ٱللَّهُ ۖ وَمَن يَلْعَنِ ٱللَّهُ فَلَن تَجِدَ لَهُۥ نَصِيرًا
2:160; 3:87, 88.
2:160; 3:87, 88.
2:160; 3:87-88.
Commentary:
God cursed the Jews in consequence of their perversity in declaring idolaters to be better guided than Muslims, although the former reject and abuse the Prophets of God.
The words, thou shalt not find for him a helper, contain a prophecy regarding the miserable condition to which the Jews were to be reduced. The whole world has witnessed how remarkably this prophecy has been fulfilled during the ages.
d
2:160; 3:87, 88.
a
2:160; 3:87-88.
527
Commentary:
God cursed the Jews in consequence of their perversity in declaring idolaters to be better guided than Muslims, although the former reject and abuse the Prophets of God.
The words, thou shalt not find for him a helper, contain a prophecy regarding the miserable condition to which the Jews were to be reduced. The whole world has witnessed how remarkably this prophecy has been fulfilled during the ages.
a
2:160; 3:87, 88.
أَمْ لَهُمْ نَصِيبٌ مِّنَ ٱلْمُلْكِ فَإِذًا لَّا يُؤْتُونَ ٱلنَّاسَ نَقِيرًا
Important Words:
نقیرا (the little hollow in the back of a date-stone) is derived from نقر meaning, it (a bird) pecked at or picked up a grain from this place or that with its beak; he (a person) hit the butt with an arrow without making his arrow pass through it wholly or partly; he struck a thing with a pointed instrument; he engraved a writing upon a stone; he struck a lute or a tambourine with his finger; he bored, perforated or made a hole in a thing; he hollowed or excavated a piece of wood, etc. نقیر means, (1) what is bored or perforated; and what is hollowed out or excavated; (2) a piece of wood, or a block of wood, or a stump or the lower part of a palm-tree which is hollowed out; (3) the little hollow in the back of a date-stone (Lane & Aqrab). The word is figuratively used to denote the smallest quantity.
528
Important Words:
نقیرا (the little hollow in the back of a date-stone) is derived from نقر meaning, it (a bird) pecked at or picked up a grain from this place or that with its beak; he (a person) hit the butt with an arrow without making his arrow pass through it wholly or partly; he struck a thing with a pointed instrument; he engraved a writing upon a stone; he struck a lute or a tambourine with his finger; he bored, perforated or made a hole in a thing; he hollowed or excavated a piece of wood, etc. نقیر means, (1) what is bored or perforated; and what is hollowed out or excavated; (2) a piece of wood, or a block of wood, or a stump or the lower part of a palm-tree which is hollowed out; (3) the little hollow in the back of a date-stone (Lane & Aqrab). The word is figuratively used to denote the smallest quantity.
أَمْ يَحْسُدُونَ ٱلنَّاسَ عَلَىٰ مَآ ءَاتَىٰهُمُ ٱللَّهُ مِن فَضْلِهِۦ ۖ فَقَدْ ءَاتَيْنَآ ءَالَ إِبْرَٰهِيمَ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ وَٱلْحِكْمَةَ وَءَاتَيْنَٰهُم مُّلْكًا عَظِيمًا
یعنی یہود کو اس وقت کیوں غصہ نہ آیا؟
Commentary:
Jews, who are the children of Abraham, were given the Book and Wisdom and a great kingdom. Now if God has bestowed the same boons upon another people who are similarly descended from Abraham, as the Arabs are, the Jews should have no cause to begrudge them.
At the time when this verse was revealed, Muslims had received only a part of the "great kingdom" and the rest was yet to follow, but the Quran speaks of the giving of a great kingdom as an accomplished fact, because the promises of God are as good as fulfilled.
1
یعنی یہود کو اس وقت کیوں غصہ نہ آیا؟
529
Commentary:
Jews, who are the children of Abraham, were given the Book and Wisdom and a great kingdom. Now if God has bestowed the same boons upon another people who are similarly descended from Abraham, as the Arabs are, the Jews should have no cause to begrudge them.
At the time when this verse was revealed, Muslims had received only a part of the "great kingdom" and the rest was yet to follow, but the Quran speaks of the giving of a great kingdom as an accomplished fact, because the promises of God are as good as fulfilled.
فَمِنْهُم مَّنْ ءَامَنَ بِهِۦ وَمِنْهُم مَّن صَدَّ عَنْهُ ۚ وَكَفَىٰ بِجَهَنَّمَ سَعِيرًا
2:254; 10:41; 61:15.
سَعِیْر سَعْرٌ سے ہے جس کے اصل معنے تمازت کے ہیں (مفردات)
قرآن مجید میں لفظ کَفٰی کا ہے۔ مگر اردو میں کافی کا لفظ اس موقعہ پر استعمال نہیں ہوتا۔ اردو میں کافی کہیں تو اس کے معنے یہ ہوتے ہیں کہ میری ضرورت پورا کرتی ہے۔ اور جہنم ضرورت پورا نہیں کرتی۔ اس لئے ہم نے آیات کا ترجمہ یہ کیا ہے کہ جہنم تمازت میں بہت زیادہ ہے۔
2:254; 10:41; 61:15.
2:254; 10:41; 61:15.
a
2:254; 10:41; 61:15.
2
سَعِیْر سَعْرٌ سے ہے جس کے اصل معنے تمازت کے ہیں (مفردات)
3
قرآن مجید میں لفظ کَفٰی کا ہے۔ مگر اردو میں کافی کا لفظ اس موقعہ پر استعمال نہیں ہوتا۔ اردو میں کافی کہیں تو اس کے معنے یہ ہوتے ہیں کہ میری ضرورت پورا کرتی ہے۔ اور جہنم ضرورت پورا نہیں کرتی۔ اس لئے ہم نے آیات کا ترجمہ یہ کیا ہے کہ جہنم تمازت میں بہت زیادہ ہے۔
a
2:254; 10:41; 61:15.
b
2:254; 10:41; 61:15.
إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ بِـَٔايَٰتِنَا سَوْفَ نُصْلِيهِمْ نَارًا كُلَّمَا نَضِجَتْ جُلُودُهُم بَدَّلْنَٰهُمْ جُلُودًا غَيْرَهَا لِيَذُوقُوا۟ ٱلْعَذَابَ ۗ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ عَزِيزًا حَكِيمًا
Medical science has now established the fact that the skin is much more sensitive to pain than the flesh, there being a larger number of nerves in the former. The Qur’an revealed this great truth about fourteen hundred years ago by saying that the skin and not the flesh of the inmates of Hell will be renewed after being burnt up.
Commentary:
Medical science has now established the fact that the skin is much more sensitive to pain than the flesh, there being a larger number of nerves in the former. The Quran revealed this great truth about 1400 years ago by saying that the skin and not the flesh of the inmates of Hell would be renewed after being burnt up.
530
Commentary:
Medical science has now established the fact that the skin is much more sensitive to pain than the flesh, there being a larger number of nerves in the former. The Quran revealed this great truth about 1400 years ago by saying that the skin and not the flesh of the inmates of Hell would be renewed after being burnt up.
619
Medical science has now established the fact that the skin is much more sensitive to pain than the flesh, there being a larger number of nerves in the former. The Qur’an revealed this great truth about fourteen hundred years ago by saying that the skin and not the flesh of the inmates of Hell will be renewed after being burnt up.
وَٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ وَعَمِلُوا۟ ٱلصَّٰلِحَٰتِ سَنُدْخِلُهُمْ جَنَّٰتٍ تَجْرِى مِن تَحْتِهَا ٱلْأَنْهَٰرُ خَٰلِدِينَ فِيهَآ أَبَدًا ۖ لَّهُمْ فِيهَآ أَزْوَٰجٌ مُّطَهَّرَةٌ ۖ وَنُدْخِلُهُمْ ظِلًّا ظَلِيلًا
4:123; 13:30; 14:24; 22:24; 2:26.
13:36; 56:31.
The expression, plenteous shade, signifies an atmosphere of peace and calm, free from all pain-giving elements.
4:123; 16:30; 14:24; 22:24; See lso 2:26.
13:36; 56:31.
Commentary:
The word مطھرة (pure) does not literally mean "pure" but "made pure," signifying that the spouses whom pious believers will have in Heaven will be made as highly pure as the environment of Heaven demands.
The expression, pleasant and plenteous shade, signifies an atmosphere of peace and calm, free from all pain-giving element. Elsewhere the Quran says: They will know there (in Heaven) neither extreme heat nor extreme cold (76:14).
b
4:123; 13:30; 14:24; 22:24; 2:26.
c
13:36; 56:31.
a
4:123; 16:30; 14:24; 22:24; See lso 2:26.
b
13:36; 56:31.
531
Commentary:
The word مطھرة (pure) does not literally mean "pure" but "made pure," signifying that the spouses whom pious believers will have in Heaven will be made as highly pure as the environment of Heaven demands.
The expression, pleasant and plenteous shade, signifies an atmosphere of peace and calm, free from all pain-giving element. Elsewhere the Quran says: They will know there (in Heaven) neither extreme heat nor extreme cold (76:14).
a
4:123; 13:30; 14:24; 22:24; 2:26.
b
13:36; 56:31.
620
The expression, plenteous shade, signifies an atmosphere of peace and calm, free from all pain-giving elements.
۞ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ يَأْمُرُكُمْ أَن تُؤَدُّوا۟ ٱلْأَمَٰنَٰتِ إِلَىٰٓ أَهْلِهَا وَإِذَا حَكَمْتُم بَيْنَ ٱلنَّاسِ أَن تَحْكُمُوا۟ بِٱلْعَدْلِ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ نِعِمَّا يَعِظُكُم بِهِۦٓ ۗ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ سَمِيعًۢا بَصِيرًا
اس جگہ حکومت کا ذکر ہے اور آیت کا مطلب یہ ہے کہ حکام کو جب چنو تو اہل دیکھ کر چنو‘ رعایت یا جَنبہ داری سے کام نہ لو۔ پھر دوسرا حصہ منتخب حکام کو مخاطب کرکے بیان کیا ہے کہ اے حکام! جب تم چنے جاؤ تو ہمیشہ عدل اور انصاف کو مدنظر رکھو اور جنبہ داری سے کام نہ لو‘ خواہ ایک فریق تمہاری پارٹی کا مخالف ہی کیوں نہ ہو۔
8:28
Authority or power to rule has been here described as a "trust" of the people in order to point out that it belongs to the people and is not the birthright of any individual or dynasty. The Qur’an disapproves of dynastic or hereditary rule and institutes instead a representative form of government. The Chief is to be elected; and in electing him the people are bidden to vote for one best fitted for the office.
The Head of the Muslim State and all those persons who are entrusted with the duty of administration are enjoined to use their authority equitably and well.
8:28.
Important Words:
امانات (trusts) is the plural of امانة which is derived from امن. They say امنه i.e. he trusted in him; he entrusted him with power and authority, control or a charge; he gave him a charge over a thing or person. امانة means, trustiness or faithfulness or fidelity; a thing committed to the care or trust of a person; a trust or deposit; a duty or task allotted to a person; the commandment of God given to His servants; a man’s family or household (Lane). The Holy Prophet is reported to have said that a position or office of authority is also an امانة or a trust (Muslim, ch. on Imarat).
Commentary:
As in the previous verses authority and dominion were promised to Muslims, the Quran in the present verse proceeds to bid them entrust authority to such persons as possess the necessary qualifications to rule. Authority or power to rule has been here described as a "trust" of the people in order to point out that, truly speaking, it belongs to the people and is not the birth right of any particular individual or dynasty.
The verse also draws the attention of the Muslim people to their heavy responsibility in respect of the very important matter of electing their Chief or Khalifah. They are warned that if in electing a Khalifah or a Chief they allowed considerations of personal liking or nepotism to prevail against the interests of the State or the community or those of religion and displayed lack of conscientiousness, they would be called to account like one false to his trust. The verse also condemns dynastic or hereditary rule and institutes instead a representative form of government. The Khalifah or the ruler is to be elected; and in electing him, the people are bidden to vote for one best fitted for the office. The Khalifah or the ruler in his turn is bidden to be fair and just in his administration fair to individuals, fair to communities and fair to the State as a whole.
The words, that you judge with justice, apply both to the head of the Muslim State and to all those persons who are entrusted with the work of administration. They are all enjoined to use their authority equitably and well.
The addition of the Divine attributes of "All-Hearing and All-Seeing" at the end of the verse is meant to remind Muslims that if at any time they find it difficult to carry out His commandment, then instead of violating it, they should pray to God and He will hear their prayer and will see to it that they get their rights. (See General Introduction for the detailed discussion of the institution of Khilafat).
d
8:28.
330
统治的权威或权力在这里被说成人民的“委托物”, 为的是指出, 这个权属于人民, 不是个人或朝代生来就有的权利。«古兰经» 不赞成王朝的或世袭的统治, 而是另行制定一种代议制的政府。首脑要选举产生; 在选举首脑时, 要告诉人民投票给最称职的人。
331
穆斯林政府的首领及所有受委托担任行政职务的人员都必须公正而充分使用他们的权力。
1
اس جگہ حکومت کا ذکر ہے اور آیت کا مطلب یہ ہے کہ حکام کو جب چنو تو اہل دیکھ کر چنو‘ رعایت یا جَنبہ داری سے کام نہ لو۔ پھر دوسرا حصہ منتخب حکام کو مخاطب کرکے بیان کیا ہے کہ اے حکام! جب تم چنے جاؤ تو ہمیشہ عدل اور انصاف کو مدنظر رکھو اور جنبہ داری سے کام نہ لو‘ خواہ ایک فریق تمہاری پارٹی کا مخالف ہی کیوں نہ ہو۔
c
8:28.
532
Important Words:
امانات (trusts) is the plural of امانة which is derived from امن. They say امنه i.e. he trusted in him; he entrusted him with power and authority, control or a charge; he gave him a charge over a thing or person. امانة means, trustiness or faithfulness or fidelity; a thing committed to the care or trust of a person; a trust or deposit; a duty or task allotted to a person; the commandment of God given to His servants; a man’s family or household (Lane). The Holy Prophet is reported to have said that a position or office of authority is also an امانة or a trust (Muslim, ch. on Imarat).
Commentary:
As in the previous verses authority and dominion were promised to Muslims, the Quran in the present verse proceeds to bid them entrust authority to such persons as possess the necessary qualifications to rule. Authority or power to rule has been here described as a "trust" of the people in order to point out that, truly speaking, it belongs to the people and is not the birth right of any particular individual or dynasty.
The verse also draws the attention of the Muslim people to their heavy responsibility in respect of the very important matter of electing their Chief or Khalifah. They are warned that if in electing a Khalifah or a Chief they allowed considerations of personal liking or nepotism to prevail against the interests of the State or the community or those of religion and displayed lack of conscientiousness, they would be called to account like one false to his trust. The verse also condemns dynastic or hereditary rule and institutes instead a representative form of government. The Khalifah or the ruler is to be elected; and in electing him, the people are bidden to vote for one best fitted for the office. The Khalifah or the ruler in his turn is bidden to be fair and just in his administration fair to individuals, fair to communities and fair to the State as a whole.
The words, that you judge with justice, apply both to the head of the Muslim State and to all those persons who are entrusted with the work of administration. They are all enjoined to use their authority equitably and well.
The addition of the Divine attributes of "All-Hearing and All-Seeing" at the end of the verse is meant to remind Muslims that if at any time they find it difficult to carry out His commandment, then instead of violating it, they should pray to God and He will hear their prayer and will see to it that they get their rights. (See General Introduction for the detailed discussion of the institution of Khilafat).
c
8:28
621
Authority or power to rule has been here described as a "trust" of the people in order to point out that it belongs to the people and is not the birthright of any individual or dynasty. The Qur’an disapproves of dynastic or hereditary rule and institutes instead a representative form of government. The Chief is to be elected; and in electing him the people are bidden to vote for one best fitted for the office.
622
The Head of the Muslim State and all those persons who are entrusted with the duty of administration are enjoined to use their authority equitably and well.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوٓا۟ أَطِيعُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَأَطِيعُوا۟ ٱلرَّسُولَ وَأُو۟لِى ٱلْأَمْرِ مِنكُمْ ۖ فَإِن تَنَٰزَعْتُمْ فِى شَىْءٍ فَرُدُّوهُ إِلَى ٱللَّهِ وَٱلرَّسُولِ إِن كُنتُمْ تُؤْمِنُونَ بِٱللَّهِ وَٱلْيَوْمِ ٱلْءَاخِرِ ۚ ذَٰلِكَ خَيْرٌ وَأَحْسَنُ تَأْوِيلًا
4:84.
4:66.
为了指出对由法律恰当地指定的权威的服从就是对安拉和安拉的使者的服从, “服从” 这词是重复用在 “安拉” 和 “使者” 这两词前面, 而在那些 “当权的” 字句前面这词是省略的。体现在 “把它交给安拉和安拉的使者” 这句话中的指令可以指统治者之间的分歧, 也可以指被统治者内部的分歧。就前者而言就是, 如果统治者与被统治者对某事产生不同意见, 就应该按照 «古兰经» 的教导来决定;如意见不能一致就在圣行和圣训中找根据。可是, 如果 «古兰经»、圣行和圣训对此问题均未曾提到, 就应该留待有权处理穆斯林之间事务的当局去解决。这节经文似乎提到了那些特别跟国家大事有关的事情。在这方面的基本指令是, 对权力的完全服从不能超过安拉和他的使者的服从。可是, “如果对于社会问题等有不同意见和争论” 正如经文提及:“如果你们有分歧”, 那么, 应该按伊斯兰经典而不是按任何其它法律。
4:84
4:66
The word "obey" which has been repeated before the words "Allah" and "Messenger" has been omitted before the words, those who are in authority, in order to point out that obedience to the authority properly constituted by Law amounts to obedience to God and His Messenger. The injunction embodied in the words, "refer it to Allah and His Messenger" may either relate to differences between the rulers and the ruled or to those among the ruled themselves. In the former case the significance is that if there is a matter on which disagreement arises between the rulers and the ruled, it should be decided in the light of the Quranic teaching, or failing that, in that of the Sunnah and the Hadith. If, however, the Qur’an, the Sunnah and the Hadith are silent on the question, it should be left to those in whom is vested the authority to manage the affairs of Muslims. The verse seems to refer to matters concerning particularly the affairs of the State. The basic commandment in this respect is that all obedien
4:84.
4:66.
Important Words:
اولی الامر (those in authority) is made up of two words: (1) اولی which is originally اولوا meaning, possessors of or possessing or having; and (2) امر meaning, rule, authority, command, affair or matter, etc. اولی الامر means: (1) those who possess or hold authority command or rule; and (2) the learned men who, as it were, possess authority in knowledge (Taj & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The word "obey" which has been repeated before the words "Allah" and "Messenger" has been omitted before the words, those who are in authority, in order to point out that obedience to the authority properly constituted by Law is in reality obedience to God and His Messenger.
The clause, refer it to Allah and His Messenger, means that in case of difference, the matter should be referred to the Quran and the authentic Sunnah and Hadith of the Holy Prophet. The injunction may either relate to differences between the rulers and the ruled or to those among the ruled themselves. In the former case, the significance is that if there is a matter on which disagreement arises between the rulers and the ruled, it should be decided in the light of the Quranic teaching, or failing that, in that of the authentic Sunnah and Hadith. If, however, the Quran, the Sunnah and Hadith are silent on the question, it should be left in the hands of those in whom is vested the authority to manage the affairs of Muslims; and the latter are enjoined to abide by their decision even if they do not see eye to eye with them, because true obedience consists in obeying against one’s will and judgement. The words, refer it to Allah and His Messenger, may also mean that in case of a difference between the people and those in authority, the former are enjoined to do as Allah and His Messenger have bidden them to do on such occasions, i.e. that in such a case they should obey those in authority.
Primarily, however, the words, if you differ, do not refer to any differences between the rulers and the ruled but to disagreements arising among the ruled themselves. In this case the injunction embodied in the verse is that in matters pertaining to discipline and administration, Muslims should obey those in authority, but in disputes and differences regarding social matters, etc. they should be guided by the Law of Islam and not by other laws. This is the interpretation which Ibn Kathir (iii. 130-31) has adopted and which is in keeping with the context. The next verse also refers only to disputes among the ruled, and not to those between rulers and ruled.
The words, those in authority, in their wider significance include even such non-Muslims as may happen to be in authority over Muslims. In this case the additional words منکم would not mean "from among you" but simply "among you", i.e. "over you". The practice of the Holy Prophet as well as his sayings make it clear that in secular matters Muslims should obey even such of their rulers as are not Muslims.
a
4:84.
b
4:66.
332
为了指出对由法律恰当地指定的权威的服从就是对安拉和安拉的使者的服从, “服从” 这词是重复用在 “安拉” 和 “使者” 这两词前面, 而在那些 “当权的” 字句前面这词是省略的。体现在 “把它交给安拉和安拉的使者” 这句话中的指令可以指统治者之间的分歧, 也可以指被统治者内部的分歧。就前者而言就是, 如果统治者与被统治者对某事产生不同意见, 就应该按照 «古兰经» 的教导来决定;如意见不能一致就在圣行和圣训中找根据。可是, 如果 «古兰经»、圣行和圣训对此问题均未曾提到, 就应该留待有权处理穆斯林之间事务的当局去解决。这节经文似乎提到了那些特别跟国家大事有关的事情。在这方面的基本指令是, 对权力的完全服从不能超过安拉和他的使者的服从。可是, “如果对于社会问题等有不同意见和争论” 正如经文提及:“如果你们有分歧”, 那么, 应该按伊斯兰经典而不是按任何其它法律。
a
4:84.
b
4:66.
533
Important Words:
اولی الامر (those in authority) is made up of two words: (1) اولی which is originally اولوا meaning, possessors of or possessing or having; and (2) امر meaning, rule, authority, command, affair or matter, etc. اولی الامر means: (1) those who possess or hold authority command or rule; and (2) the learned men who, as it were, possess authority in knowledge (Taj & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The word "obey" which has been repeated before the words "Allah" and "Messenger" has been omitted before the words, those who are in authority, in order to point out that obedience to the authority properly constituted by Law is in reality obedience to God and His Messenger.
The clause, refer it to Allah and His Messenger, means that in case of difference, the matter should be referred to the Quran and the authentic Sunnah and Hadith of the Holy Prophet. The injunction may either relate to differences between the rulers and the ruled or to those among the ruled themselves. In the former case, the significance is that if there is a matter on which disagreement arises between the rulers and the ruled, it should be decided in the light of the Quranic teaching, or failing that, in that of the authentic Sunnah and Hadith. If, however, the Quran, the Sunnah and Hadith are silent on the question, it should be left in the hands of those in whom is vested the authority to manage the affairs of Muslims; and the latter are enjoined to abide by their decision even if they do not see eye to eye with them, because true obedience consists in obeying against one’s will and judgement. The words, refer it to Allah and His Messenger, may also mean that in case of a difference between the people and those in authority, the former are enjoined to do as Allah and His Messenger have bidden them to do on such occasions, i.e. that in such a case they should obey those in authority.
Primarily, however, the words, if you differ, do not refer to any differences between the rulers and the ruled but to disagreements arising among the ruled themselves. In this case the injunction embodied in the verse is that in matters pertaining to discipline and administration, Muslims should obey those in authority, but in disputes and differences regarding social matters, etc. they should be guided by the Law of Islam and not by other laws. This is the interpretation which Ibn Kathir (iii. 130-31) has adopted and which is in keeping with the context. The next verse also refers only to disputes among the ruled, and not to those between rulers and ruled.
The words, those in authority, in their wider significance include even such non-Muslims as may happen to be in authority over Muslims. In this case the additional words منکم would not mean "from among you" but simply "among you", i.e. "over you". The practice of the Holy Prophet as well as his sayings make it clear that in secular matters Muslims should obey even such of their rulers as are not Muslims.
a
4:84
b
4:66
623
The word "obey" which has been repeated before the words "Allah" and "Messenger" has been omitted before the words, those who are in authority, in order to point out that obedience to the authority properly constituted by Law amounts to obedience to God and His Messenger. The injunction embodied in the words, "refer it to Allah and His Messenger" may either relate to differences between the rulers and the ruled or to those among the ruled themselves. In the former case the significance is that if there is a matter on which disagreement arises between the rulers and the ruled, it should be decided in the light of the Quranic teaching, or failing that, in that of the Sunnah and the Hadith. If, however, the Qur’an, the Sunnah and the Hadith are silent on the question, it should be left to those in whom is vested the authority to manage the affairs of Muslims. The verse seems to refer to matters concerning particularly the affairs of the State. The basic commandment in this respect is that all obedien
أَلَمْ تَرَ إِلَى ٱلَّذِينَ يَزْعُمُونَ أَنَّهُمْ ءَامَنُوا۟ بِمَآ أُنزِلَ إِلَيْكَ وَمَآ أُنزِلَ مِن قَبْلِكَ يُرِيدُونَ أَن يَتَحَاكَمُوٓا۟ إِلَى ٱلطَّٰغُوتِ وَقَدْ أُمِرُوٓا۟ أَن يَكْفُرُوا۟ بِهِۦ وَيُرِيدُ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنُ أَن يُضِلَّهُمْ ضَلَٰلًۢا بَعِيدًا
یہ آیت منافقوں کے متعلق ہے جو رسولِ کریم صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم سے فیصلہ کروانے کی بجائے دوسرے لوگوں کے فیصلہ کو پسند کرتے تھے۔
Commentary:
The words, They desire to seek judgement from the rebellious, need not be taken as referring to any particular incident; they speak of a general tendency among hypocrites.
2
یہ آیت منافقوں کے متعلق ہے جو رسولِ کریم صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم سے فیصلہ کروانے کی بجائے دوسرے لوگوں کے فیصلہ کو پسند کرتے تھے۔
534
Commentary:
The words, They desire to seek judgement from the rebellious, need not be taken as referring to any particular incident; they speak of a general tendency among hypocrites.
وَإِذَا قِيلَ لَهُمْ تَعَالَوْا۟ إِلَىٰ مَآ أَنزَلَ ٱللَّهُ وَإِلَى ٱلرَّسُولِ رَأَيْتَ ٱلْمُنَٰفِقِينَ يَصُدُّونَ عَنكَ صُدُودًا
63:6.
63:6
63:6.
c
63:6.
a
63:6.
a
63:6
فَكَيْفَ إِذَآ أَصَٰبَتْهُم مُّصِيبَةٌۢ بِمَا قَدَّمَتْ أَيْدِيهِمْ ثُمَّ جَآءُوكَ يَحْلِفُونَ بِٱللَّهِ إِنْ أَرَدْنَآ إِلَّآ إِحْسَٰنًا وَتَوْفِيقًا
قرآن مجید میں کَیْفَ کا لفظ ہے جس کے معنے کس طرح کے ہیں۔ مگر اردو میں چونکہ اس جگہ کیوں کا لفظ بولتے ہیں ہم نے ترجمہ میں ’’کیوں‘‘ لکھ دیا ہے تاکہ مطلب واضح ہو جائے۔
Important Words:
توفیقا (reconciliation) is noun-infinitive from وفق (waffaqa) which is derived from وفق (wafiqa). They say وفق امرہ i.e. his affair or case was right or agreeable with what was desired. وفقه لامر means, he disposed or adapted him to a thing or made him fit for it.
وفق بین الشیئین means, he effected an agreement or harmony or reconciliation or adjustment between the two things. وفقت بین القوم means, I effected an agreement or harmony between the people; made peace between them (Lane).
Commentary:
This verse may also be taken as generally applying to the case of hypocrites generally. An incident, however, is related in traditions in connection with this verse which, though not reliable, may be mentioned here. There was some dispute between a Jew and one who hypocritically professed to be a Muslim. The latter, thinking that the Holy Prophet would decide the case in his favour, proposed to the Jew that they should go to him for decision. The Holy Prophet, however, contrary to the expectation of the hypocrite, decided the case in favour of the Jew who happened to be in the right. Being disappointed there, the hypocrite proposed to the Jew that they should go to Abu Bakr, hoping that though the Holy Prophet had shown him no favour, Abu Bakr at least would favour him. But Abu Bakr also decided in favour of the Jew. Being disappointed a second time, the hypocrite thought that ‘Umar, who was a jealous Muslim, would never decide in favour of a Jew. So he proposed to his rival that they should go to ‘Umar for decision.
But ‘Umar, says the tradition, on learning from the Jew that the case had already been decided in his favour by the Holy Prophet, cut off the head of the hypocrite, because he professed Islam and yet would not accept the Prophet’s verdict. Thereupon the hypocrites gathered together and went to the Holy Prophet and told him that in going to ‘Umar the object was only to bring about a compromise and reconciliation (Muhit, iii. 279).
The words, We meant nothing but the doing of good and reconciliation, reported to have been uttered by the hypocrites, show that there was an intrigue. The incident, however, is highly improbable and lacks proper authority.
1
قرآن مجید میں کَیْفَ کا لفظ ہے جس کے معنے کس طرح کے ہیں۔ مگر اردو میں چونکہ اس جگہ کیوں کا لفظ بولتے ہیں ہم نے ترجمہ میں ’’کیوں‘‘ لکھ دیا ہے تاکہ مطلب واضح ہو جائے۔
535
Important Words:
توفیقا (reconciliation) is noun-infinitive from وفق (waffaqa) which is derived from وفق (wafiqa). They say وفق امرہ i.e. his affair or case was right or agreeable with what was desired. وفقه لامر means, he disposed or adapted him to a thing or made him fit for it.
وفق بین الشیئین means, he effected an agreement or harmony or reconciliation or adjustment between the two things. وفقت بین القوم means, I effected an agreement or harmony between the people; made peace between them (Lane).
Commentary:
This verse may also be taken as generally applying to the case of hypocrites generally. An incident, however, is related in traditions in connection with this verse which, though not reliable, may be mentioned here. There was some dispute between a Jew and one who hypocritically professed to be a Muslim. The latter, thinking that the Holy Prophet would decide the case in his favour, proposed to the Jew that they should go to him for decision. The Holy Prophet, however, contrary to the expectation of the hypocrite, decided the case in favour of the Jew who happened to be in the right. Being disappointed there, the hypocrite proposed to the Jew that they should go to Abu Bakr, hoping that though the Holy Prophet had shown him no favour, Abu Bakr at least would favour him. But Abu Bakr also decided in favour of the Jew. Being disappointed a second time, the hypocrite thought that ‘Umar, who was a jealous Muslim, would never decide in favour of a Jew. So he proposed to his rival that they should go to ‘Umar for decision.
But ‘Umar, says the tradition, on learning from the Jew that the case had already been decided in his favour by the Holy Prophet, cut off the head of the hypocrite, because he professed Islam and yet would not accept the Prophet’s verdict. Thereupon the hypocrites gathered together and went to the Holy Prophet and told him that in going to ‘Umar the object was only to bring about a compromise and reconciliation (Muhit, iii. 279).
The words, We meant nothing but the doing of good and reconciliation, reported to have been uttered by the hypocrites, show that there was an intrigue. The incident, however, is highly improbable and lacks proper authority.
أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ ٱلَّذِينَ يَعْلَمُ ٱللَّهُ مَا فِى قُلُوبِهِمْ فَأَعْرِضْ عَنْهُمْ وَعِظْهُمْ وَقُل لَّهُمْ فِىٓ أَنفُسِهِمْ قَوْلًۢا بَلِيغًا
The Prophet was enjoined to deal kindly with the Hypocrites. They were not yet beyond redemption. It was possible that they might one day see the error of their ways and become sincere and true Muslims. War was never waged against them.
Commentary:
In the words, speak to them an effective word, the Prophet is enjoined to deal kindly with hypocrites. The injunction is to the effect that God knows that the hearts of hypocrites are afflicted with the disease of hypocrisy but He gives them respite that they may repent and mend their ways. The Prophet was also to treat them leniently and not punish them for their secret doings against Islam. They were not yet beyond redemption. It was possible they might one day see the error of their ways and become sincere and true Muslims.
536
Commentary:
In the words, speak to them an effective word, the Prophet is enjoined to deal kindly with hypocrites. The injunction is to the effect that God knows that the hearts of hypocrites are afflicted with the disease of hypocrisy but He gives them respite that they may repent and mend their ways. The Prophet was also to treat them leniently and not punish them for their secret doings against Islam. They were not yet beyond redemption. It was possible they might one day see the error of their ways and become sincere and true Muslims.
624
The Prophet was enjoined to deal kindly with the Hypocrites. They were not yet beyond redemption. It was possible that they might one day see the error of their ways and become sincere and true Muslims. War was never waged against them.
وَمَآ أَرْسَلْنَا مِن رَّسُولٍ إِلَّا لِيُطَاعَ بِإِذْنِ ٱللَّهِ ۚ وَلَوْ أَنَّهُمْ إِذ ظَّلَمُوٓا۟ أَنفُسَهُمْ جَآءُوكَ فَٱسْتَغْفَرُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَٱسْتَغْفَرَ لَهُمُ ٱلرَّسُولُ لَوَجَدُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ تَوَّابًا رَّحِيمًا
4:111.
4:111
It is sometimes sought to be inferred from these words that though a Prophet is to be always obeyed by the people to whom he preaches his Message, yet he himself does not give allegiance to any other Prophet. This is evidently a wrong inference. The fact that a Prophet is the object of other people’s obedience does not preclude the possibility of his being himself subordinate to, and a follower of, another Prophet. Aaron was a subordinate Prophet to Moses (20:94).
4:111.
Commentary:
It is sometimes sought to be inferred from the words, We have sent no Messenger but that he should be obeyed by the command of Allah, that though a Prophet is to be always obeyed by the people to whom he preaches his message, yet he himself gives allegiance to no other Prophet nor can he be subject to the Law of any other Prophet. This is evidently a very wrong inference. The simple and straightforward meaning of the words is only this that when God sends a Prophet, He means that those to whom he is sent should obey him. But the fact that a Prophet is the object of other people’s obedience cannot preclude the possibility of his being himself subordinate to, and a follower of another Prophet. A governor is sent to a province to be obeyed but that does not mean that he is not subordinate to the Governor General, if any, or to the king. According to the Quran, Aaron was a subordinate Prophet to Moses. This is why, when Moses went up to the Mount leaving Aaron behind him to look after the Israelites, and the Israelites took to worshipping the calf, Moses severely reprimanded him on his return, saying "Hast thou then disobeyed my command?" (20:94). In this connection see also 5:45.
a
4:111.
a
4:111.
537
Commentary:
It is sometimes sought to be inferred from the words, We have sent no Messenger but that he should be obeyed by the command of Allah, that though a Prophet is to be always obeyed by the people to whom he preaches his message, yet he himself gives allegiance to no other Prophet nor can he be subject to the Law of any other Prophet. This is evidently a very wrong inference. The simple and straightforward meaning of the words is only this that when God sends a Prophet, He means that those to whom he is sent should obey him. But the fact that a Prophet is the object of other people’s obedience cannot preclude the possibility of his being himself subordinate to, and a follower of another Prophet. A governor is sent to a province to be obeyed but that does not mean that he is not subordinate to the Governor General, if any, or to the king. According to the Quran, Aaron was a subordinate Prophet to Moses. This is why, when Moses went up to the Mount leaving Aaron behind him to look after the Israelites, and the Israelites took to worshipping the calf, Moses severely reprimanded him on his return, saying "Hast thou then disobeyed my command?" (20:94). In this connection see also 5:45.
a
4:111
625
It is sometimes sought to be inferred from these words that though a Prophet is to be always obeyed by the people to whom he preaches his Message, yet he himself does not give allegiance to any other Prophet. This is evidently a wrong inference. The fact that a Prophet is the object of other people’s obedience does not preclude the possibility of his being himself subordinate to, and a follower of, another Prophet. Aaron was a subordinate Prophet to Moses (20:94).
فَلَا وَرَبِّكَ لَا يُؤْمِنُونَ حَتَّىٰ يُحَكِّمُوكَ فِيمَا شَجَرَ بَيْنَهُمْ ثُمَّ لَا يَجِدُوا۟ فِىٓ أَنفُسِهِمْ حَرَجًا مِّمَّا قَضَيْتَ وَيُسَلِّمُوا۟ تَسْلِيمًا
4:60.
The commandment pertains to the Holy Prophet as Head of the Muslim State and may, therefore, apply also to his Rightly-guided Successors.
4:60.
Important Words:
حرجا (demur) is the noun-infinitive from حرج meaning, it was or became narrow; or he became disquieted and contracted in his bosom; he doubted, because doubt disquiets the mind; he became straitened or in difficulty, particularly owing to the commission of a sin or crime for which he deserved punishment; حرجا therefore means, straitness; difficulty; a sin or crime or an act of disobedience for which one deserves punishment (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
It should be noted that the injunction contained in this verse does not refer to the Holy Prophet alone. The verse speaks of the settlement of disputes, and so the injunction contained in it should be taken to pertain not to the person of the Holy Prophet but to him as Head of the Muslim State and is, therefore, applicable to his Successors as well. Muslims should not only have their disputes settled in accordance with the Law of Islam but should submit to the awards of those in authority with cheerfulness. The injunction is most essential for the maintenance of solidarity among the Muslim community. In fact, the chief cause of discord in a community is that people should regard their own judgement as right and should refuse to give to those in authority their due. The verse requires the Faithful not only to refer their differences to the Holy Prophet, and for that matter to his Successors, deputies and representatives, but to submit to their decisions cheerfully and without demur.
b
4:60.
333
指令属于穆斯林国家领袖, 穆圣, 因此也可适用于他的得到正确指引的继承者们。
b
4:60.
538
Important Words:
حرجا (demur) is the noun-infinitive from حرج meaning, it was or became narrow; or he became disquieted and contracted in his bosom; he doubted, because doubt disquiets the mind; he became straitened or in difficulty, particularly owing to the commission of a sin or crime for which he deserved punishment; حرجا therefore means, straitness; difficulty; a sin or crime or an act of disobedience for which one deserves punishment (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
It should be noted that the injunction contained in this verse does not refer to the Holy Prophet alone. The verse speaks of the settlement of disputes, and so the injunction contained in it should be taken to pertain not to the person of the Holy Prophet but to him as Head of the Muslim State and is, therefore, applicable to his Successors as well. Muslims should not only have their disputes settled in accordance with the Law of Islam but should submit to the awards of those in authority with cheerfulness. The injunction is most essential for the maintenance of solidarity among the Muslim community. In fact, the chief cause of discord in a community is that people should regard their own judgement as right and should refuse to give to those in authority their due. The verse requires the Faithful not only to refer their differences to the Holy Prophet, and for that matter to his Successors, deputies and representatives, but to submit to their decisions cheerfully and without demur.
b
4:60.
626
The commandment pertains to the Holy Prophet as Head of the Muslim State and may, therefore, apply also to his Rightly-guided Successors.
وَلَوْ أَنَّا كَتَبْنَا عَلَيْهِمْ أَنِ ٱقْتُلُوٓا۟ أَنفُسَكُمْ أَوِ ٱخْرُجُوا۟ مِن دِيَٰرِكُم مَّا فَعَلُوهُ إِلَّا قَلِيلٌ مِّنْهُمْ ۖ وَلَوْ أَنَّهُمْ فَعَلُوا۟ مَا يُوعَظُونَ بِهِۦ لَكَانَ خَيْرًا لَّهُمْ وَأَشَدَّ تَثْبِيتًا
یعنی بڑے بڑے مجاہدات کرو۔
اس سے مراد جہاد کے لئے نکلنا ہے نہ کہ بے فائدہ نکلنا۔
6:78.
The words, Uqtulu Anfusakum, do not mean "slay yourselves" but "slay your people" (2:55), or "lay down your lives in the cause of God".
4:78.
Commentary:
This verse refers to the hypocrites of Medina. The words اقتلوا انفسکم (kill your people) do not mean "kill yourselves" because suicide has been declared in Islam to be unlawful.
The expression انفسکم simply means "your people" (see note on 2:55). The Refugees had to leave their hearths and homes and had to kill their own disbelieving kith and kin in the war that had been forced upon them by the latter.
c
6:78.
334
اُقْتُلُوْا اَنْفُسَكُمْ (Uqtulu Anfusakum) 的意思不是 “杀你们自己” 而是 “杀你们的民众” (2:55), 或者 “为安拉献出你们的生命。”
2
یعنی بڑے بڑے مجاہدات کرو۔
3
اس سے مراد جہاد کے لئے نکلنا ہے نہ کہ بے فائدہ نکلنا۔
a
4:78.
539
Commentary:
This verse refers to the hypocrites of Medina. The words اقتلوا انفسکم (kill your people) do not mean "kill yourselves" because suicide has been declared in Islam to be unlawful.
The expression انفسکم simply means "your people" (see note on 2:55). The Refugees had to leave their hearths and homes and had to kill their own disbelieving kith and kin in the war that had been forced upon them by the latter.
c
6:78.
627
The words, Uqtulu Anfusakum, do not mean "slay yourselves" but "slay your people" (2:55), or "lay down your lives in the cause of God".
وَإِذًا لَّءَاتَيْنَٰهُم مِّن لَّدُنَّآ أَجْرًا عَظِيمًا
وَلَهَدَيْنَٰهُمْ صِرَٰطًا مُّسْتَقِيمًا
19:37; 36:62; 42:53-54.
19:37; 36:62; 42:53, 54.
a
19:37; 36:62; 42:53-54.
a
19:37; 36:62; 42:53-54.
540
Commentary:
The next verse explains what is meant here by being guided in the right path.
d
19:37; 36:62; 42:53, 54.
وَمَن يُطِعِ ٱللَّهَ وَٱلرَّسُولَ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ مَعَ ٱلَّذِينَ أَنْعَمَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَيْهِم مِّنَ ٱلنَّبِيِّۦنَ وَٱلصِّدِّيقِينَ وَٱلشُّهَدَآءِ وَٱلصَّٰلِحِينَ ۚ وَحَسُنَ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ رَفِيقًا
4:14; 8:25.
1:7; 5:21; 19:59; 57:20.
介系 مَعَ (ma‘) 表示两人或两人以上在同一地点或同一时间相伴在一起; 或者表示位置、等级或地位相同。如在9:40中所示, 这也含有帮助之意 (مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat)。此介系词曾在 «古兰经» 中好几次用过, 其意为 “فِی, fi”, 即“其中”的意思 (3:194和4:147)。
这节经文很重要, 因为它描述所有向穆斯林敞开了精神进展的大道。只有听从穆圣才能达到所有这四个精神等级--------先知、正人、殉教者, 及善人。这荣耀只有由穆圣独享。没有别的先知可以与他分享。另一节经文进一步证实了这个推论, 那节经文一般性地谈到了众先知说:“信仰安拉和他的使者的人们, 他们在他们的养主面前, 是正人和殉教者” (57:20)。把这两节经文联起来读, 意思就是, 其他先知的信从者只能达到正人、殉教者和善人的等级, 仅此而已, 而穆圣的信从者还能上升到先知的等级。بَحْرُ الْمُحِيْط (Baḥrul-Muḥīṭ) 第三卷, 287页摘引 (رَاغِبْ, Raghib) 的话说: “在这节经文中, 安拉把信从者分成四类, 并为他们指定了四级, 其中有低有高, 他并告诫那些真正的信从者不要落在任何等级的后面。” 这节经文还说, “先知品位有一般的和特殊的两种。特殊的先知品位即携持经律的先知品位, 现在不再能达到, 但一般先知品位还是可以达到的。”
قرآن کریم میں مَعَ کا لفظ ہے جس کے معنے ساتھ کے ہیں مگر مَعَ کے معنے مِنْ کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اور وہی معنے ہم نے یہاں کیے ہیں ورنہ تَوَفَّنَا مَعَ الْاَبْرَارِ کی آیت کے یہ معنے کرنے پڑیں گے کہ جب نیک فوت ہوں تو ساتھ ہی ہم کو بھی مار دے۔ اور یہ بالبداہت غلط اور خلاف عقل دعا بن جاتی ہے۔
4:14; 8:25.
1:7; 5:21; 19:59; 57:20.
The particle ma‘ denotes concomitance of two or more persons in one place or at one time; or in position, rank or status. It also implies the sense of assistance as in 9:40 (Mufradat). The particle has been used at several places in the Qur’an in the sense of fi meaning "among" (3:194 & 4:147).
The verse is important as it describes all the avenues of spiritual progress open to Muslims. All the four spiritual ranks—the Prophets; the Truthful; the Martyrs and the Righteous—can now be attained only by following the Holy Prophet. This is an honour reserved for the Holy Prophet alone. No other Prophet shares it with him. The inference is further supported by the verse which speaks of Prophets generally and says: And those who believe in Allah and His Messengers, they are the Truthful and the Martyrs in the presence of their Lord (57:20). When read together these two verses signify that, whereas the followers of other Prophets could only attain the rank of the Truthful, the Martyrs, and the Righteous and no higher, the followers of the Holy Prophet can rise to the rank of a Prophet also. The Bahrul-Muhit (vol. iii, p. 287) quotes Ar-Raghib as saying: "God has divided the believers into four classes in this verse, and has appointed for them four stages, some of which are lower than the other
4:14; 8:25.
1:7; 5:21; 19:59; 57:20.
Important Words:
مع (among) is a common word of the Arabic language denoting concomitance. It means "with" or "among", etc. signifying the being together of two or more persons both literally and figuratively. The word مع thus denotes (1) concomitance of two or more persons in one place; or (2) concomitance of two or more persons at one time; or (3) concomitance of two or more persons in position, rank or status.
The word also implies the sense of assistance, as in the verse إن الله معنا i.e. Allah is with us, which means, God is our Helper (Mufradat).
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it describes the avenues of spiritual progress open to Muslims. The four spiritual ranks: (1) the Prophets (2) the Truthful (3) the Martyrs and (4) the Righteous can be attained only by following the Holy Prophet. This is an honour reserved for the Holy Prophet alone. No other Prophet shares it with him. The inference is further supported by the verse which speaks of Prophets generally and says, And those who believe in Allah and His Messengers, they are the Truthful and the Martyrs in the presence of their Lord (57:20). When read together these two verses purport to mean that whereas the followers of other Prophets could only rise to the rank of the Truthful and the Martyrs, and no higher, the followers of the Holy Prophet can achieve even higher ranks; viz. they can rise to the rank of a Prophet also.
Some critics take exception to the particle مع rendered as "among" but generally taken to mean "with" and allege that a follower of the Holy Prophet will only be placed "with" the Prophets and not "among" them. Apart from what has been said under Important Words, if the particle مع be taken to denote that a follower of the Holy Prophet is merely joined to and placed with these four classes of men, without actually becoming one of them and without attaining their rank, it will follow from the construction of the verse that not only no person, by following in the footsteps of the Holy Prophet, can attain to the rank of a Prophet but also that he cannot even attain the rank of a Siddiq (Truthful) or a Shahid (Martyr) or a Salih (Righteous) but that he can only be joined to and placed with the people holding these ranks without himself attaining to their spiritual status, which is simply absurd. It is evident that the preposition مع rendered as "among" governs all the four nouns equally viz. the Salihin, the Shuhada’, the Siddiqin and the Nabiyyin, the four having been linked together in one chain. So what holds good in one case should hold good in the other cases as well. Hence, if according to this verse a person can attain the rank of a Salih (Righteous) by following the Holy Prophet of Islam, he can also attain the rank of a Prophet. If we deny the rank of a Prophet to the followers of the Holy Prophet, we will have to deny to them the rank of the Righteous also.
Besides, as shown under Important Words, it is wrong to say that the preposition مع always denotes merely being physically joined to or placed with a class of people physically without attaining to their position or rank. The word has been used at several places in the Quran in the sense of فی i.e. "among" or "from among" (see 3:194 and 4:147). In the latter verse, i.e. 4:147, God says that those of the hypocrites, who repent and amend, will be مع المؤمنین i.e. "among the believers". Now by no stretch of imagination can it be presumed that these people will only "be placed with the believers" and will not form part of them. The verse thus definitely proves that the word مع has been used here in the sense of فی or "among" and in no other sense. So is the case with 3:194. It is exactly in this sense that it has been used in the present verse. If, in the above-mentioned verses in which the word مع occurs, it is taken to give the sense of mere companionship, these verses would become meaningless. Certainly, it can give no comfort to a believer to be told that as a reward of his submission to God and the Holy Prophet, he would be merely made to sit in the company of the Prophets, the Truthful, the Martyrs and the Righteous, without attaining the spiritual rank they attained. That the preposition مع is not always used in the sense of companionship finds a further illustration in the words which the Holy Prophet is reported to have uttered just before his death viz. ألحقنی بالرفیق الاعلی i.e. "O God, join me with the exalted companions" (meaning the class of the Prophets in Heaven). Now does this prayer of the Holy Prophet offered at the time of his death mean that he only wished to live in the company of these exalted personages and that he himself was not a Prophet of God?
Support for the above-mentioned wrong inference is sometimes sought from the words, this grace is from Allah, occurring in the succeeding verse. The word "grace", it is alleged, indicates that what these people will get will be purely through God’s grace and not as any reward or result of their own works and deeds. But the question: Did the Prophets, the Truthful, the Martyrs and the Righteous attain their high spiritual stations independently of the "grace" of God? Did not the Holy Prophet himself, when asked whether he would get salvation by his deeds, say that he, too, would receive it through the "grace" of God? (Bukhari, ch. on Marda). Does this reply of the Prophet mean that he did not "deserve" salvation? In fact, the truth is that every blessing that one receives is a "grace" of God, in spite of the fact that it is the actions of man that draw this grace.
It may here be pointed out that the interpretation we have put on the verse under comment is not a new one. AbuHayyan, the well-known author of Bahrul-Muhit and Ar-Raghib, the great lexicographer, agree with this view. The Bahrul-Muhit (vol. iii, p. 287) quotes Ar-Raghib as saying: "God has divided the believers into four classes in this verse, and has appointed for them four stages, some of which are lower than the others, and He has exhorted true believers not to remain behind any of these stages." This explanation shows that both these commentators of the Quranheld that, as hinted in this verse, the rank of prophethood was attainable by following the Holy Prophet. Similarly, the author of the well-known commentary Ruhul-Ma‘ani in explanation of this verse, writes as follows: "Prophethood is of two kinds, general and special. The special prophethood, viz. the Law-bearing prophethood is now unattainable; but the general prophethood still continues." In fact, it is only the prophethood with a new Law that has now ceased, the Quran being the final Law of God, but prophethood without a new Law continues and is certainly attainable by the followers of the Holy Prophet who has himself said: "If my son Ibrahim had lived, he would have become a Prophet" (Majah, ch. on Jana’iz).
It may also be noted that even if the word مع is rendered as "with" and not as "among", it will not make much difference, for the word "with" very often gives the sense of being one of the party. When you are with a people, you are one of them. Even in English the word "with" is used in that sense. For fuller discussion of the subject of prophethood, see 33:41.
Finally, the word "companions" occurring at the end of the verse should not be construed to mean that mere companionship is meant here; for the expression has been used to hint at an additional significance, viz. that those who sincerely and truly follow God and His Messenger will not only rank among the Prophets, etc., but will also form a sort of company or brotherhood with them.
b
4:14; 8:25.
c
1:7; 5:21; 19:59; 57:20.
335
介系 مَعَ (ma‘) 表示两人或两人以上在同一地点或同一时间相伴在一起; 或者表示位置、等级或地位相同。如在9:40中所示, 这也含有帮助之意 (مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat)。此介系词曾在 «古兰经» 中好几次用过, 其意为 “فِی, fi”, 即“其中”的意思 (3:194和4:147)。
336
这节经文很重要, 因为它描述所有向穆斯林敞开了精神进展的大道。只有听从穆圣才能达到所有这四个精神等级--------先知、正人、殉教者, 及善人。这荣耀只有由穆圣独享。没有别的先知可以与他分享。另一节经文进一步证实了这个推论, 那节经文一般性地谈到了众先知说:“信仰安拉和他的使者的人们, 他们在他们的养主面前, 是正人和殉教者” (57:20)。把这两节经文联起来读, 意思就是, 其他先知的信从者只能达到正人、殉教者和善人的等级, 仅此而已, 而穆圣的信从者还能上升到先知的等级。بَحْرُ الْمُحِيْط (Baḥrul-Muḥīṭ) 第三卷, 287页摘引 (رَاغِبْ, Raghib) 的话说: “在这节经文中, 安拉把信从者分成四类, 并为他们指定了四级, 其中有低有高, 他并告诫那些真正的信从者不要落在任何等级的后面。” 这节经文还说, “先知品位有一般的和特殊的两种。特殊的先知品位即携持经律的先知品位, 现在不再能达到, 但一般先知品位还是可以达到的。”
1
قرآن کریم میں مَعَ کا لفظ ہے جس کے معنے ساتھ کے ہیں مگر مَعَ کے معنے مِنْ کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اور وہی معنے ہم نے یہاں کیے ہیں ورنہ تَوَفَّنَا مَعَ الْاَبْرَارِ کی آیت کے یہ معنے کرنے پڑیں گے کہ جب نیک فوت ہوں تو ساتھ ہی ہم کو بھی مار دے۔ اور یہ بالبداہت غلط اور خلاف عقل دعا بن جاتی ہے۔
b
4:14; 8:25.
c
1:7; 5:21; 19:59; 57:20.
541
Important Words:
مع (among) is a common word of the Arabic language denoting concomitance. It means "with" or "among", etc. signifying the being together of two or more persons both literally and figuratively. The word مع thus denotes (1) concomitance of two or more persons in one place; or (2) concomitance of two or more persons at one time; or (3) concomitance of two or more persons in position, rank or status.
The word also implies the sense of assistance, as in the verse إن الله معنا i.e. Allah is with us, which means, God is our Helper (Mufradat).
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it describes the avenues of spiritual progress open to Muslims. The four spiritual ranks: (1) the Prophets (2) the Truthful (3) the Martyrs and (4) the Righteous can be attained only by following the Holy Prophet. This is an honour reserved for the Holy Prophet alone. No other Prophet shares it with him. The inference is further supported by the verse which speaks of Prophets generally and says, And those who believe in Allah and His Messengers, they are the Truthful and the Martyrs in the presence of their Lord (57:20). When read together these two verses purport to mean that whereas the followers of other Prophets could only rise to the rank of the Truthful and the Martyrs, and no higher, the followers of the Holy Prophet can achieve even higher ranks; viz. they can rise to the rank of a Prophet also.
Some critics take exception to the particle مع rendered as "among" but generally taken to mean "with" and allege that a follower of the Holy Prophet will only be placed "with" the Prophets and not "among" them. Apart from what has been said under Important Words, if the particle مع be taken to denote that a follower of the Holy Prophet is merely joined to and placed with these four classes of men, without actually becoming one of them and without attaining their rank, it will follow from the construction of the verse that not only no person, by following in the footsteps of the Holy Prophet, can attain to the rank of a Prophet but also that he cannot even attain the rank of a Siddiq (Truthful) or a Shahid (Martyr) or a Salih (Righteous) but that he can only be joined to and placed with the people holding these ranks without himself attaining to their spiritual status, which is simply absurd. It is evident that the preposition مع rendered as "among" governs all the four nouns equally viz. the Salihin, the Shuhada’, the Siddiqin and the Nabiyyin, the four having been linked together in one chain. So what holds good in one case should hold good in the other cases as well. Hence, if according to this verse a person can attain the rank of a Salih (Righteous) by following the Holy Prophet of Islam, he can also attain the rank of a Prophet. If we deny the rank of a Prophet to the followers of the Holy Prophet, we will have to deny to them the rank of the Righteous also.
Besides, as shown under Important Words, it is wrong to say that the preposition مع always denotes merely being physically joined to or placed with a class of people physically without attaining to their position or rank. The word has been used at several places in the Quran in the sense of فی i.e. "among" or "from among" (see 3:194 and 4:147). In the latter verse, i.e. 4:147, God says that those of the hypocrites, who repent and amend, will be مع المؤمنین i.e. "among the believers". Now by no stretch of imagination can it be presumed that these people will only "be placed with the believers" and will not form part of them. The verse thus definitely proves that the word مع has been used here in the sense of فی or "among" and in no other sense. So is the case with 3:194. It is exactly in this sense that it has been used in the present verse. If, in the above-mentioned verses in which the word مع occurs, it is taken to give the sense of mere companionship, these verses would become meaningless. Certainly, it can give no comfort to a believer to be told that as a reward of his submission to God and the Holy Prophet, he would be merely made to sit in the company of the Prophets, the Truthful, the Martyrs and the Righteous, without attaining the spiritual rank they attained. That the preposition مع is not always used in the sense of companionship finds a further illustration in the words which the Holy Prophet is reported to have uttered just before his death viz. ألحقنی بالرفیق الاعلی i.e. "O God, join me with the exalted companions" (meaning the class of the Prophets in Heaven). Now does this prayer of the Holy Prophet offered at the time of his death mean that he only wished to live in the company of these exalted personages and that he himself was not a Prophet of God?
Support for the above-mentioned wrong inference is sometimes sought from the words, this grace is from Allah, occurring in the succeeding verse. The word "grace", it is alleged, indicates that what these people will get will be purely through God’s grace and not as any reward or result of their own works and deeds. But the question: Did the Prophets, the Truthful, the Martyrs and the Righteous attain their high spiritual stations independently of the "grace" of God? Did not the Holy Prophet himself, when asked whether he would get salvation by his deeds, say that he, too, would receive it through the "grace" of God? (Bukhari, ch. on Marda). Does this reply of the Prophet mean that he did not "deserve" salvation? In fact, the truth is that every blessing that one receives is a "grace" of God, in spite of the fact that it is the actions of man that draw this grace.
It may here be pointed out that the interpretation we have put on the verse under comment is not a new one. AbuHayyan, the well-known author of Bahrul-Muhit and Ar-Raghib, the great lexicographer, agree with this view. The Bahrul-Muhit (vol. iii, p. 287) quotes Ar-Raghib as saying: "God has divided the believers into four classes in this verse, and has appointed for them four stages, some of which are lower than the others, and He has exhorted true believers not to remain behind any of these stages." This explanation shows that both these commentators of the Quranheld that, as hinted in this verse, the rank of prophethood was attainable by following the Holy Prophet. Similarly, the author of the well-known commentary Ruhul-Ma‘ani in explanation of this verse, writes as follows: "Prophethood is of two kinds, general and special. The special prophethood, viz. the Law-bearing prophethood is now unattainable; but the general prophethood still continues." In fact, it is only the prophethood with a new Law that has now ceased, the Quran being the final Law of God, but prophethood without a new Law continues and is certainly attainable by the followers of the Holy Prophet who has himself said: "If my son Ibrahim had lived, he would have become a Prophet" (Majah, ch. on Jana’iz).
It may also be noted that even if the word مع is rendered as "with" and not as "among", it will not make much difference, for the word "with" very often gives the sense of being one of the party. When you are with a people, you are one of them. Even in English the word "with" is used in that sense. For fuller discussion of the subject of prophethood, see 33:41.
Finally, the word "companions" occurring at the end of the verse should not be construed to mean that mere companionship is meant here; for the expression has been used to hint at an additional significance, viz. that those who sincerely and truly follow God and His Messenger will not only rank among the Prophets, etc., but will also form a sort of company or brotherhood with them.
a
4:14; 8:25.
b
1:7; 5:21; 19:59; 57:20.
628
The particle ma‘ denotes concomitance of two or more persons in one place or at one time; or in position, rank or status. It also implies the sense of assistance as in 9:40 (Mufradat). The particle has been used at several places in the Qur’an in the sense of fi meaning "among" (3:194 & 4:147).
629
The verse is important as it describes all the avenues of spiritual progress open to Muslims. All the four spiritual ranks—the Prophets; the Truthful; the Martyrs and the Righteous—can now be attained only by following the Holy Prophet. This is an honour reserved for the Holy Prophet alone. No other Prophet shares it with him. The inference is further supported by the verse which speaks of Prophets generally and says: And those who believe in Allah and His Messengers, they are the Truthful and the Martyrs in the presence of their Lord (57:20). When read together these two verses signify that, whereas the followers of other Prophets could only attain the rank of the Truthful, the Martyrs, and the Righteous and no higher, the followers of the Holy Prophet can rise to the rank of a Prophet also. The Bahrul-Muhit (vol. iii, p. 287) quotes Ar-Raghib as saying: "God has divided the believers into four classes in this verse, and has appointed for them four stages, some of which are lower than the other
ذَٰلِكَ ٱلْفَضْلُ مِنَ ٱللَّهِ ۚ وَكَفَىٰ بِٱللَّهِ عَلِيمًا
Commentary:
See note on the preceding verse.
542
Commentary:
See note on the preceding verse.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ خُذُوا۟ حِذْرَكُمْ فَٱنفِرُوا۟ ثُبَاتٍ أَوِ ٱنفِرُوا۟ جَمِيعًا
Hidhr means, caution or precaution; vigilance; guard; state of preparation; or of fear (Lane). The word extends to all kinds of precautions and preparations necessary for defence, and has been understood to include the putting on of weapons of defence.
Ath-Thubah means, a company or body of men; a distinct body or company of men; a troop of horsemen (Lane).
Important Words:
ثبات (separate parties) is derived from ثبی and not from ثبت as some wrongly suppose. They say ثبی الشیء i.e. he collected the thing and added to it. ثبوت له خیرا means, I mentioned his qualities one after the other. ثبة of which ثبات is plural means, a company or body of men; a distinct body or company of men; a troop of horsemen; the place where water collects in a valley or ground (Lane & Aqrab).
حذر (precautions). The verb حذر means, he was cautious or vigilant or on his guard; he took care; he prepared himself against; he feared. حذر means, caution or precaution; vigilance; guard; state of preparation; or of fear (Lane). The word extends to all kinds of precautions and preparations necessary for defence, and has been taken to include the putting on of weapons of defence.
Commentary:
The Muslims are warned to be always vigilant and on their guard and in a perfect state of preparation even when they march out in force. The verse may also be taken in the figurative sense, applying to missionary and cultural activities.
543
Important Words:
ثبات (separate parties) is derived from ثبی and not from ثبت as some wrongly suppose. They say ثبی الشیء i.e. he collected the thing and added to it. ثبوت له خیرا means, I mentioned his qualities one after the other. ثبة of which ثبات is plural means, a company or body of men; a distinct body or company of men; a troop of horsemen; the place where water collects in a valley or ground (Lane & Aqrab).
حذر (precautions). The verb حذر means, he was cautious or vigilant or on his guard; he took care; he prepared himself against; he feared. حذر means, caution or precaution; vigilance; guard; state of preparation; or of fear (Lane). The word extends to all kinds of precautions and preparations necessary for defence, and has been taken to include the putting on of weapons of defence.
Commentary:
The Muslims are warned to be always vigilant and on their guard and in a perfect state of preparation even when they march out in force. The verse may also be taken in the figurative sense, applying to missionary and cultural activities.
630
Hidhr means, caution or precaution; vigilance; guard; state of preparation; or of fear (Lane). The word extends to all kinds of precautions and preparations necessary for defence, and has been understood to include the putting on of weapons of defence.
631
Ath-Thubah means, a company or body of men; a distinct body or company of men; a troop of horsemen (Lane).
وَإِنَّ مِنكُمْ لَمَن لَّيُبَطِّئَنَّ فَإِنْ أَصَٰبَتْكُم مُّصِيبَةٌ قَالَ قَدْ أَنْعَمَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَىَّ إِذْ لَمْ أَكُن مَّعَهُمْ شَهِيدًا
The verse refers to Hypocrites or the internal enemies of Islam and mentions their two prominent traits.
Important Words:
لیبطئن (tarries behind) is derived from بطؤ meaning, he was or became slow, late or backward. بطأ means, it made him slow, late or backward. But بطأ is also used intransitively, as in the tradition من بطأبه عمله i.e. he whom his evil deeds hold back (lit. he whose evil deeds keep back along with him). So بطأ would mean, (1) he held back or tarried behind, and (2) he made others hold back and tarry behind (Aqrab, Lane, Mufradat & Kashshaf).
Commentary:
This verse refers to the internal enemies of Islam. It gives two characteristics of hypocrites: (1) they fail to march out with Muslims and are glad to do so; (2) they do not share with Muslims their joys and sorrows. They are more anxious about their own selves than about the success of Islam. If Muslims meet with trouble, they rejoice that they themselves escaped it by remaining behind, and exultingly remind Muslims of the advice which they gave them and by acting against which the Muslims came to grief, as they did after the Battle of Uhud.
It is worthy of note here that though in connection with the Battle of Uhud, the Holy Prophet himself was at first in favour of fighting the enemy by staying in Medina, he did not rebuke the Muslims when they suffered a reverse by telling them that they had met with a disaster by going against his wish. But the hypocrites did taunt the Muslims that they had suffered defeat by defying their advice. It is for this taunting that the hypocrites have been reprimanded in this verse, because such a course, if allowed, is calculated to prove detrimental to the cause of communal unity and concord.
544
Important Words:
لیبطئن (tarries behind) is derived from بطؤ meaning, he was or became slow, late or backward. بطأ means, it made him slow, late or backward. But بطأ is also used intransitively, as in the tradition من بطأبه عمله i.e. he whom his evil deeds hold back (lit. he whose evil deeds keep back along with him). So بطأ would mean, (1) he held back or tarried behind, and (2) he made others hold back and tarry behind (Aqrab, Lane, Mufradat & Kashshaf).
Commentary:
This verse refers to the internal enemies of Islam. It gives two characteristics of hypocrites: (1) they fail to march out with Muslims and are glad to do so; (2) they do not share with Muslims their joys and sorrows. They are more anxious about their own selves than about the success of Islam. If Muslims meet with trouble, they rejoice that they themselves escaped it by remaining behind, and exultingly remind Muslims of the advice which they gave them and by acting against which the Muslims came to grief, as they did after the Battle of Uhud.
It is worthy of note here that though in connection with the Battle of Uhud, the Holy Prophet himself was at first in favour of fighting the enemy by staying in Medina, he did not rebuke the Muslims when they suffered a reverse by telling them that they had met with a disaster by going against his wish. But the hypocrites did taunt the Muslims that they had suffered defeat by defying their advice. It is for this taunting that the hypocrites have been reprimanded in this verse, because such a course, if allowed, is calculated to prove detrimental to the cause of communal unity and concord.
632
The verse refers to Hypocrites or the internal enemies of Islam and mentions their two prominent traits.
وَلَئِنْ أَصَٰبَكُمْ فَضْلٌ مِّنَ ٱللَّهِ لَيَقُولَنَّ كَأَن لَّمْ تَكُنۢ بَيْنَكُمْ وَبَيْنَهُۥ مَوَدَّةٌ يَٰلَيْتَنِى كُنتُ مَعَهُمْ فَأَفُوزَ فَوْزًا عَظِيمًا
۞ فَلْيُقَٰتِلْ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ ٱلَّذِينَ يَشْرُونَ ٱلْحَيَوٰةَ ٱلدُّنْيَا بِٱلْءَاخِرَةِ ۚ وَمَن يُقَٰتِلْ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ فَيُقْتَلْ أَوْ يَغْلِبْ فَسَوْفَ نُؤْتِيهِ أَجْرًا عَظِيمًا
a
9:111.
b
9:52.
a
9:111.
b
9:52.
a
9:111.
b
9:52.
وَمَا لَكُمْ لَا تُقَٰتِلُونَ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ وَٱلْمُسْتَضْعَفِينَ مِنَ ٱلرِّجَالِ وَٱلنِّسَآءِ وَٱلْوِلْدَٰنِ ٱلَّذِينَ يَقُولُونَ رَبَّنَآ أَخْرِجْنَا مِنْ هَٰذِهِ ٱلْقَرْيَةِ ٱلظَّالِمِ أَهْلُهَا وَٱجْعَل لَّنَا مِن لَّدُنكَ وَلِيًّا وَٱجْعَل لَّنَا مِن لَّدُنكَ نَصِيرًا
یعنی ان کو آزاد کرانے کے لئے جو کافروں کے ظلموں کا شکار ہو رہے ہیں۔
4:99.
The words also mean, what is the matter with you that you fight not.
The verse is a clear proof of the fact that Muslims never started hostilities. They only fought in self-defence in order to protect their religion and save their weaker co-religionists.
4:99.
Commentary:
The verse is a clear proof of the fact that Muslims were not the first to open hostilities. They only fought a war of defence with a view to protecting their religion and saving their weaker co-religionists.
c
4:99.
337
这节经文清楚地证明穆斯林决不会发动敌对行动。他们只是为保卫自己的宗教和挽救自己力量较弱的教友而战。
1
یعنی ان کو آزاد کرانے کے لئے جو کافروں کے ظلموں کا شکار ہو رہے ہیں۔
a
4:99.
545
Commentary:
The verse is a clear proof of the fact that Muslims were not the first to open hostilities. They only fought a war of defence with a view to protecting their religion and saving their weaker co-religionists.
c
4:99.
632A
The words also mean, what is the matter with you that you fight not.
633
The verse is a clear proof of the fact that Muslims never started hostilities. They only fought in self-defence in order to protect their religion and save their weaker co-religionists.
ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ يُقَٰتِلُونَ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ ۖ وَٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ يُقَٰتِلُونَ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱلطَّٰغُوتِ فَقَٰتِلُوٓا۟ أَوْلِيَآءَ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنِ ۖ إِنَّ كَيْدَ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنِ كَانَ ضَعِيفًا
Important Words:
الطاغوت (the Evil One). See 2:257.
545A
Important Words:
الطاغوت (the Evil One). See 2:257.
أَلَمْ تَرَ إِلَى ٱلَّذِينَ قِيلَ لَهُمْ كُفُّوٓا۟ أَيْدِيَكُمْ وَأَقِيمُوا۟ ٱلصَّلَوٰةَ وَءَاتُوا۟ ٱلزَّكَوٰةَ فَلَمَّا كُتِبَ عَلَيْهِمُ ٱلْقِتَالُ إِذَا فَرِيقٌ مِّنْهُمْ يَخْشَوْنَ ٱلنَّاسَ كَخَشْيَةِ ٱللَّهِ أَوْ أَشَدَّ خَشْيَةً ۚ وَقَالُوا۟ رَبَّنَا لِمَ كَتَبْتَ عَلَيْنَا ٱلْقِتَالَ لَوْلَآ أَخَّرْتَنَآ إِلَىٰٓ أَجَلٍ قَرِيبٍ ۗ قُلْ مَتَٰعُ ٱلدُّنْيَا قَلِيلٌ وَٱلْءَاخِرَةُ خَيْرٌ لِّمَنِ ٱتَّقَىٰ وَلَا تُظْلَمُونَ فَتِيلًا
2:247; 4:67.
14:45; 63:11.
9:38; 57:21.
See 4:50.
The verse refers to a class of men who show eagerness to fight when they are told not to fight, but when the actual time for fighting arrives, they refuse to fight or try to avoid it by various pretexts, thus showing that their former eagerness for fighting was either insincere or was due to temporary excitement.
2:247; 4:67.
14:45; 63:11.
9:38; 57:21.
See 4:50.
Commentary:
This verse refers to a class of men who show eagerness to fight when they are told not to fight, but when the actual time for fighting arrives, they refuse to fight or try to avoid it by various pretexts, thus showing that their former eagerness for fighting was either insincere or was only due to a temporary excitement.
The verse may also be regarded as referring to انصار (Helpers) of Medina who, before the advent of Islam to that city, were constantly at war among themselves. But when they accepted Islam, they were asked to cease fighting. When, however, they were called upon to take up arms to defend Islam, a section of them, who were always fighting among themselves before they embraced Islam, became afraid of fighting in the cause of God.
a
2:247; 4:67.
b
14:45; 63:11.
c
9:38; 57:21.
d
4:50.
a
2:247; 4:67.
b
14:45; 63:11.
c
9:38; 57:21.
d
See 4:50.
546
Commentary:
This verse refers to a class of men who show eagerness to fight when they are told not to fight, but when the actual time for fighting arrives, they refuse to fight or try to avoid it by various pretexts, thus showing that their former eagerness for fighting was either insincere or was only due to a temporary excitement.
The verse may also be regarded as referring to انصار (Helpers) of Medina who, before the advent of Islam to that city, were constantly at war among themselves. But when they accepted Islam, they were asked to cease fighting. When, however, they were called upon to take up arms to defend Islam, a section of them, who were always fighting among themselves before they embraced Islam, became afraid of fighting in the cause of God.
a
2:247; 4:67.
b
14:45; 63:11.
c
9:38; 57:21.
d
See 4:50.
634
The verse refers to a class of men who show eagerness to fight when they are told not to fight, but when the actual time for fighting arrives, they refuse to fight or try to avoid it by various pretexts, thus showing that their former eagerness for fighting was either insincere or was due to temporary excitement.
أَيْنَمَا تَكُونُوا۟ يُدْرِككُّمُ ٱلْمَوْتُ وَلَوْ كُنتُمْ فِى بُرُوجٍ مُّشَيَّدَةٍ ۗ وَإِن تُصِبْهُمْ حَسَنَةٌ يَقُولُوا۟ هَٰذِهِۦ مِنْ عِندِ ٱللَّهِ ۖ وَإِن تُصِبْهُمْ سَيِّئَةٌ يَقُولُوا۟ هَٰذِهِۦ مِنْ عِندِكَ ۚ قُلْ كُلٌّ مِّنْ عِندِ ٱللَّهِ ۖ فَمَالِ هَٰٓؤُلَآءِ ٱلْقَوْمِ لَا يَكَادُونَ يَفْقَهُونَ حَدِيثًا
62:9.
62:9.
The words either refer to the general physical law about the inevitability of death, or they may be taken as particularly addressed to the Hypocrites, who disobeyed the Divine command to fight, thinking that in this way they could avoid death.
The expression, All is from Allah, is true in this sense that God is the Final Controlling Power in the universe and whatever good or evil befalls man is attributable either to a general law of nature or to one or other of His special decrees.
62:9.
Important Words:
مشیدة (strongly built) is derived from شاد meaning, he plastered (a wall, etc.) with the requisite material. شاد البناء means, he raised the building high. شادوا الدین means, they strengthened and exalted the religion. شیدہ means, he raised it high, namely, a place or a building; or he built it firmly and strongly and raised it high (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The words, Wheresoever you may be, death will overtake you, may either refer to the general physical law about the inevitability of death, meaning that when one must die sooner or later, there is no reason why one should be so afraid of death as to refuse to fight in a just cause; or they may be taken as particularly addressed to the hypocrites, who disobeyed the Divine command to fight, thinking that in this way they would be able to avoid death. The verse purports to say that God had decreed that they should suffer death and destruction, however well protected they might be.
It was customary with the hypocrites that when Muslims achieved a success, they attributed it to God, saying that since Islam was a divine religion, it was bound to prosper and succeed. But when a misfortune overtook Muslims, they declared that it was due to mistakes committed by the Prophet. The Quran says that from the viewpoint from which they ascribe success to God, failures are also ascribable to Him. By attributing success to God and failure to the Prophet, the hypocrites sought to discredit the Prophet and to lower him in the estimation of Muslims.
The words, Say, All is from Allah, point to the fact that both successes and misfortunes were foretold by the Holy Prophet (e.g. see 2:156-158). So even the failures which the hypocrites attributed to the Holy Prophet really constituted a proof of his truth. The expression, All is from Allah, is also true in this sense that God is the final controlling power in the universe and whatever good or evil befalls man is attributable either to the general law of nature ordained by God or to one or other of His special decrees.
e
62:9.
e
62:9.
547
Important Words:
مشیدة (strongly built) is derived from شاد meaning, he plastered (a wall, etc.) with the requisite material. شاد البناء means, he raised the building high. شادوا الدین means, they strengthened and exalted the religion. شیدہ means, he raised it high, namely, a place or a building; or he built it firmly and strongly and raised it high (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The words, Wheresoever you may be, death will overtake you, may either refer to the general physical law about the inevitability of death, meaning that when one must die sooner or later, there is no reason why one should be so afraid of death as to refuse to fight in a just cause; or they may be taken as particularly addressed to the hypocrites, who disobeyed the Divine command to fight, thinking that in this way they would be able to avoid death. The verse purports to say that God had decreed that they should suffer death and destruction, however well protected they might be.
It was customary with the hypocrites that when Muslims achieved a success, they attributed it to God, saying that since Islam was a divine religion, it was bound to prosper and succeed. But when a misfortune overtook Muslims, they declared that it was due to mistakes committed by the Prophet. The Quran says that from the viewpoint from which they ascribe success to God, failures are also ascribable to Him. By attributing success to God and failure to the Prophet, the hypocrites sought to discredit the Prophet and to lower him in the estimation of Muslims.
The words, Say, All is from Allah, point to the fact that both successes and misfortunes were foretold by the Holy Prophet (e.g. see 2:156-158). So even the failures which the hypocrites attributed to the Holy Prophet really constituted a proof of his truth. The expression, All is from Allah, is also true in this sense that God is the final controlling power in the universe and whatever good or evil befalls man is attributable either to the general law of nature ordained by God or to one or other of His special decrees.
a
62:9.
635
The words either refer to the general physical law about the inevitability of death, or they may be taken as particularly addressed to the Hypocrites, who disobeyed the Divine command to fight, thinking that in this way they could avoid death.
636
The expression, All is from Allah, is true in this sense that God is the Final Controlling Power in the universe and whatever good or evil befalls man is attributable either to a general law of nature or to one or other of His special decrees.
مَّآ أَصَابَكَ مِنْ حَسَنَةٍ فَمِنَ ٱللَّهِ ۖ وَمَآ أَصَابَكَ مِن سَيِّئَةٍ فَمِن نَّفْسِكَ ۚ وَأَرْسَلْنَٰكَ لِلنَّاسِ رَسُولًا ۚ وَكَفَىٰ بِٱللَّهِ شَهِيدًا
جو لوگ منافق ہوتے ہیں ان کا یہ طریق ہوتا ہے کہ جب کامیابی نصیب ہو تو اسے خداتعالیٰ کی طرف منسوب کرتے ہیں اور کہتے ہیں کہ یہ آسمانی سلسلہ ہے اس نے تو اس طرح ترقی کرنی ہی تھی۔ لیکن جب کوئی تکلیف پہنچے تو کہہ دیتے ہیں کہ رسول سے یا خلیفہ سے غلطی ہو گئی تھی یہ اس کا نتیجہ ہے فرماتا ہے کہ جس نقطہ نگاہ سے تم کامیابی کو اللہ تعالیٰ کی طرف منسوب کرتے ہو۔ اس نقطہ نگاہ سے تو سکھ اور دکھ دونوں اللہ تعالیٰ کی طرف سے ہیں۔ ایک کو خداتعالیٰ کی طرف منسوب کرنا اور دوسری کو رسول کی طرف‘ کیا اس غرض سے نہیں کہ لوگوں کے دلوں میں رسول کی محبت کم ہو اور اس کی وقعت ان کے دلوں سے جاتی رہے۔ مگر ف
God has endowed man with natural powers and faculties by making right use of which he can achieve success in life and by making wrong use of them involves himself in trouble. Thus all good is here attributed to God and all evil to man.
Commentary:
The verse appears to run counter to what has been said in the preceding verse but it is not really so. God has endowed man with natural powers and faculties by making a right use of which he can achieve success; but when he makes a wrong use of them, he is involved in trouble. Hence, from this point of view, all good is ascribable to God, and all evil to man.
As the verse embodies a general law applicable to all men, therefore the address is made to the Holy Prophet, this being a particular Quranic way of addressing mankind in general. But that it is not the person of the Holy Prophet, but mankind collectively to whom the address is made in this verse, is clear from the fact that the Holy Prophet has been addressed distinctly and separately in the latter part of the verse, and also in the verse that follows.
1
جو لوگ منافق ہوتے ہیں ان کا یہ طریق ہوتا ہے کہ جب کامیابی نصیب ہو تو اسے خداتعالیٰ کی طرف منسوب کرتے ہیں اور کہتے ہیں کہ یہ آسمانی سلسلہ ہے اس نے تو اس طرح ترقی کرنی ہی تھی۔ لیکن جب کوئی تکلیف پہنچے تو کہہ دیتے ہیں کہ رسول سے یا خلیفہ سے غلطی ہو گئی تھی یہ اس کا نتیجہ ہے فرماتا ہے کہ جس نقطہ نگاہ سے تم کامیابی کو اللہ تعالیٰ کی طرف منسوب کرتے ہو۔ اس نقطہ نگاہ سے تو سکھ اور دکھ دونوں اللہ تعالیٰ کی طرف سے ہیں۔ ایک کو خداتعالیٰ کی طرف منسوب کرنا اور دوسری کو رسول کی طرف‘ کیا اس غرض سے نہیں کہ لوگوں کے دلوں میں رسول کی محبت کم ہو اور اس کی وقعت ان کے دلوں سے جاتی رہے۔ مگر ف
548
Commentary:
The verse appears to run counter to what has been said in the preceding verse but it is not really so. God has endowed man with natural powers and faculties by making a right use of which he can achieve success; but when he makes a wrong use of them, he is involved in trouble. Hence, from this point of view, all good is ascribable to God, and all evil to man.
As the verse embodies a general law applicable to all men, therefore the address is made to the Holy Prophet, this being a particular Quranic way of addressing mankind in general. But that it is not the person of the Holy Prophet, but mankind collectively to whom the address is made in this verse, is clear from the fact that the Holy Prophet has been addressed distinctly and separately in the latter part of the verse, and also in the verse that follows.
637
God has endowed man with natural powers and faculties by making right use of which he can achieve success in life and by making wrong use of them involves himself in trouble. Thus all good is here attributed to God and all evil to man.
مَّن يُطِعِ ٱلرَّسُولَ فَقَدْ أَطَاعَ ٱللَّهَ ۖ وَمَن تَوَلَّىٰ فَمَآ أَرْسَلْنَٰكَ عَلَيْهِمْ حَفِيظًا
Important Words:
حفیظ (keeper) is derived from حفظ. They say حفظ الشیء i.e. he kept the thing or preserved it or guarded it or protected it or took care of it; he prevented it from becoming lost. حافظ or حفیظ (the latter having more intensive meaning) means, keeper, preserver or guardian. When used about God, the attributive name besides giving the above meanings, also means, the Preserver of all things; One Who preserves the good and evil works of His creatures (Lane).
Commentary:
The words, Whoso obeys the Messenger obeys Allah indeed, further explain the meaning of the expression, Say, All is from Allah, occurring in 4:79 above. The verse purports to say that obedience to the Prophet is really obedience to God, and if Muslims get into trouble by obeying the Prophet, it is all subject to God’s own will and must not be attributed to the Prophet and such trouble can never result in evil; God’s dealings with the Prophet come under His special providence, and, therefore, he who finds fault with him really finds fault with God.
549
Important Words:
حفیظ (keeper) is derived from حفظ. They say حفظ الشیء i.e. he kept the thing or preserved it or guarded it or protected it or took care of it; he prevented it from becoming lost. حافظ or حفیظ (the latter having more intensive meaning) means, keeper, preserver or guardian. When used about God, the attributive name besides giving the above meanings, also means, the Preserver of all things; One Who preserves the good and evil works of His creatures (Lane).
Commentary:
The words, Whoso obeys the Messenger obeys Allah indeed, further explain the meaning of the expression, Say, All is from Allah, occurring in 4:79 above. The verse purports to say that obedience to the Prophet is really obedience to God, and if Muslims get into trouble by obeying the Prophet, it is all subject to God’s own will and must not be attributed to the Prophet and such trouble can never result in evil; God’s dealings with the Prophet come under His special providence, and, therefore, he who finds fault with him really finds fault with God.
وَيَقُولُونَ طَاعَةٌ فَإِذَا بَرَزُوا۟ مِنْ عِندِكَ بَيَّتَ طَآئِفَةٌ مِّنْهُمْ غَيْرَ ٱلَّذِى تَقُولُ ۖ وَٱللَّهُ يَكْتُبُ مَا يُبَيِّتُونَ ۖ فَأَعْرِضْ عَنْهُمْ وَتَوَكَّلْ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ ۚ وَكَفَىٰ بِٱللَّهِ وَكِيلًا
4:109.
یعنی ان کا حساب رکھتا جاتا ہے۔ وقت آنے پر اس کی سزا دے گا۔
4:109.
The reference is to secret plotting, whether by night or during the day. As generally secret plotting is done at night, the word Bayyata has been used here, the night time affording a sort of cover and secrecy.
4:109.
Important Words:
بیت (spends the night scheming) is derived from بات meaning, he passed or spent the night. بات زید نائما means, Zaid passed the night sleeping. بیت الامر means, he did or designed or schemed the thing at night. بیت رأیه means, he thought upon his opinion and concealed it, or he conceived it in his mind. بیت العدو means, he attacked the enemy, and took him by surprise by night (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The word "night" or "scheming by night" should not be taken too literally. The reference is to secret plotting, whether by night or during the daytime. As generally secret plotting is done at night, the word بیت has been used, the night time affording a sort of cover and secrecy.
a
4:109.
2
یعنی ان کا حساب رکھتا جاتا ہے۔ وقت آنے پر اس کی سزا دے گا۔
a
4:109.
550
Important Words:
بیت (spends the night scheming) is derived from بات meaning, he passed or spent the night. بات زید نائما means, Zaid passed the night sleeping. بیت الامر means, he did or designed or schemed the thing at night. بیت رأیه means, he thought upon his opinion and concealed it, or he conceived it in his mind. بیت العدو means, he attacked the enemy, and took him by surprise by night (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The word "night" or "scheming by night" should not be taken too literally. The reference is to secret plotting, whether by night or during the daytime. As generally secret plotting is done at night, the word بیت has been used, the night time affording a sort of cover and secrecy.
a
4:109.
638
The reference is to secret plotting, whether by night or during the day. As generally secret plotting is done at night, the word Bayyata has been used here, the night time affording a sort of cover and secrecy.
أَفَلَا يَتَدَبَّرُونَ ٱلْقُرْءَانَ ۚ وَلَوْ كَانَ مِنْ عِندِ غَيْرِ ٱللَّهِ لَوَجَدُوا۟ فِيهِ ٱخْتِلَٰفًا كَثِيرًا
47:25.
47:25.
"Discrepancy" may either refer to contradictions in the text of the Qur’an and the teachings contained therein; or to lack of agreement between the Quranic announcements in the form of prophecies and their result or fulfilment.
47:25.
Commentary:
The word اختلاف (disagreement) may have two meanings: (1) either it may refer to contradictions in the text of the Quranand the teachings contained therein; or (2) it may refer to the non-agreement between the Quranic announcements in the form of prophecies and their result or fulfilment. The Quran is free from اختلاف (disagreement) in both these respects. In spite of covering an extremely vast field of reform—spiritual, moral, social, economic, political, legal, etc.—its teachings are perfectly harmonious, no part clashing in letter or spirit with another, no section nourished at the cost of another.
Taken in the second sense, the verse means that all the different announcements and prophecies made by the Quran are proving, and will prove, to be true; and there can be no disagreement in this respect either. If the Quran had not been the Word of God, but the fabrication of man, most of the prophecies and promises made by it under extremely adverse conditions would have failed to materialize.
So the fact that the prophecies made in the Quran have been, and are being, fulfilled against all calculations and all expectations and in a most wonderful manner is a proof positive of the fact that it is the revealed Word of God.
The word, much, qualifying the word disagreement should not be construed to mean that some disagreement in the Quran is possible. The expression is simply intended to mean that, whereas otherwise there would have been much disagreement, the Quran being the Word of God, there is, in fact, none.
b
47:25.
b
47:25.
551
Commentary:
The word اختلاف (disagreement) may have two meanings: (1) either it may refer to contradictions in the text of the Quranand the teachings contained therein; or (2) it may refer to the non-agreement between the Quranic announcements in the form of prophecies and their result or fulfilment. The Quran is free from اختلاف (disagreement) in both these respects. In spite of covering an extremely vast field of reform—spiritual, moral, social, economic, political, legal, etc.—its teachings are perfectly harmonious, no part clashing in letter or spirit with another, no section nourished at the cost of another.
Taken in the second sense, the verse means that all the different announcements and prophecies made by the Quran are proving, and will prove, to be true; and there can be no disagreement in this respect either. If the Quran had not been the Word of God, but the fabrication of man, most of the prophecies and promises made by it under extremely adverse conditions would have failed to materialize.
So the fact that the prophecies made in the Quran have been, and are being, fulfilled against all calculations and all expectations and in a most wonderful manner is a proof positive of the fact that it is the revealed Word of God.
The word, much, qualifying the word disagreement should not be construed to mean that some disagreement in the Quran is possible. The expression is simply intended to mean that, whereas otherwise there would have been much disagreement, the Quran being the Word of God, there is, in fact, none.
b
47:25.
639
"Discrepancy" may either refer to contradictions in the text of the Qur’an and the teachings contained therein; or to lack of agreement between the Quranic announcements in the form of prophecies and their result or fulfilment.
وَإِذَا جَآءَهُمْ أَمْرٌ مِّنَ ٱلْأَمْنِ أَوِ ٱلْخَوْفِ أَذَاعُوا۟ بِهِۦ ۖ وَلَوْ رَدُّوهُ إِلَى ٱلرَّسُولِ وَإِلَىٰٓ أُو۟لِى ٱلْأَمْرِ مِنْهُمْ لَعَلِمَهُ ٱلَّذِينَ يَسْتَنۢبِطُونَهُۥ مِنْهُمْ ۗ وَلَوْلَا فَضْلُ ٱللَّهِ عَلَيْكُمْ وَرَحْمَتُهُۥ لَٱتَّبَعْتُمُ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنَ إِلَّا قَلِيلًا
4:60.
4:60.
The reason why tidings relating to peace have been mentioned before those relating to fear is that the Qur’an is here speaking of war, and during war it is sometimes more dangerous to give publicity to matters likely to lead to happy results than to matters of fear. Under normal conditions, too, the injunction mentioned is very important, exercising direct influence on the discipline and well-being of society. The words, those in authority, refer to the Holy Prophet or his Successors or to the Chiefs appointed by them.
4:60.
Commentary:
The reason why tidings or matters relating to peace have been mentioned before those relating to fear is that the Quranis here speaking of war, and during war it is sometimes more dangerous to give publicity to matters likely to lead to happy results than to matters of fear. For instance, if any information comes that the forces of the enemy are about to attack, the publication of this news among the people may not prove so dangerous as disclosure of, for example, the news that the Muslim army was going to attack the enemy at a certain weak point of the latter. The latter class of news would disclose the intentions of the Muslim army to the enemy and he would take immediate steps to strengthen his position at the threatened point. Under normal conditions too the injunction is very important, exercising direct influence on the discipline and well-being of society.
The words, those in authority, refer to the Holy Prophet or his Successors or the chiefs appointed by both.
c
4:60.
a
4:60.
552
Commentary:
The reason why tidings or matters relating to peace have been mentioned before those relating to fear is that the Quranis here speaking of war, and during war it is sometimes more dangerous to give publicity to matters likely to lead to happy results than to matters of fear. For instance, if any information comes that the forces of the enemy are about to attack, the publication of this news among the people may not prove so dangerous as disclosure of, for example, the news that the Muslim army was going to attack the enemy at a certain weak point of the latter. The latter class of news would disclose the intentions of the Muslim army to the enemy and he would take immediate steps to strengthen his position at the threatened point. Under normal conditions too the injunction is very important, exercising direct influence on the discipline and well-being of society.
The words, those in authority, refer to the Holy Prophet or his Successors or the chiefs appointed by both.
c
4:60.
640
The reason why tidings relating to peace have been mentioned before those relating to fear is that the Qur’an is here speaking of war, and during war it is sometimes more dangerous to give publicity to matters likely to lead to happy results than to matters of fear. Under normal conditions, too, the injunction mentioned is very important, exercising direct influence on the discipline and well-being of society. The words, those in authority, refer to the Holy Prophet or his Successors or to the Chiefs appointed by them.
فَقَٰتِلْ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ لَا تُكَلَّفُ إِلَّا نَفْسَكَ ۚ وَحَرِّضِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ ۖ عَسَى ٱللَّهُ أَن يَكُفَّ بَأْسَ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ ۚ وَٱللَّهُ أَشَدُّ بَأْسًا وَأَشَدُّ تَنكِيلًا
8:66.
8:66.
The command to fight does not relate to the Holy Prophet alone. If that had been the case, the second clause in the verse would have read as Illa Nafsuka, i.e. none is made responsible except thyself, and not as Illa Nafsaka, i.e. thou art not made responsible except for thyself, as in the verse. What the verse means is that every Muslim, not excluding the Holy Prophet, was individually answerable to God. But the duty of the Holy Prophet was twofold, (1) to fight himself, and (2) to urge his followers to fight, though he was not responsible for them.
8:66.
Commentary:
The words, Fight therefore in the cause of Allah, do not mean that the command to fight is related to the Holy Prophet alone. If that had been the case, the second clause in the verse would have read as لا تکلف الا نفسك (illa nafsuka), i.e. none is made responsible except thyself, and not as لاتکلف الانفسك (illa nafsaka), i.e. Thou art not made responsible except for thyself, as in the verse. What the verse means is that every Muslim, not excluding the Prophet, was individually answerable to God. But the duty of the Holy Prophet was twofold: (1) to fight, and (2) to urge his followers to fight. He was, however, not answerable for them. He was only to communicate to them the divine behests, and if they disobeyed, they themselves were answerable for it. The commandment making jihad obligatory on Muslims had already been revealed (4:78).
The clause, It may be that Allah will restrain the might of those that disbelieve, means that God will bring into existence such circumstances as will make war cease of itself, or that the enemy will fail to exert his power to the full and will finally collapse. Thus we see that at the Battle of the Ditch and at the Fall of Mecca providential circumstances helped the Muslims.
d
8:66.
a
8:66.
553
Commentary:
The words, Fight therefore in the cause of Allah, do not mean that the command to fight is related to the Holy Prophet alone. If that had been the case, the second clause in the verse would have read as لا تکلف الا نفسك (illa nafsuka), i.e. none is made responsible except thyself, and not as لاتکلف الانفسك (illa nafsaka), i.e. Thou art not made responsible except for thyself, as in the verse. What the verse means is that every Muslim, not excluding the Prophet, was individually answerable to God. But the duty of the Holy Prophet was twofold: (1) to fight, and (2) to urge his followers to fight. He was, however, not answerable for them. He was only to communicate to them the divine behests, and if they disobeyed, they themselves were answerable for it. The commandment making jihad obligatory on Muslims had already been revealed (4:78).
The clause, It may be that Allah will restrain the might of those that disbelieve, means that God will bring into existence such circumstances as will make war cease of itself, or that the enemy will fail to exert his power to the full and will finally collapse. Thus we see that at the Battle of the Ditch and at the Fall of Mecca providential circumstances helped the Muslims.
a
8:66.
641
The command to fight does not relate to the Holy Prophet alone. If that had been the case, the second clause in the verse would have read as Illa Nafsuka, i.e. none is made responsible except thyself, and not as Illa Nafsaka, i.e. thou art not made responsible except for thyself, as in the verse. What the verse means is that every Muslim, not excluding the Holy Prophet, was individually answerable to God. But the duty of the Holy Prophet was twofold, (1) to fight himself, and (2) to urge his followers to fight, though he was not responsible for them.
مَّن يَشْفَعْ شَفَٰعَةً حَسَنَةً يَكُن لَّهُۥ نَصِيبٌ مِّنْهَا ۖ وَمَن يَشْفَعْ شَفَٰعَةً سَيِّئَةً يَكُن لَّهُۥ كِفْلٌ مِّنْهَا ۗ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَىٰ كُلِّ شَىْءٍ مُّقِيتًا
这节经文意指说情的这一行动不能随随便便;因为那个代人说情的人应对自己的行动负责。如果他的说情是公正的, 他应得到适当的报酬; 否则, 他应为此而产生的不良后果负责。而且值得注意的是, 与 “公正说情” 有连系的字是 نَصِيْب (Nasib) (一份或规定的一份), 而与 “邪歹的说情” 有连系的字是 كِفْل (Kifl) (相同的一部分)。这就指明, 邪歹的说情所得的惩罚仅仅是与此相同的东西, 而公正的说情所得的善报却没有这样的限制, 而是像安拉规定的那么多, 即大十倍。
The verse signifies that the act of intercession or recommendation should not be treated lightly; for the person who intercedes on behalf of another is answerable for his act. If the intercession or recommendation is right and just, he will have a suitable reward; otherwise he will be held responsible for the evil consequences thereof. It is further noteworthy that in connection with "righteous intercession" the word used is Nasib (share or fixed share) whereas in connection with "evil intercession" the word is Kifl (like portion). This is to point out that whereas the punishment of an evil intercession will only be the like thereof, the good reward of a righteous intercession will have no such restriction but will be as large as God has fixed it, i.e. ten times greater.
Important Words:
For the significance of the words شفیع and شفاعة see under 2:49.
Commentary:
Read in the light of the context the words, Whoso makes a righteous intercession…may mean that a person who persuades others to fight in the cause of God shall have an ample reward, while he who dissuades them from fighting shall suffer punishment for doing so. The verse also signifies that people should not look upon the subject of intercession or recommendation lightly; for the person who intercedes on behalf of, or recommends, another is answerable for his act. If the intercession or recommendation is right and just, he will have a suitable reward; otherwise he will share and be responsible for the evil consequence thereof.
Taking the word شفاعة in the sense of connection, the verse may also be rendered as, "whoso forms a good connection shall have a share thereof and whoso forms a bad connection shall have a like portion thereof," thus emphasizing the importance of forming a good connection whether with God or with His Prophets or with other people. Whereas a good connection may be the cause of rise and progress, a bad one may result in downfall and ruin. For a full discussion of the subject of شفاعة (intercession) see detailed note under 2:49.
It is noteworthy that in connection with "righteous intercession", the word used is نصیب (share or fixed share) whereas in connection with "evil intercession" the word used is کفل (like portion). This is to point out that, whereas the punishment of an evil intercession will only be the like thereof, the good reward of a righteous intercession will have no such restriction but will be as large as God has fixed it, i.e. ten times greater.
338
这节经文意指说情的这一行动不能随随便便;因为那个代人说情的人应对自己的行动负责。如果他的说情是公正的, 他应得到适当的报酬; 否则, 他应为此而产生的不良后果负责。而且值得注意的是, 与 “公正说情” 有连系的字是 نَصِيْب (Nasib) (一份或规定的一份), 而与 “邪歹的说情” 有连系的字是 كِفْل (Kifl) (相同的一部分)。这就指明, 邪歹的说情所得的惩罚仅仅是与此相同的东西, 而公正的说情所得的善报却没有这样的限制, 而是像安拉规定的那么多, 即大十倍。
554
Important Words:
For the significance of the words شفیع and شفاعة see under 2:49.
Commentary:
Read in the light of the context the words, Whoso makes a righteous intercession…may mean that a person who persuades others to fight in the cause of God shall have an ample reward, while he who dissuades them from fighting shall suffer punishment for doing so. The verse also signifies that people should not look upon the subject of intercession or recommendation lightly; for the person who intercedes on behalf of, or recommends, another is answerable for his act. If the intercession or recommendation is right and just, he will have a suitable reward; otherwise he will share and be responsible for the evil consequence thereof.
Taking the word شفاعة in the sense of connection, the verse may also be rendered as, "whoso forms a good connection shall have a share thereof and whoso forms a bad connection shall have a like portion thereof," thus emphasizing the importance of forming a good connection whether with God or with His Prophets or with other people. Whereas a good connection may be the cause of rise and progress, a bad one may result in downfall and ruin. For a full discussion of the subject of شفاعة (intercession) see detailed note under 2:49.
It is noteworthy that in connection with "righteous intercession", the word used is نصیب (share or fixed share) whereas in connection with "evil intercession" the word used is کفل (like portion). This is to point out that, whereas the punishment of an evil intercession will only be the like thereof, the good reward of a righteous intercession will have no such restriction but will be as large as God has fixed it, i.e. ten times greater.
642
The verse signifies that the act of intercession or recommendation should not be treated lightly; for the person who intercedes on behalf of another is answerable for his act. If the intercession or recommendation is right and just, he will have a suitable reward; otherwise he will be held responsible for the evil consequences thereof. It is further noteworthy that in connection with "righteous intercession" the word used is Nasib (share or fixed share) whereas in connection with "evil intercession" the word is Kifl (like portion). This is to point out that whereas the punishment of an evil intercession will only be the like thereof, the good reward of a righteous intercession will have no such restriction but will be as large as God has fixed it, i.e. ten times greater.
وَإِذَا حُيِّيتُم بِتَحِيَّةٍ فَحَيُّوا۟ بِأَحْسَنَ مِنْهَآ أَوْ رُدُّوهَآ ۗ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ عَلَىٰ كُلِّ شَىْءٍ حَسِيبًا
The verse points to a social duty.
Important Words:
حییتم (when you are greeted) and تحیة (prayer) and حیوا are all derived from حیی i.e. he lived or he had life; or he was or became in good condition. حیاہ means, he greeted him with a prayer for long and good life; or he prayed for his life; or simply he prayed for him. حیاك الله means, may God prolong thy life or preserve thy life; or may He make thy life free from harm and evil; or may He honour thee and bestow favour on thee; or may He grant thee dominion and kingship. حیاہ بتحیة المؤمن means, he greeted him with the usual greetings of a believer, i.e. said السلام علیکم to him viz. peace be on you. تحیة means greeting or salutation or benediction; endless or everlasting life; freedom and security from all evils; also dominion and kingship (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse, besides being general in its significance, also draws the attention of Muslim to the great boons and blessings that have come to them through the Holy Prophet and tells them that they are now morally bound to return the good they have received, by helping him to the best of their power in the furtherance of the cause he holds so dear. This would be a token of gratitude for the numerous and manifold divine favours received by them through him. The Prophet’s message of life was a greeting on his part, so let the Faithful respond to it in a befitting manner.
The verse also enjoins on Muslims that they should greet and return each other’s greeting in a most becoming manner when they meet. This is a social and moral duty, the neglect of which will render one guilty of it accountable before God, as the concluding words of the verse point out.
The usual formula of greeting prescribed by Islam is السلام علیکم i.e. "peace be on you", to which are often added the words ورحمة الله وبرکاته "and God’s mercy and His blessings." Pious Muslims would often add to the formula some additional prayer in compliance with the injunction, greet ye with a better prayer or at least return it. But the verse is much more general in its significance and extends to all forms of greetings, wishes, prayers, etc.
The words, return it, signify that if one cannot respond with a better greeting, one should at least respond with a similar one.
555
Important Words:
حییتم (when you are greeted) and تحیة (prayer) and حیوا are all derived from حیی i.e. he lived or he had life; or he was or became in good condition. حیاہ means, he greeted him with a prayer for long and good life; or he prayed for his life; or simply he prayed for him. حیاك الله means, may God prolong thy life or preserve thy life; or may He make thy life free from harm and evil; or may He honour thee and bestow favour on thee; or may He grant thee dominion and kingship. حیاہ بتحیة المؤمن means, he greeted him with the usual greetings of a believer, i.e. said السلام علیکم to him viz. peace be on you. تحیة means greeting or salutation or benediction; endless or everlasting life; freedom and security from all evils; also dominion and kingship (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse, besides being general in its significance, also draws the attention of Muslim to the great boons and blessings that have come to them through the Holy Prophet and tells them that they are now morally bound to return the good they have received, by helping him to the best of their power in the furtherance of the cause he holds so dear. This would be a token of gratitude for the numerous and manifold divine favours received by them through him. The Prophet’s message of life was a greeting on his part, so let the Faithful respond to it in a befitting manner.
The verse also enjoins on Muslims that they should greet and return each other’s greeting in a most becoming manner when they meet. This is a social and moral duty, the neglect of which will render one guilty of it accountable before God, as the concluding words of the verse point out.
The usual formula of greeting prescribed by Islam is السلام علیکم i.e. "peace be on you", to which are often added the words ورحمة الله وبرکاته "and God’s mercy and His blessings." Pious Muslims would often add to the formula some additional prayer in compliance with the injunction, greet ye with a better prayer or at least return it. But the verse is much more general in its significance and extends to all forms of greetings, wishes, prayers, etc.
The words, return it, signify that if one cannot respond with a better greeting, one should at least respond with a similar one.
643
The verse points to a social duty.
ٱللَّهُ لَآ إِلَٰهَ إِلَّا هُوَ ۚ لَيَجْمَعَنَّكُمْ إِلَىٰ يَوْمِ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ لَا رَيْبَ فِيهِ ۗ وَمَنْ أَصْدَقُ مِنَ ٱللَّهِ حَدِيثًا
یعنی قیامت صُغریٰ (جو موت ہے) اس کے بعد ارواح کو محفوظ رکھے گا یہاں تک کہ قیامت کُبریٰ یعنی حشر کا دن آجائے۔
Commentary:
Taking the particle الی (till) in the sense of فی (in or on for which see Lane), the clause لیجمعنکم الی یوم القیامة may also be rendered as, "He will certainly assemble you on the Day of Resurrection" but the more correct rendering is that given in the text, i.e. He will certainly (continue to) assemble you till the Day of Resurrection. The difference in meaning is obvious. People are born and die and will go on doing so till the Last Day. Thus the process of assembling is always going on and will continue till the Day of Resurrection, when God will call all to account.
1
یعنی قیامت صُغریٰ (جو موت ہے) اس کے بعد ارواح کو محفوظ رکھے گا یہاں تک کہ قیامت کُبریٰ یعنی حشر کا دن آجائے۔
556
Commentary:
Taking the particle الی (till) in the sense of فی (in or on for which see Lane), the clause لیجمعنکم الی یوم القیامة may also be rendered as, "He will certainly assemble you on the Day of Resurrection" but the more correct rendering is that given in the text, i.e. He will certainly (continue to) assemble you till the Day of Resurrection. The difference in meaning is obvious. People are born and die and will go on doing so till the Last Day. Thus the process of assembling is always going on and will continue till the Day of Resurrection, when God will call all to account.
۞ فَمَا لَكُمْ فِى ٱلْمُنَٰفِقِينَ فِئَتَيْنِ وَٱللَّهُ أَرْكَسَهُم بِمَا كَسَبُوٓا۟ ۚ أَتُرِيدُونَ أَن تَهْدُوا۟ مَنْ أَضَلَّ ٱللَّهُ ۖ وَمَن يُضْلِلِ ٱللَّهُ فَلَن تَجِدَ لَهُۥ سَبِيلًا
یعنی ان کی عقل مار دی ہے۔
Believers disagreed among themselves as to how the Hypocrites living in the suburbs of Medina, i.e. the Bedouin tribes of the countryside, should be treated. Some sympathized with them and recommended leniency towards them, hoping that in this way they might gradually reform themselves, while others looked upon them as a serious menace to Islam and advocated strict measures. Muslims are here told that these Hypocrites are the enemies of God and that they should not allow themselves to be divided on their account.
Important Words:
ارکسھم (has overthrown them). See 4:92.
Commentary:
Believers disagreed among themselves as to how the hypocrites living in the suburbs of Medina, i.e. the Bedouin tribes of the countryside, were to be treated. Some sympathized with them and recommended leniency towards them, hoping that in this way they might gradually reform themselves, while others looked upon them as a serious menace to Islam and Muslims and advocated severity towards them. As this disagreement was likely to cause a split among Muslims and divide them into two parties, the Quran here expresses its disapproval of such a course. Muslims, it says, should beware of becoming divided among themselves due to the hypocrites. They should remember that a split in their own ranks was a much more serious affair than a danger from outside. The hypocrites were the enemies of God, and believers should not allow themselves to be divided on their account.
1
یعنی ان کی عقل مار دی ہے۔
557
Important Words:
ارکسھم (has overthrown them). See 4:92.
Commentary:
Believers disagreed among themselves as to how the hypocrites living in the suburbs of Medina, i.e. the Bedouin tribes of the countryside, were to be treated. Some sympathized with them and recommended leniency towards them, hoping that in this way they might gradually reform themselves, while others looked upon them as a serious menace to Islam and Muslims and advocated severity towards them. As this disagreement was likely to cause a split among Muslims and divide them into two parties, the Quran here expresses its disapproval of such a course. Muslims, it says, should beware of becoming divided among themselves due to the hypocrites. They should remember that a split in their own ranks was a much more serious affair than a danger from outside. The hypocrites were the enemies of God, and believers should not allow themselves to be divided on their account.
644
Believers disagreed among themselves as to how the Hypocrites living in the suburbs of Medina, i.e. the Bedouin tribes of the countryside, should be treated. Some sympathized with them and recommended leniency towards them, hoping that in this way they might gradually reform themselves, while others looked upon them as a serious menace to Islam and advocated strict measures. Muslims are here told that these Hypocrites are the enemies of God and that they should not allow themselves to be divided on their account.
وَدُّوا۟ لَوْ تَكْفُرُونَ كَمَا كَفَرُوا۟ فَتَكُونُونَ سَوَآءً ۖ فَلَا تَتَّخِذُوا۟ مِنْهُمْ أَوْلِيَآءَ حَتَّىٰ يُهَاجِرُوا۟ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ ۚ فَإِن تَوَلَّوْا۟ فَخُذُوهُمْ وَٱقْتُلُوهُمْ حَيْثُ وَجَدتُّمُوهُمْ ۖ وَلَا تَتَّخِذُوا۟ مِنْهُمْ وَلِيًّا وَلَا نَصِيرًا
یہ ان منافقوں کا ذکر ہے جو کفار کے ملک میں رہتے تھے اور جب مسلمانوں کو بڑھتا دیکھتے تھے کفار کی مدد کرنے لگتے تھے تا مسلمانوں کو یہ کہہ کر دھوکا دیں کہ وہ مسلمان ہیں اور کافروں کو اپنی مدد سے دھوکا دیں۔
’’پھر جائیں‘‘ سے یہ مراد ہے کہ رسول کی اطاعت کے متعلق ہمارے حکم کو نہ مانیں۔
2:110; 4:45; 14:14.
The reference is to the Bedouin tribes of the desert. The Qur’an forbids Muslims to have anything to do with them, or make friends with them or seek their help.
As Qatl is also used in the sense of severing all social contacts (2:62), the expression Uqtuluhum may also mean, "have nothing to do with them." This meaning of the expression finds support from the words, take no friend nor helper from among them.
2:110; 4:45; 14:14.
Commentary:
The word کفر (disbelief) as used in this verse stands for hypocrisy, as a hypocrite is none but a disbeliever at heart. The hypocrites belonging to the Bedouin tribes of the desert, referred to in the preceding verse, claimed to be believers but rendered no help to Islam. Believers are enjoined to have nothing to do with them.
The words, until they migrate in the way of Allah, show that the hypocrites referred to in this verse did not belong to the town of Medina but to outside territory. They attached no value to faith and through cowardice wished that all should become like themselves, making friends with the enemies of Islam and mixing with them as they liked. The Quran forbids Muslims to take such people as friends, or to seek help from them, unless they migrate in the way of God and sever all connection with the enemy.
As the word قتل is also used in the sense of boycotting (see 2:62), the words اقتلوھم (kill them) may also mean boycott them, i.e. have nothing to do with them; treat them in the same manner in which you treat those with whom they have made common cause. This meaning finds support in the fact that the expression اقتلوھم (kill them) is followed by the words, take no friend nor helper from among them.
a
2:110; 4:45; 14:14.
339
由于قَتْل (Qatl) 也有 “与…断绝一切社会接触” 的意思 (2:62), اُقْتُلُوْهُمْ (Uqtuluhum) 这一用语也可以作 “与他们没有关系” 解。这一意义在 “不要把他们当作朋友和帮助者” 这句话中得到证实。
2
یہ ان منافقوں کا ذکر ہے جو کفار کے ملک میں رہتے تھے اور جب مسلمانوں کو بڑھتا دیکھتے تھے کفار کی مدد کرنے لگتے تھے تا مسلمانوں کو یہ کہہ کر دھوکا دیں کہ وہ مسلمان ہیں اور کافروں کو اپنی مدد سے دھوکا دیں۔
3
’’پھر جائیں‘‘ سے یہ مراد ہے کہ رسول کی اطاعت کے متعلق ہمارے حکم کو نہ مانیں۔
a
2:110; 4:45; 14:14.
558
Commentary:
The word کفر (disbelief) as used in this verse stands for hypocrisy, as a hypocrite is none but a disbeliever at heart. The hypocrites belonging to the Bedouin tribes of the desert, referred to in the preceding verse, claimed to be believers but rendered no help to Islam. Believers are enjoined to have nothing to do with them.
The words, until they migrate in the way of Allah, show that the hypocrites referred to in this verse did not belong to the town of Medina but to outside territory. They attached no value to faith and through cowardice wished that all should become like themselves, making friends with the enemies of Islam and mixing with them as they liked. The Quran forbids Muslims to take such people as friends, or to seek help from them, unless they migrate in the way of God and sever all connection with the enemy.
As the word قتل is also used in the sense of boycotting (see 2:62), the words اقتلوھم (kill them) may also mean boycott them, i.e. have nothing to do with them; treat them in the same manner in which you treat those with whom they have made common cause. This meaning finds support in the fact that the expression اقتلوھم (kill them) is followed by the words, take no friend nor helper from among them.
a
2:110; 4:45; 14:14.
645
The reference is to the Bedouin tribes of the desert. The Qur’an forbids Muslims to have anything to do with them, or make friends with them or seek their help.
646
As Qatl is also used in the sense of severing all social contacts (2:62), the expression Uqtuluhum may also mean, "have nothing to do with them." This meaning of the expression finds support from the words, take no friend nor helper from among them.
إِلَّا ٱلَّذِينَ يَصِلُونَ إِلَىٰ قَوْمٍۭ بَيْنَكُمْ وَبَيْنَهُم مِّيثَٰقٌ أَوْ جَآءُوكُمْ حَصِرَتْ صُدُورُهُمْ أَن يُقَٰتِلُوكُمْ أَوْ يُقَٰتِلُوا۟ قَوْمَهُمْ ۚ وَلَوْ شَآءَ ٱللَّهُ لَسَلَّطَهُمْ عَلَيْكُمْ فَلَقَٰتَلُوكُمْ ۚ فَإِنِ ٱعْتَزَلُوكُمْ فَلَمْ يُقَٰتِلُوكُمْ وَأَلْقَوْا۟ إِلَيْكُمُ ٱلسَّلَمَ فَمَا جَعَلَ ٱللَّهُ لَكُمْ عَلَيْهِمْ سَبِيلًا
یعنی ایک طرف تو وہ معاہدین میں سے ہوں دوسری طرف وہ تم سے بھی جنگ نہ کریں اور بوجہ معاہدین میں سے ہونے کے اپنی قوم سے بھی جنگ نہ کریں۔
Important Words:
یصلون (are connected) is derived from وصل. They say وصل الشیء بالشیء i.e. he joined or connected this thing with that; he brought the two things together. وصله means, he had close and friendly relations with him. وصل الیه means, he or it arrived at, or came to, or reached him or it. اتصل الی بنی فلان means, he belonged to, or was connected with, that tribe (Aqrab).
سلطھم علیکم (given them power against you). سلط (sallata) is derived from سلط (salata) for which see the succeeding verse. سلط علیه (sallata) means, he made him to overcome him or to prevail over him or to have power or force over him, etc. They also say سلط علیه الکلاب i.e. he set the dogs upon him (Lane).
Commentary:
The preceding verses enjoined the taking of disciplinary action against the Bedouin hypocrites of the countryside around Medina. This verse makes exceptions in the case of: (1) those who went over to, or were connected with, some tribe having an alliance with the Muslims; and (2) those who came over to Medina and had leanings towards Islam, though their attitude was still one of hesitancy and vacillation. In fact, Islam attaches great importance to pacts, express or implied, and would in no case tolerate their breach. Incidentally, the verse also shows that جھاد (jihad) is permitted only against those who first make war upon the Muslims or their allies or from whom an attack is apprehended.
4
یعنی ایک طرف تو وہ معاہدین میں سے ہوں دوسری طرف وہ تم سے بھی جنگ نہ کریں اور بوجہ معاہدین میں سے ہونے کے اپنی قوم سے بھی جنگ نہ کریں۔
559
Important Words:
یصلون (are connected) is derived from وصل. They say وصل الشیء بالشیء i.e. he joined or connected this thing with that; he brought the two things together. وصله means, he had close and friendly relations with him. وصل الیه means, he or it arrived at, or came to, or reached him or it. اتصل الی بنی فلان means, he belonged to, or was connected with, that tribe (Aqrab).
سلطھم علیکم (given them power against you). سلط (sallata) is derived from سلط (salata) for which see the succeeding verse. سلط علیه (sallata) means, he made him to overcome him or to prevail over him or to have power or force over him, etc. They also say سلط علیه الکلاب i.e. he set the dogs upon him (Lane).
Commentary:
The preceding verses enjoined the taking of disciplinary action against the Bedouin hypocrites of the countryside around Medina. This verse makes exceptions in the case of: (1) those who went over to, or were connected with, some tribe having an alliance with the Muslims; and (2) those who came over to Medina and had leanings towards Islam, though their attitude was still one of hesitancy and vacillation. In fact, Islam attaches great importance to pacts, express or implied, and would in no case tolerate their breach. Incidentally, the verse also shows that جھاد (jihad) is permitted only against those who first make war upon the Muslims or their allies or from whom an attack is apprehended.
سَتَجِدُونَ ءَاخَرِينَ يُرِيدُونَ أَن يَأْمَنُوكُمْ وَيَأْمَنُوا۟ قَوْمَهُمْ كُلَّ مَا رُدُّوٓا۟ إِلَى ٱلْفِتْنَةِ أُرْكِسُوا۟ فِيهَا ۚ فَإِن لَّمْ يَعْتَزِلُوكُمْ وَيُلْقُوٓا۟ إِلَيْكُمُ ٱلسَّلَمَ وَيَكُفُّوٓا۟ أَيْدِيَهُمْ فَخُذُوهُمْ وَٱقْتُلُوهُمْ حَيْثُ ثَقِفْتُمُوهُمْ ۚ وَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكُمْ جَعَلْنَا لَكُمْ عَلَيْهِمْ سُلْطَٰنًا مُّبِينًا
33:15.
اوپر کی آیت میں معاہدین کا ذکر تھا۔ اس آیت میں منافقوں کا ذکر ہے۔ پس سلوک کا فرق حالات کی وجہ سے ہے۔
33:15.
9:5.
The reference seems to be to the two tribes, Asad and Ghatfan who had no treaty of alliance with the Muslims. They played a double game and awaited their opportunity. When invited by their people to join them in fighting against the Muslims, they readily accepted the invitation. The directions contained in these verses come into operation when a virtual state of war exists and danger stalks along the land.
By Fitnah is here meant, war with the Muslims.
33:15.
9:5.
Important Words:
ارکسوا (fall headlong) is in the passive voice and the right translation of it would be, "are made to fall headlong", or "are overthrown" etc. but for the sake of clearness the word has been translated here in the active voice. ارکسوا is formed from رکس. They say رکس الشیء i.e. he turned the thing over or upside down. ارکس الشیء means, he turned the thing to its former state; he turned or threw it over upon its head; he reversed it or turned it back; he made the first part of it to be the last. أرکس الله عدوك means, may God turn thine enemy upon his head; or may He overthrow him or change or reverse his condition (Lane & Aqrab).
الفتنة (hostility) generally meaning, (1) persecution, (2) mischief, (3) discord and dissension, (4) civil war, etc., also means war, i.e. hostility (Lane). See also 2:192.
سلطان (authority) is the noun-infinitive from سلط which means, he or it overcame, prevailed or predominated; he became firm or established in superior power; he possessed power or dominion or sovereignty; he was or became sharp; it was or became hard or strong; he was or became chaste or perspicuous in speech, or eloquent and sharp in tongue. They say قد جعلت لك سلطانا علی اخذ حقی من فلان i.e. I have given you the power or authority to take my dues from such a one. سلطان means, strength, might, force or power; predominance; power or authority; the sovereign or ruling power; king or ruler; sharpness; hardness; proof or argument; evidence; plea (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The reference in this verse is to those people who had no alliance with Muslims or any tribe having an alliance with them. They were time-servers who awaited their opportunity. The difference between these people and those mentioned in the previous verse is that the latter had some sort of alliance with this or that party though they did not
possess the strength to assert themselves, while the former only sought security by deceitful means and hastened to make common cause with the enemies of Islam whenever invited to do so. Fighting was enjoined against this class of people, unless they entered into a treaty of peace with Muslims and loyally observed its terms.
a
33:15.
1
اوپر کی آیت میں معاہدین کا ذکر تھا۔ اس آیت میں منافقوں کا ذکر ہے۔ پس سلوک کا فرق حالات کی وجہ سے ہے۔
a
33:15.
b
9:5.
560
Important Words:
ارکسوا (fall headlong) is in the passive voice and the right translation of it would be, "are made to fall headlong", or "are overthrown" etc. but for the sake of clearness the word has been translated here in the active voice. ارکسوا is formed from رکس. They say رکس الشیء i.e. he turned the thing over or upside down. ارکس الشیء means, he turned the thing to its former state; he turned or threw it over upon its head; he reversed it or turned it back; he made the first part of it to be the last. أرکس الله عدوك means, may God turn thine enemy upon his head; or may He overthrow him or change or reverse his condition (Lane & Aqrab).
الفتنة (hostility) generally meaning, (1) persecution, (2) mischief, (3) discord and dissension, (4) civil war, etc., also means war, i.e. hostility (Lane). See also 2:192.
سلطان (authority) is the noun-infinitive from سلط which means, he or it overcame, prevailed or predominated; he became firm or established in superior power; he possessed power or dominion or sovereignty; he was or became sharp; it was or became hard or strong; he was or became chaste or perspicuous in speech, or eloquent and sharp in tongue. They say قد جعلت لك سلطانا علی اخذ حقی من فلان i.e. I have given you the power or authority to take my dues from such a one. سلطان means, strength, might, force or power; predominance; power or authority; the sovereign or ruling power; king or ruler; sharpness; hardness; proof or argument; evidence; plea (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The reference in this verse is to those people who had no alliance with Muslims or any tribe having an alliance with them. They were time-servers who awaited their opportunity. The difference between these people and those mentioned in the previous verse is that the latter had some sort of alliance with this or that party though they did not
possess the strength to assert themselves, while the former only sought security by deceitful means and hastened to make common cause with the enemies of Islam whenever invited to do so. Fighting was enjoined against this class of people, unless they entered into a treaty of peace with Muslims and loyally observed its terms.
a
33:15.
b
9:5.
647
The reference seems to be to the two tribes, Asad and Ghatfan who had no treaty of alliance with the Muslims. They played a double game and awaited their opportunity. When invited by their people to join them in fighting against the Muslims, they readily accepted the invitation. The directions contained in these verses come into operation when a virtual state of war exists and danger stalks along the land.
648
By Fitnah is here meant, war with the Muslims.
وَمَا كَانَ لِمُؤْمِنٍ أَن يَقْتُلَ مُؤْمِنًا إِلَّا خَطَـًٔا ۚ وَمَن قَتَلَ مُؤْمِنًا خَطَـًٔا فَتَحْرِيرُ رَقَبَةٍ مُّؤْمِنَةٍ وَدِيَةٌ مُّسَلَّمَةٌ إِلَىٰٓ أَهْلِهِۦٓ إِلَّآ أَن يَصَّدَّقُوا۟ ۚ فَإِن كَانَ مِن قَوْمٍ عَدُوٍّ لَّكُمْ وَهُوَ مُؤْمِنٌ فَتَحْرِيرُ رَقَبَةٍ مُّؤْمِنَةٍ ۖ وَإِن كَانَ مِن قَوْمٍۭ بَيْنَكُمْ وَبَيْنَهُم مِّيثَٰقٌ فَدِيَةٌ مُّسَلَّمَةٌ إِلَىٰٓ أَهْلِهِۦ وَتَحْرِيرُ رَقَبَةٍ مُّؤْمِنَةٍ ۖ فَمَن لَّمْ يَجِدْ فَصِيَامُ شَهْرَيْنِ مُتَتَابِعَيْنِ تَوْبَةً مِّنَ ٱللَّهِ ۗ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ عَلِيمًا حَكِيمًا
58:5.
As when actual or virtual state of war exists there is the likelihood that a Muslim may be killed by another Muslim by mistake, the present verse gives a timely warning to Muslims to be always on their guard against such an eventuality.
In case the slain person is a believer but happens to belong to a hostile people, then the offender shall only free a believing slave and no blood-money shall be levied on him, because money paid to a hostile people would go to strengthen their military power against Islam. In the expression, and if he be of a people between whom and you is a pact, the words, and he be a believer, have not been repeated, in order to point out that the law with regard to the Dhimmis (disbelievers under the protection of Muslims), or Mu‘ahids (disbelievers belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims) is the same as for the Muslims.
It is worthy of note that disbelievers who are in alliance with Muslims have not only been placed on a par with the latter, but even a distinction has been made in their favour. In case a Muslim is slain, the command relating to the payment of penalty has been placed after the injunction to free a slave; while in case one belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims is slain, the order has been reversed; the injunction to pay the penalty to his heirs having been put before the injunction to free a slave. This has been done to impress upon Muslims the need of showing special regard for treaties and pacts. The payment of penalty was an obligation which Muslims owed to disbelievers with whom they had made a pact, and it is in order to bring home to them the lesson that they should have particular regard for their pacts and treaties, that the injunction to pay the penalty has in their case been placed before the injunction to free a slave.
58:5.
Commentary:
As the preceding verses contained injunctions which if misconstrued or misapplied, were likely to lead to a Muslim being killed by a Muslim, the present verse gives a timely warning against such an eventuality.
The words, It does not become a believer to kill a believer, have been used to make a touching appeal to believers to abstain from killing each other, since they are like brothers. It, in no case, behoves a brother to kill a brother. The words thus contain an important injunction which forms a fitting sequence to the one contained in the preceding verses concerning the hypocrites. The verse cautions a Muslim to be always on his guard lest in carelessness he should happen to kill a brother Muslim.
In case the slain person is a believer but happens to belong to a hostile people, then the offender shall only free a believing slave and no blood money shall be levied on him, because money paid to a hostile people would go to strengthen their military power against Islam which can in no case be allowed.
In the expression, and if he be of a people between whom and you is a pact, the words, and he be a believer, have not been repeated, in order to point out that the law with regard to the dhimmis (disbelievers under the protection of Muslims), or Mu‘ahids (disbelievers belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims) is the same as for Muslims.
It is worthy of note here that disbelievers who are in alliance with Muslims have not only been placed on a par with the latter, but even a distinction has been made in favour of the former. In case a Muslim is slain, the command relating to the payment of fine has been placed after the injunction to free a slave; while in case one belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims is slain, the order has been reversed, the injunction to pay the fine to his heirs being put before the injunction to free a slave. This has been done to impress upon Muslims the need of showing special regard for treaties and pacts. The payment of fine was an obligation which Muslims owed to disbelievers with whom they had made a pact, and in order to bring home to Muslims the lesson that they should have particular regard for their pacts and treaties, the injunction to pay the fine has in their case been placed before the injunction to free a slave.
a
9:5.
b
58:5.
a
58:5.
561
Commentary:
As the preceding verses contained injunctions which if misconstrued or misapplied, were likely to lead to a Muslim being killed by a Muslim, the present verse gives a timely warning against such an eventuality.
The words, It does not become a believer to kill a believer, have been used to make a touching appeal to believers to abstain from killing each other, since they are like brothers. It, in no case, behoves a brother to kill a brother. The words thus contain an important injunction which forms a fitting sequence to the one contained in the preceding verses concerning the hypocrites. The verse cautions a Muslim to be always on his guard lest in carelessness he should happen to kill a brother Muslim.
In case the slain person is a believer but happens to belong to a hostile people, then the offender shall only free a believing slave and no blood money shall be levied on him, because money paid to a hostile people would go to strengthen their military power against Islam which can in no case be allowed.
In the expression, and if he be of a people between whom and you is a pact, the words, and he be a believer, have not been repeated, in order to point out that the law with regard to the dhimmis (disbelievers under the protection of Muslims), or Mu‘ahids (disbelievers belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims) is the same as for Muslims.
It is worthy of note here that disbelievers who are in alliance with Muslims have not only been placed on a par with the latter, but even a distinction has been made in favour of the former. In case a Muslim is slain, the command relating to the payment of fine has been placed after the injunction to free a slave; while in case one belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims is slain, the order has been reversed, the injunction to pay the fine to his heirs being put before the injunction to free a slave. This has been done to impress upon Muslims the need of showing special regard for treaties and pacts. The payment of fine was an obligation which Muslims owed to disbelievers with whom they had made a pact, and in order to bring home to Muslims the lesson that they should have particular regard for their pacts and treaties, the injunction to pay the fine has in their case been placed before the injunction to free a slave.
a
58:5.
649
As when actual or virtual state of war exists there is the likelihood that a Muslim may be killed by another Muslim by mistake, the present verse gives a timely warning to Muslims to be always on their guard against such an eventuality.
650
In case the slain person is a believer but happens to belong to a hostile people, then the offender shall only free a believing slave and no blood-money shall be levied on him, because money paid to a hostile people would go to strengthen their military power against Islam. In the expression, and if he be of a people between whom and you is a pact, the words, and he be a believer, have not been repeated, in order to point out that the law with regard to the Dhimmis (disbelievers under the protection of Muslims), or Mu‘ahids (disbelievers belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims) is the same as for the Muslims.
651
It is worthy of note that disbelievers who are in alliance with Muslims have not only been placed on a par with the latter, but even a distinction has been made in their favour. In case a Muslim is slain, the command relating to the payment of penalty has been placed after the injunction to free a slave; while in case one belonging to a people in alliance with Muslims is slain, the order has been reversed; the injunction to pay the penalty to his heirs having been put before the injunction to free a slave. This has been done to impress upon Muslims the need of showing special regard for treaties and pacts. The payment of penalty was an obligation which Muslims owed to disbelievers with whom they had made a pact, and it is in order to bring home to them the lesson that they should have particular regard for their pacts and treaties, that the injunction to pay the penalty has in their case been placed before the injunction to free a slave.
وَمَن يَقْتُلْ مُؤْمِنًا مُّتَعَمِّدًا فَجَزَآؤُهُۥ جَهَنَّمُ خَٰلِدًا فِيهَا وَغَضِبَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَيْهِ وَلَعَنَهُۥ وَأَعَدَّ لَهُۥ عَذَابًا عَظِيمًا
25:69, 70.
25:69, 70.
25:69-70.
Commentary:
The solidarity of Islam and the tie of brotherhood among believers have been made absolutely inviolable. One who knowingly kills a fellow Muslim is like one who kills a son of his own father under the very eyes of the latter. The father would have nothing to do with such a man.
c
25:69, 70.
a
25:69-70.
562
Commentary:
The solidarity of Islam and the tie of brotherhood among believers have been made absolutely inviolable. One who knowingly kills a fellow Muslim is like one who kills a son of his own father under the very eyes of the latter. The father would have nothing to do with such a man.
b
25:69, 70.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوٓا۟ إِذَا ضَرَبْتُمْ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ فَتَبَيَّنُوا۟ وَلَا تَقُولُوا۟ لِمَنْ أَلْقَىٰٓ إِلَيْكُمُ ٱلسَّلَٰمَ لَسْتَ مُؤْمِنًا تَبْتَغُونَ عَرَضَ ٱلْحَيَوٰةِ ٱلدُّنْيَا فَعِندَ ٱللَّهِ مَغَانِمُ كَثِيرَةٌ ۚ كَذَٰلِكَ كُنتُم مِّن قَبْلُ فَمَنَّ ٱللَّهُ عَلَيْكُمْ فَتَبَيَّنُوٓا۟ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ خَبِيرًا
یعنی اگر سلام کرنے پر بدظنی کرو اور اسے دھوکے باز قرار دو تو اس کے یہ معنے ہوں گے کہ آخرت پر تم دنیا کو ترجیح دیتے ہو اور چاہتے ہو کہ اسے کافر مُقَاتِل قرار دے کر اس کے اموال پر قبضہ کرلو۔
49:7.
When a people offers peace or shows a peaceful attitude towards Muslims, the latter are enjoined to respect that attitude and refrain from hostilities. Moreover, as the Muslim Community at Medina was surrounded by hostile tribes, they were enjoined to presume a person who greeted them with Islamic salutation, to be a Muslim unless proved otherwise by investigation.
That is to say, if you hold such a person to be a disbeliever without proper investigation, this would mean that you desire to kill him and take possession of his goods. Such conduct would show that you prefer worldly goods to God’s pleasure.
49:7.
Important Words:
السلام (peace) means the Islamic salutation of salam; peace; security; submission, etc. (Aqrab & Lane). See also 2:113, 209; 3:20.
مغانم (good things) is derived from غنم meaning, he got or took spoil, or got a thing as spoil; he acquired or gained a thing without difficulty or inconvenience. غنیمة or مغنم means, spoil, booty or plunder; the acquisition of a thing without difficulty or inconvenience; the thing so acquired; what is obtained from disbelievers in war (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse does not mean that if any person greets a Muslim with the Islamic formula of salutation, he should be regarded as a believer. Many non-Muslims nowadays, and many Jews in the days of the Holy Prophet, greeted Muslims with the prescribed salutation but they cannot be, and indeed never were, regarded as Muslims merely on that ground. What the verse means is that when a people offers peace or shows a peaceful attitude towards Muslims, the latter should respect that attitude and refrain from hostility. The word سلام (peace) may also mean submission or security. Similarly, the word مومن (believer) may also be rendered as giver of security or offerer or afforder of peace.
The word مغانم (good things) does not mean only the spoils of war. It also means the good things of the world. In Bukhari(ch. on Tafsir) we have لحق ناس من المسلمین رجلا معه غنیمة له i.e. "some of the Muslims met a man who had with him some good things belonging to him." As explained under Important Words, any thing acquired without difficulty is also غنیمه.
The words کذالك کنتم (such were you) embody a very strong appeal to both sentiment and reason. The expression signifies that, like disbelievers, Muslims too were disbelievers at first, but God gave them time and opportunity and they were at last able to see the truth. So they should be patient with, and lenient to, others and give them time, so that they too may ponder over the truth and accept it if they choose.
d
49:7.
340
一个民族提出和平或向穆斯林表示友善态度时, 后者应该尊重那种态度, 克制敌对行动。而且, 由于麦地那的穆斯林社团在敌对部族的包围之中, 他们受到嘱咐: 凡是以伊斯兰教行礼的方式向他们招呼的人可以推定他是穆斯林, 不经过调查的证明, 不可决定他不是穆斯林。
1
یعنی اگر سلام کرنے پر بدظنی کرو اور اسے دھوکے باز قرار دو تو اس کے یہ معنے ہوں گے کہ آخرت پر تم دنیا کو ترجیح دیتے ہو اور چاہتے ہو کہ اسے کافر مُقَاتِل قرار دے کر اس کے اموال پر قبضہ کرلو۔
b
49:7.
563
Important Words:
السلام (peace) means the Islamic salutation of salam; peace; security; submission, etc. (Aqrab & Lane). See also 2:113, 209; 3:20.
مغانم (good things) is derived from غنم meaning, he got or took spoil, or got a thing as spoil; he acquired or gained a thing without difficulty or inconvenience. غنیمة or مغنم means, spoil, booty or plunder; the acquisition of a thing without difficulty or inconvenience; the thing so acquired; what is obtained from disbelievers in war (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse does not mean that if any person greets a Muslim with the Islamic formula of salutation, he should be regarded as a believer. Many non-Muslims nowadays, and many Jews in the days of the Holy Prophet, greeted Muslims with the prescribed salutation but they cannot be, and indeed never were, regarded as Muslims merely on that ground. What the verse means is that when a people offers peace or shows a peaceful attitude towards Muslims, the latter should respect that attitude and refrain from hostility. The word سلام (peace) may also mean submission or security. Similarly, the word مومن (believer) may also be rendered as giver of security or offerer or afforder of peace.
The word مغانم (good things) does not mean only the spoils of war. It also means the good things of the world. In Bukhari(ch. on Tafsir) we have لحق ناس من المسلمین رجلا معه غنیمة له i.e. "some of the Muslims met a man who had with him some good things belonging to him." As explained under Important Words, any thing acquired without difficulty is also غنیمه.
The words کذالك کنتم (such were you) embody a very strong appeal to both sentiment and reason. The expression signifies that, like disbelievers, Muslims too were disbelievers at first, but God gave them time and opportunity and they were at last able to see the truth. So they should be patient with, and lenient to, others and give them time, so that they too may ponder over the truth and accept it if they choose.
a
49:7.
652
When a people offers peace or shows a peaceful attitude towards Muslims, the latter are enjoined to respect that attitude and refrain from hostilities. Moreover, as the Muslim Community at Medina was surrounded by hostile tribes, they were enjoined to presume a person who greeted them with Islamic salutation, to be a Muslim unless proved otherwise by investigation.
653
That is to say, if you hold such a person to be a disbeliever without proper investigation, this would mean that you desire to kill him and take possession of his goods. Such conduct would show that you prefer worldly goods to God’s pleasure.
لَّا يَسْتَوِى ٱلْقَٰعِدُونَ مِنَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ غَيْرُ أُو۟لِى ٱلضَّرَرِ وَٱلْمُجَٰهِدُونَ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ بِأَمْوَٰلِهِمْ وَأَنفُسِهِمْ ۚ فَضَّلَ ٱللَّهُ ٱلْمُجَٰهِدِينَ بِأَمْوَٰلِهِمْ وَأَنفُسِهِمْ عَلَى ٱلْقَٰعِدِينَ دَرَجَةً ۚ وَكُلًّا وَعَدَ ٱللَّهُ ٱلْحُسْنَىٰ ۚ وَفَضَّلَ ٱللَّهُ ٱلْمُجَٰهِدِينَ عَلَى ٱلْقَٰعِدِينَ أَجْرًا عَظِيمًا
9:19, 20; 57:11.
这节经文谈及两种信者: (1) 这些信者虔诚地接受伊斯兰教, 力求做到它的教义的要求, 但不参加保卫和宣扬伊斯兰教的斗争。这些人可以说是消极的信者--------经文中叫他们为 “安坐者”。(2) 这些信者不但做到伊斯兰教义的要求, 并且踊跃参与宣扬它的工作。这些人是积极的信者--------经文中把他们称为 “奋斗者” 即 مُجَاهِدِيْن (Mujahidin)。但是, 还有第三种信者, 他们虽然没有和他们的弟兄们一起参加对不信者的实际战斗, 但取得和那些参加实际斗争的人相等的酬报。他们和那些为了安拉的事业而战斗的 “奋斗者”--------穆斯林是全心全意的战友; 但是他们的特殊环境--------疾病、贫困等等--------不容许他们亲自出征。
9:19, 20; 57:11.
The verse speaks of two classes of believers: (1) Those who sincerely accept Islam and then try to live up to its teachings but take no part in the struggle to defend and propagate the Faith. These are, as it were, passive believers—"sitters" as the verse calls them. (2) Those who not only live up to the teachings of Islam but also vigorously participate in the work of its propagation. These are active believers—the "strivers" or Mujahids as they are called. There is, however, a third class of believers who, even though they do not join their brethren in actually fighting disbelievers get an equal reward with those who take part in the actual struggle. They are heart and soul with the Muslims who are Mujahids, wherever the latter go to fight in the cause of God; but their particular circumstances––disease, poverty, etc., do not allow them to join the expeditions in person.
9:19-20; 57:11.
Commentary:
The verse speaks of the different classes of believers only and not of hypocrites. Believers are of two classes: (1) Those who sincerely accept the truth and try to live up to the teachings of Islam but take no part in the struggle to defend and propagate the faith. These are, as it were, passive believers—"sitters" as the verse names them. (2) Those who not only live up to the teachings of Islam but also vigorously participate in the work of its propagation. These are active believers, the "strivers" or mujahids as they are called. The latter are far superior to the former in the sight of God. There is, however, a class of believers who, even though they do not join their brethren in actually fighting disbelievers, get an equal reward with those who take part in the actual struggle. These are referred to in the words "excepting the disabled ones". Their inability to take part in actual fighting is due to circumstances over which they have no control. They are heart and soul with the Muslims who are mujahid, wherever the latter go to fight in the cause of God; but their particular circumstances—disease, poverty, etc.—do not allow them to join the expeditions in person. Of these the Holy Prophet once told his Companions in one of his expeditions that there were men in Medina who were with them in every march they made and in every valley they traversed and who were getting the same reward. The Companions asked the Holy Prophet in surprise how that could be possible and who were those fortunate ones. "They are those of your brethren", replied the Holy Prophet, "who were eager to join us but were prevented from doing so by circumstances beyond their control." These are the ones in whose case the verse makes an exception in the words, excepting the disabled ones. But the actual "sitters", though entitled to good reward if true and sincere in their faith, were in no case on a par with the "strivers", neither in rank nor in reward.
a
9:19, 20; 57:11.
341
这节经文谈及两种信者: (1) 这些信者虔诚地接受伊斯兰教, 力求做到它的教义的要求, 但不参加保卫和宣扬伊斯兰教的斗争。这些人可以说是消极的信者--------经文中叫他们为 “安坐者”。(2) 这些信者不但做到伊斯兰教义的要求, 并且踊跃参与宣扬它的工作。这些人是积极的信者--------经文中把他们称为 “奋斗者” 即 مُجَاهِدِيْن (Mujahidin)。但是, 还有第三种信者, 他们虽然没有和他们的弟兄们一起参加对不信者的实际战斗, 但取得和那些参加实际斗争的人相等的酬报。他们和那些为了安拉的事业而战斗的 “奋斗者”--------穆斯林是全心全意的战友; 但是他们的特殊环境--------疾病、贫困等等--------不容许他们亲自出征。
a
9:19-20; 57:11.
564
Commentary:
The verse speaks of the different classes of believers only and not of hypocrites. Believers are of two classes: (1) Those who sincerely accept the truth and try to live up to the teachings of Islam but take no part in the struggle to defend and propagate the faith. These are, as it were, passive believers—"sitters" as the verse names them. (2) Those who not only live up to the teachings of Islam but also vigorously participate in the work of its propagation. These are active believers, the "strivers" or mujahids as they are called. The latter are far superior to the former in the sight of God. There is, however, a class of believers who, even though they do not join their brethren in actually fighting disbelievers, get an equal reward with those who take part in the actual struggle. These are referred to in the words "excepting the disabled ones". Their inability to take part in actual fighting is due to circumstances over which they have no control. They are heart and soul with the Muslims who are mujahid, wherever the latter go to fight in the cause of God; but their particular circumstances—disease, poverty, etc.—do not allow them to join the expeditions in person. Of these the Holy Prophet once told his Companions in one of his expeditions that there were men in Medina who were with them in every march they made and in every valley they traversed and who were getting the same reward. The Companions asked the Holy Prophet in surprise how that could be possible and who were those fortunate ones. "They are those of your brethren", replied the Holy Prophet, "who were eager to join us but were prevented from doing so by circumstances beyond their control." These are the ones in whose case the verse makes an exception in the words, excepting the disabled ones. But the actual "sitters", though entitled to good reward if true and sincere in their faith, were in no case on a par with the "strivers", neither in rank nor in reward.
b
9:19, 20; 57:11.
654
The verse speaks of two classes of believers: (1) Those who sincerely accept Islam and then try to live up to its teachings but take no part in the struggle to defend and propagate the Faith. These are, as it were, passive believers—"sitters" as the verse calls them. (2) Those who not only live up to the teachings of Islam but also vigorously participate in the work of its propagation. These are active believers—the "strivers" or Mujahids as they are called. There is, however, a third class of believers who, even though they do not join their brethren in actually fighting disbelievers get an equal reward with those who take part in the actual struggle. They are heart and soul with the Muslims who are Mujahids, wherever the latter go to fight in the cause of God; but their particular circumstances––disease, poverty, etc., do not allow them to join the expeditions in person.
دَرَجَٰتٍ مِّنْهُ وَمَغْفِرَةً وَرَحْمَةً ۚ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ غَفُورًا رَّحِيمًا
Commentary:
This verse further explains and emphasizes the distinction between the "sitters" at home without valid excuse and the "strivers" in the cause of God. The latter are not only superior to the former by "many degrees", but are much more entitled to God’s mercy and forgiveness.
565
Commentary:
This verse further explains and emphasizes the distinction between the "sitters" at home without valid excuse and the "strivers" in the cause of God. The latter are not only superior to the former by "many degrees", but are much more entitled to God’s mercy and forgiveness.
إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ تَوَفَّىٰهُمُ ٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةُ ظَالِمِىٓ أَنفُسِهِمْ قَالُوا۟ فِيمَ كُنتُمْ ۖ قَالُوا۟ كُنَّا مُسْتَضْعَفِينَ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ ۚ قَالُوٓا۟ أَلَمْ تَكُنْ أَرْضُ ٱللَّهِ وَٰسِعَةً فَتُهَاجِرُوا۟ فِيهَا ۚ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ مَأْوَىٰهُمْ جَهَنَّمُ ۖ وَسَآءَتْ مَصِيرًا
16:29.
یعنی کفار کے ملک میں رہ کر تکلیفیں اٹھا رہے تھے‘ مگر ہجرت نہ کرتے تھے۔
16:29.
Islam would not be satisfied with a weak or passive belief. If the environments of a believer are not congenial to the Faith he must shift to a more congenial place and if he does not do so he will not be regarded as sincere in his Faith.
16:29.
Commentary:
The words فتھاجروا (for you to migrate) show that the people referred to here were not so weak as not to be able to migrate from their homes. They were thus not truly "disabled ones" as mentioned in 4:96 above. The present verse, therefore, strongly condemns them. Islam would not be satisfied with a weak or passive belief, for it is neither good for the believer nor for the community. If the environment of a believer is not suitable for him, he should shift to a different environment more congenial to his faith; and if he does not do so, he is not sincere in his faith.
b
16:29.
2
یعنی کفار کے ملک میں رہ کر تکلیفیں اٹھا رہے تھے‘ مگر ہجرت نہ کرتے تھے۔
a
16:29.
566
Commentary:
The words فتھاجروا (for you to migrate) show that the people referred to here were not so weak as not to be able to migrate from their homes. They were thus not truly "disabled ones" as mentioned in 4:96 above. The present verse, therefore, strongly condemns them. Islam would not be satisfied with a weak or passive belief, for it is neither good for the believer nor for the community. If the environment of a believer is not suitable for him, he should shift to a different environment more congenial to his faith; and if he does not do so, he is not sincere in his faith.
a
16:29.
655
Islam would not be satisfied with a weak or passive belief. If the environments of a believer are not congenial to the Faith he must shift to a more congenial place and if he does not do so he will not be regarded as sincere in his Faith.
إِلَّا ٱلْمُسْتَضْعَفِينَ مِنَ ٱلرِّجَالِ وَٱلنِّسَآءِ وَٱلْوِلْدَٰنِ لَا يَسْتَطِيعُونَ حِيلَةً وَلَا يَهْتَدُونَ سَبِيلًا
4:76.
Important Words:
حیلة (plan) is derived from حال i.e. it became changed or altered; it revolved and passed; it became complete, etc. حیلةmeans, mode or manner of changing from one state to another; a mode or means of evading a thing; a mode or means of attaining an object; a contrivance, device, artifice or plan (Lane).
Commentary:
There may be cases in which a person is really unable to migrate. For such this verse provides an exception to the class mentioned in the preceding one; for God is just and never overlooks extenuating circumstances.
The verse also shows that the word یھتدون (here translated as "finding any way" but generally rendered as "being rightly guided") is sometimes used in the sense of being saved, whether from the hardships of this world or from those of the next.
a
4:76.
342
那些不能移居的信者, 不属于上一节经文所提到的那些人。
a
4:76.
567
Important Words:
حیلة (plan) is derived from حال i.e. it became changed or altered; it revolved and passed; it became complete, etc. حیلةmeans, mode or manner of changing from one state to another; a mode or means of evading a thing; a mode or means of attaining an object; a contrivance, device, artifice or plan (Lane).
Commentary:
There may be cases in which a person is really unable to migrate. For such this verse provides an exception to the class mentioned in the preceding one; for God is just and never overlooks extenuating circumstances.
The verse also shows that the word یھتدون (here translated as "finding any way" but generally rendered as "being rightly guided") is sometimes used in the sense of being saved, whether from the hardships of this world or from those of the next.
a
4:76.
656
Those believers, who are unable to emigrate, are excepted from the class mentioned in the preceding verse.
فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ عَسَى ٱللَّهُ أَن يَعْفُوَ عَنْهُمْ ۚ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ عَفُوًّا غَفُورًا
قرآن مجید میں فَاء آتا ہے مگر اردو میں اس کے ترجمہ کے بغیر کام چل جاتا ہے اس لئے ہم نے اردو میں اسے حذف کر دیا ہے۔
The particle ‘asa does not indicate doubt on the part of God but is used to keep the believers referred to here in a state of suspense—between hope and fear—so that they may not become lax in Prayer and good deeds. The expression is designed to hold out hope without creating a false sense of security or a state of complacency.
Important Words:
عفوا (Effacer of sins) is derived from عفا meaning, it was or became effaced, erased or obliterated; it perished or came to naught or came to an end. They say عفت الریح الدار i.e. the wind effaced the traces of the house. سلوا الله العافیة means, ask ye of God the effacement of your sins or pray for forgiveness. The word عفا also means, it was or became much in quantity or many in number. An Arab would say اعفیت شعر البعیر i.e. I left the hair of the camel to become abundant and long. عفوا which is one of the attributes of God, means, One Who forgives much; the Very Forgiving; the Effacer of sins (Lane & Aqrab). See also 2:110, 188, 220, 238; 3:135.
Commentary:
The words, Allah will efface their sins, mean not only that Allah will forgive them their weaknesses but that He will also put an end to their hardships by giving victory to Muslims and making them masters of those places where the weak among them were being oppressed and tormented by cruel disbelievers.
The expression عسی (maybe) does not indicate doubt on the part of God but is used to keep the believers, referred to here, in a state of suspense—between hope and fear—so that they may not become lax in prayer and good deeds. The expression is designed to hold out hope without creating a sense of security or a state of complete complacency.
1
قرآن مجید میں فَاء آتا ہے مگر اردو میں اس کے ترجمہ کے بغیر کام چل جاتا ہے اس لئے ہم نے اردو میں اسے حذف کر دیا ہے۔
568
Important Words:
عفوا (Effacer of sins) is derived from عفا meaning, it was or became effaced, erased or obliterated; it perished or came to naught or came to an end. They say عفت الریح الدار i.e. the wind effaced the traces of the house. سلوا الله العافیة means, ask ye of God the effacement of your sins or pray for forgiveness. The word عفا also means, it was or became much in quantity or many in number. An Arab would say اعفیت شعر البعیر i.e. I left the hair of the camel to become abundant and long. عفوا which is one of the attributes of God, means, One Who forgives much; the Very Forgiving; the Effacer of sins (Lane & Aqrab). See also 2:110, 188, 220, 238; 3:135.
Commentary:
The words, Allah will efface their sins, mean not only that Allah will forgive them their weaknesses but that He will also put an end to their hardships by giving victory to Muslims and making them masters of those places where the weak among them were being oppressed and tormented by cruel disbelievers.
The expression عسی (maybe) does not indicate doubt on the part of God but is used to keep the believers, referred to here, in a state of suspense—between hope and fear—so that they may not become lax in prayer and good deeds. The expression is designed to hold out hope without creating a sense of security or a state of complete complacency.
657
The particle ‘asa does not indicate doubt on the part of God but is used to keep the believers referred to here in a state of suspense—between hope and fear—so that they may not become lax in Prayer and good deeds. The expression is designed to hold out hope without creating a false sense of security or a state of complacency.
۞ وَمَن يُهَاجِرْ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ يَجِدْ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ مُرَٰغَمًا كَثِيرًا وَسَعَةً ۚ وَمَن يَخْرُجْ مِنۢ بَيْتِهِۦ مُهَاجِرًا إِلَى ٱللَّهِ وَرَسُولِهِۦ ثُمَّ يُدْرِكْهُ ٱلْمَوْتُ فَقَدْ وَقَعَ أَجْرُهُۥ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ ۗ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ غَفُورًا رَّحِيمًا
مُرَاغَمٌ: اَلْمَذْھَبُ وَ الْمَھْرَبُ راستہ اَلْحِصْنُ یعنی قلعہ۔ (اقرب) مُرَاغَمًا کَثِیْرًا اَیْ مَذْھَبًا یَذْھَبُ اِلَیْہِ یعنی مراغم کے معنے راستے کے ہیں۔ (مفردات)
Islam accepts no excuse from believers to stay in environments hostile to their Faith if they can afford to leave such localities.
Important Words:
مراغما (place of refuge) is derived from رغم. They say رغم أنفه meaning his nose clove to the dust, i.e. he became abased and humbled. رغمه means, he disliked it. ارغم اھله or راغم اھله means, he forsook or deserted his family against their wish. رغامmeans, earth or dust. مرغم or مراغم means, a road by travelling on which a man separates himself from his people against their wish or so as to displease them; a place to which one migrates; a place of refuge; a safe and fortified place (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse promises those sincere believers who are forced by circumstances to migrate from their homes in the cause of God abundant place of refuge and plentifulness. There is, therefore, no excuse for the people to stay at home surrounded by hostile disbelievers. But the motive must be good and the migration sincere.
The Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "Whoso migrates from his home for the sake of God and His Messenger, his migration will be regarded as having been performed for the sake of God and His Messenger and will be rewarded as such. But whoso leaves his home for the sake of a worldly gain which he wishes to get or for a woman whom he wishes to marry, will be considered to have migrated for the sake of the object for which he migrated, and his migration will not be considered as having been performed in the cause of God" (Bukhari, ch. on Bad’ul Wahy).
2
مُرَاغَمٌ: اَلْمَذْھَبُ وَ الْمَھْرَبُ راستہ اَلْحِصْنُ یعنی قلعہ۔ (اقرب) مُرَاغَمًا کَثِیْرًا اَیْ مَذْھَبًا یَذْھَبُ اِلَیْہِ یعنی مراغم کے معنے راستے کے ہیں۔ (مفردات)
569
Important Words:
مراغما (place of refuge) is derived from رغم. They say رغم أنفه meaning his nose clove to the dust, i.e. he became abased and humbled. رغمه means, he disliked it. ارغم اھله or راغم اھله means, he forsook or deserted his family against their wish. رغامmeans, earth or dust. مرغم or مراغم means, a road by travelling on which a man separates himself from his people against their wish or so as to displease them; a place to which one migrates; a place of refuge; a safe and fortified place (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse promises those sincere believers who are forced by circumstances to migrate from their homes in the cause of God abundant place of refuge and plentifulness. There is, therefore, no excuse for the people to stay at home surrounded by hostile disbelievers. But the motive must be good and the migration sincere.
The Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "Whoso migrates from his home for the sake of God and His Messenger, his migration will be regarded as having been performed for the sake of God and His Messenger and will be rewarded as such. But whoso leaves his home for the sake of a worldly gain which he wishes to get or for a woman whom he wishes to marry, will be considered to have migrated for the sake of the object for which he migrated, and his migration will not be considered as having been performed in the cause of God" (Bukhari, ch. on Bad’ul Wahy).
658
Islam accepts no excuse from believers to stay in environments hostile to their Faith if they can afford to leave such localities.
وَإِذَا ضَرَبْتُمْ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ فَلَيْسَ عَلَيْكُمْ جُنَاحٌ أَن تَقْصُرُوا۟ مِنَ ٱلصَّلَوٰةِ إِنْ خِفْتُمْ أَن يَفْتِنَكُمُ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوٓا۟ ۚ إِنَّ ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ كَانُوا۟ لَكُمْ عَدُوًّا مُّبِينًا
2:240.
اس آیت میں مفسرین نے یہ غلطی کھائی ہے کہ اس جگہ سفر میں دو رکعتیں پڑھنے کا حکم ہے۔ لیکن حضرت عائشہ رضی اللہ عنہا کی حدیث ہے کہ پہلے دو ہی فرض مقرر تھے اس کے بعد سفر میں دو رہنے دئے گئے اور حضر میں چار کر دئے گئے (بخاری) پس تَقْصُرُوْا مِنَ الصَّلٰوۃِ سے یہ مراد نہیں ہو سکتی کہ سفر میں دو پڑھی جائیں کیونکہ پہلے حضر میں بھی دو ہی پڑھی جاتی تھیں۔ پس یہاں قصر سے مراد جلدی جلدی نماز پڑھ لینا ہے یعنی رکعتوں کا کم کرنا مراد نہیں بلکہ وقت کا کم کرنا مراد ہے چونکہ نماز کو سنوار کر ادا کرنے کا حکم ہے اس لئے اس آیت میں یہ بتایا گیا ہے کہ اگر تم اس بات سے ڈرتے ہو کہ دشمن تم پر حمل
2:240.
The subject of Prayers in time of fear has been dealt with in the Qur’an in three separate verses, viz. (1) in 2:240 which deals with Prayers performed in time of extreme fear when no formal Prayer is possible; (2) in the present verse which deals with Prayers performed individually in time of ordinary fear; and (3) in the following verse which deals with Prayers performed in congregation in time of fear. The "shortening of Prayer" as mentioned in the present verse, which relates to the saying of Prayers individually, does not here signify the lessening of the number of Rak‘ats which has from the very beginning been fixed at two in a state of journey. It only signifies the saying of the prescribed Prayers quickly when there is danger of an attack from the enemy. The number of Rak‘ats to be said when a man is on a journey has ever been two; but in time of danger when one has to say one’s Prayers individually, even these two Rak‘ats may be gone through quickly (Kathir). This vi
2:240.
Commentary:
The subject how Prayers are to be performed when one is on a journey or when there is fear of an attack from the enemy has been incidentally introduced here in connection with the subject of migration dealt with in the previous verses. At the conclusion of this subject, which has been incidentally brought in, the Quran will again refer to the main theme dealing with hypocrites and the weak of faith.
The subject of Prayers in time of fear has been dealt with in the Quran in three separate verses viz. (1) in 2:240 which deals with Prayers performed in times of extreme fear when no formal prayer is possible; (2) in 4:102, i.e. the present verse which deals with Prayers performed individually in times of ordinary fear; and (3) in 4:103, i.e. the following verse which deals with Prayers performed in congregation.
The "shortening of Prayer" as mentioned in the present verse, which relates to the saying of Prayers individually, does not here signify the lessening of the number of Rak‘ats which has from the very beginning been fixed at two in a state of journey. It signifies the saying of the prescribed Prayers quickly and hurriedly when there is danger of an attack from the enemy. Ordinarily, a Muslim is enjoined to say his Prayers slowly and attentively, but he may say them quickly and hurriedly when an attack from the enemy is apprehended. The number of Rak‘ats to be said when a man is on a journey has ever been two, in the case of those Prayers which are ordinarily performed in four Rak‘ats; but in time of danger when one has to say one’s Prayers individually, even these two Rak‘ats may be gone through quickly. This is what is meant by the "shortening of Prayer" in the verse under comment. Ibn Kathir says: "Some of the learned theologians hold that by the "shortening of Prayer" here is meant not the shortening of the quantity, i.e. the number of Rak‘ats, but of the quality, i.e. time passed in Prayer, which, in other words, means saying the Prayers quickly without lessening the number of Rak‘ats or reducing the additional prayers which one ordinarily offers in the prescribed Prayers in one’s own words." This view is endorsed by Mujahid, Dahhak, and other authorities; and Imam Muhammad bin Isma‘il also expresses the same view, for in Bukhari he couples this verse with the next one, which deals with the subject of congregational Prayers in time of fear, under the common heading of Salatul-Khauf, (i.e. Prayers in time of fear).
The above view is further supported by the following traditions: ‘A’ishah is reported to have said, "At first the number of Rak‘ats enjoined was two, whether one was on a journey or at home. Later on, however, the number was increased to four for those staying at home, but the number of Rak‘ats said on a journey continued to be the same as before" (Bukhari, ch. on Salat). Again ‘Umar says, "The Prayer to be said on a journey is two Rak‘ats; the Prayer of the two ‘Ids is also two Rak‘ats each; similarly, the Friday Prayer is two Rak‘ats; this is the full number of Rak‘ats without having undergone any curtailment. We learnt this from the very lips of the Holy Prophet" (Musnad, Nasa’i, & Majah).
The number of Rak‘ats whether the Prayer is performed in a state of fear or when one is on a journey is not expressly dealt with in the Quran. It is found detailed in Sunnah or Hadith, which confine the number of Rak‘ats to two in the case of those Prayers which ordinarily have four Rak‘ats. For instance, there is a saying to the effect that Khalid bin Sa‘id once asked Ibn ‘Umar where was صلوة المسافر (Prayer of the wayfarer) mentioned in the Quran, which prescribes only the صلوة الخوف (Prayer in time of fear). To this Ibn ‘Umar replied that in this respect they did what they saw the Holy Prophet doing, i.e. saying two Rak‘ats of Prayer while on a journey (Jarir, v. 144, also see Nasa’i, ch. on Salat).
b
2:240.
3
اس آیت میں مفسرین نے یہ غلطی کھائی ہے کہ اس جگہ سفر میں دو رکعتیں پڑھنے کا حکم ہے۔ لیکن حضرت عائشہ رضی اللہ عنہا کی حدیث ہے کہ پہلے دو ہی فرض مقرر تھے اس کے بعد سفر میں دو رہنے دئے گئے اور حضر میں چار کر دئے گئے (بخاری) پس تَقْصُرُوْا مِنَ الصَّلٰوۃِ سے یہ مراد نہیں ہو سکتی کہ سفر میں دو پڑھی جائیں کیونکہ پہلے حضر میں بھی دو ہی پڑھی جاتی تھیں۔ پس یہاں قصر سے مراد جلدی جلدی نماز پڑھ لینا ہے یعنی رکعتوں کا کم کرنا مراد نہیں بلکہ وقت کا کم کرنا مراد ہے چونکہ نماز کو سنوار کر ادا کرنے کا حکم ہے اس لئے اس آیت میں یہ بتایا گیا ہے کہ اگر تم اس بات سے ڈرتے ہو کہ دشمن تم پر حمل
a
2:240.
570
Commentary:
The subject how Prayers are to be performed when one is on a journey or when there is fear of an attack from the enemy has been incidentally introduced here in connection with the subject of migration dealt with in the previous verses. At the conclusion of this subject, which has been incidentally brought in, the Quran will again refer to the main theme dealing with hypocrites and the weak of faith.
The subject of Prayers in time of fear has been dealt with in the Quran in three separate verses viz. (1) in 2:240 which deals with Prayers performed in times of extreme fear when no formal prayer is possible; (2) in 4:102, i.e. the present verse which deals with Prayers performed individually in times of ordinary fear; and (3) in 4:103, i.e. the following verse which deals with Prayers performed in congregation.
The "shortening of Prayer" as mentioned in the present verse, which relates to the saying of Prayers individually, does not here signify the lessening of the number of Rak‘ats which has from the very beginning been fixed at two in a state of journey. It signifies the saying of the prescribed Prayers quickly and hurriedly when there is danger of an attack from the enemy. Ordinarily, a Muslim is enjoined to say his Prayers slowly and attentively, but he may say them quickly and hurriedly when an attack from the enemy is apprehended. The number of Rak‘ats to be said when a man is on a journey has ever been two, in the case of those Prayers which are ordinarily performed in four Rak‘ats; but in time of danger when one has to say one’s Prayers individually, even these two Rak‘ats may be gone through quickly. This is what is meant by the "shortening of Prayer" in the verse under comment. Ibn Kathir says: "Some of the learned theologians hold that by the "shortening of Prayer" here is meant not the shortening of the quantity, i.e. the number of Rak‘ats, but of the quality, i.e. time passed in Prayer, which, in other words, means saying the Prayers quickly without lessening the number of Rak‘ats or reducing the additional prayers which one ordinarily offers in the prescribed Prayers in one’s own words." This view is endorsed by Mujahid, Dahhak, and other authorities; and Imam Muhammad bin Isma‘il also expresses the same view, for in Bukhari he couples this verse with the next one, which deals with the subject of congregational Prayers in time of fear, under the common heading of Salatul-Khauf, (i.e. Prayers in time of fear).
The above view is further supported by the following traditions: ‘A’ishah is reported to have said, "At first the number of Rak‘ats enjoined was two, whether one was on a journey or at home. Later on, however, the number was increased to four for those staying at home, but the number of Rak‘ats said on a journey continued to be the same as before" (Bukhari, ch. on Salat). Again ‘Umar says, "The Prayer to be said on a journey is two Rak‘ats; the Prayer of the two ‘Ids is also two Rak‘ats each; similarly, the Friday Prayer is two Rak‘ats; this is the full number of Rak‘ats without having undergone any curtailment. We learnt this from the very lips of the Holy Prophet" (Musnad, Nasa’i, & Majah).
The number of Rak‘ats whether the Prayer is performed in a state of fear or when one is on a journey is not expressly dealt with in the Quran. It is found detailed in Sunnah or Hadith, which confine the number of Rak‘ats to two in the case of those Prayers which ordinarily have four Rak‘ats. For instance, there is a saying to the effect that Khalid bin Sa‘id once asked Ibn ‘Umar where was صلوة المسافر (Prayer of the wayfarer) mentioned in the Quran, which prescribes only the صلوة الخوف (Prayer in time of fear). To this Ibn ‘Umar replied that in this respect they did what they saw the Holy Prophet doing, i.e. saying two Rak‘ats of Prayer while on a journey (Jarir, v. 144, also see Nasa’i, ch. on Salat).
b
2:240.
659
The subject of Prayers in time of fear has been dealt with in the Qur’an in three separate verses, viz. (1) in 2:240 which deals with Prayers performed in time of extreme fear when no formal Prayer is possible; (2) in the present verse which deals with Prayers performed individually in time of ordinary fear; and (3) in the following verse which deals with Prayers performed in congregation in time of fear. The "shortening of Prayer" as mentioned in the present verse, which relates to the saying of Prayers individually, does not here signify the lessening of the number of Rak‘ats which has from the very beginning been fixed at two in a state of journey. It only signifies the saying of the prescribed Prayers quickly when there is danger of an attack from the enemy. The number of Rak‘ats to be said when a man is on a journey has ever been two; but in time of danger when one has to say one’s Prayers individually, even these two Rak‘ats may be gone through quickly (Kathir). This vi
وَإِذَا كُنتَ فِيهِمْ فَأَقَمْتَ لَهُمُ ٱلصَّلَوٰةَ فَلْتَقُمْ طَآئِفَةٌ مِّنْهُم مَّعَكَ وَلْيَأْخُذُوٓا۟ أَسْلِحَتَهُمْ فَإِذَا سَجَدُوا۟ فَلْيَكُونُوا۟ مِن وَرَآئِكُمْ وَلْتَأْتِ طَآئِفَةٌ أُخْرَىٰ لَمْ يُصَلُّوا۟ فَلْيُصَلُّوا۟ مَعَكَ وَلْيَأْخُذُوا۟ حِذْرَهُمْ وَأَسْلِحَتَهُمْ ۗ وَدَّ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ لَوْ تَغْفُلُونَ عَنْ أَسْلِحَتِكُمْ وَأَمْتِعَتِكُمْ فَيَمِيلُونَ عَلَيْكُم مَّيْلَةً وَٰحِدَةً ۚ وَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْكُمْ إِن كَانَ بِكُمْ أَذًى مِّن مَّطَرٍ أَوْ كُنتُم مَّرْضَىٰٓ أَن تَضَعُوٓا۟ أَسْلِحَتَكُمْ ۖ وَخُذُوا۟ حِذْرَكُمْ ۗ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ أَعَدَّ لِلْكَٰفِرِينَ عَذَابًا مُّهِينًا
Whereas the preceding verse spoke of Prayer in time of fear in the case of individuals, the present one gives the details of the manner of its performance when the Faithful are in the form of a company or group and the Prayer is to be performed in congregation. As many as eleven different forms in which the Prayer was said on different occasions are described in the Hadith (Muhit).
The verse observes a difference between Aslihah (arms) and Hidhr (precautions). Whereas the former may be put aside in moments of comparative security, the latter should never be neglected. See also 4:72.
Commentary:
Whereas the preceding verse spoke of the Prayer in time of fear in the case of individuals, the present one gives the details of the manner of its performance when the Faithful are in the form of a company or group and the Prayer is to be performed in congregation. Apparently the Holy Prophet alone seems to have been addressed here, but really the verse possesses general application. When a Muslim army is about to say their Prayer in congregation, half of them should say the Prayer with the Imam, carrying their arms, and the other half should stand facing the enemy, to fight him or repulse his attack, as the case may be. When the first half have finished one Rak‘at, they should retire to take the place of those who are facing the enemy. The latter should then come forward and say one Rak‘at with the Imam.
As many as eleven different ways in which these Prayers were said on different occasions are described in the Hadith(for details see Al-Bahrul-Muhit). In some cases, each of the two parties said only one Rak‘at of Prayer, while the Imam said two. In other cases, each of the parties said two Rak‘at, one Rak‘at with the Imam and the other alone, thus all saying two Rak‘at. On yet other occasions each of the two parties said two rak‘at of Prayer with the Imam, the Imam himself having said four Rak‘at—two Rak‘at with each party. These different methods were observed in different circumstances. If the danger was great, each of the parties said only one Rak‘at of Prayer with the Imam while the Imam himself said two; but if the danger was not so great, each party said two Rak‘ats while the Imam said four. Again, methods varied with the varying position of the army. If the enemy, for instance, was in front of the Imam, the congregation followed a method different from that which they followed on other occasions.
To sum up, whereas Prayer in a state of simple journey consists of two Rak‘ats in such Prayers as ordinarily consist of four Rak‘ats, the Prayer in time of fear may assume different forms, the more important being:
(a) Splitting up the worshippers into two parties, each party either saying one part of its Prayer with the Imam and then retiring, or saying one part of its Prayer with the Imam and the other part separately, the number of Rak‘ats performed by the worshippers being either one or two as the case may be (the present verse);
(b) Shortening the duration of Prayers only (the preceding verse);
(c) Doing away with all form and repeating the words of Prayer while walking, running or riding (2:240).
The verse observes a difference between: اسلحة (arms) and حذر (means of defence or simply precautions). Whereas the former may be put aside in moments of comparative security, the latter should always be adhered to and never neglected. See also 4:72.
571
Commentary:
Whereas the preceding verse spoke of the Prayer in time of fear in the case of individuals, the present one gives the details of the manner of its performance when the Faithful are in the form of a company or group and the Prayer is to be performed in congregation. Apparently the Holy Prophet alone seems to have been addressed here, but really the verse possesses general application. When a Muslim army is about to say their Prayer in congregation, half of them should say the Prayer with the Imam, carrying their arms, and the other half should stand facing the enemy, to fight him or repulse his attack, as the case may be. When the first half have finished one Rak‘at, they should retire to take the place of those who are facing the enemy. The latter should then come forward and say one Rak‘at with the Imam.
As many as eleven different ways in which these Prayers were said on different occasions are described in the Hadith(for details see Al-Bahrul-Muhit). In some cases, each of the two parties said only one Rak‘at of Prayer, while the Imam said two. In other cases, each of the parties said two Rak‘at, one Rak‘at with the Imam and the other alone, thus all saying two Rak‘at. On yet other occasions each of the two parties said two rak‘at of Prayer with the Imam, the Imam himself having said four Rak‘at—two Rak‘at with each party. These different methods were observed in different circumstances. If the danger was great, each of the parties said only one Rak‘at of Prayer with the Imam while the Imam himself said two; but if the danger was not so great, each party said two Rak‘ats while the Imam said four. Again, methods varied with the varying position of the army. If the enemy, for instance, was in front of the Imam, the congregation followed a method different from that which they followed on other occasions.
To sum up, whereas Prayer in a state of simple journey consists of two Rak‘ats in such Prayers as ordinarily consist of four Rak‘ats, the Prayer in time of fear may assume different forms, the more important being:
(a) Splitting up the worshippers into two parties, each party either saying one part of its Prayer with the Imam and then retiring, or saying one part of its Prayer with the Imam and the other part separately, the number of Rak‘ats performed by the worshippers being either one or two as the case may be (the present verse);
(b) Shortening the duration of Prayers only (the preceding verse);
(c) Doing away with all form and repeating the words of Prayer while walking, running or riding (2:240).
The verse observes a difference between: اسلحة (arms) and حذر (means of defence or simply precautions). Whereas the former may be put aside in moments of comparative security, the latter should always be adhered to and never neglected. See also 4:72.
660
Whereas the preceding verse spoke of Prayer in time of fear in the case of individuals, the present one gives the details of the manner of its performance when the Faithful are in the form of a company or group and the Prayer is to be performed in congregation. As many as eleven different forms in which the Prayer was said on different occasions are described in the Hadith (Muhit).
661
The verse observes a difference between Aslihah (arms) and Hidhr (precautions). Whereas the former may be put aside in moments of comparative security, the latter should never be neglected. See also 4:72.
فَإِذَا قَضَيْتُمُ ٱلصَّلَوٰةَ فَٱذْكُرُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ قِيَٰمًا وَقُعُودًا وَعَلَىٰ جُنُوبِكُمْ ۚ فَإِذَا ٱطْمَأْنَنتُمْ فَأَقِيمُوا۟ ٱلصَّلَوٰةَ ۚ إِنَّ ٱلصَّلَوٰةَ كَانَتْ عَلَى ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ كِتَٰبًا مَّوْقُوتًا
یعنی جنگ اور خطرہ کی حالت کی طرح جلدی جلدی نہیں۔
3:192.
2:240.
As in the midst of a battle formal Prayers are either said in haste, or performed in the form of one Rak‘at, Muslims are enjoined in this verse, that in order to make up the deficiency, they should remember God and pray to Him in an informal manner after the obligatory service is over. This is to compensate for the shortening of Prayer.
3:192.
2:240.
Commentary:
As in the midst of a battle, formal Prayers are either said in haste, or performed in the form of one Rak‘at only. Muslims are enjoined in this verse, with a view to making up the deficiency, to continue remembering God and praying to Him in an informal manner after the obligatory service is over. This was to compensate, on the one hand, for the shortening of Prayer and, on the other, to serve as a means of drawing the special aid and help of God in a time of great danger.
The expression, And when you are secure (from danger), then observe Prayer (in the prescribed form), very clearly brings out the difference between the words صلوا or اقضوا الصلوة (pray or offer Prayer) and the words اقیموا الصلوة (observe Prayer). The latter expression signifies observing Prayer attentively with all its necessary conditions. The verse thus clearly shows that Islam does not look upon the hasty performance of Prayer as coming under the injunction, اقیموا الصلوة (observe Prayer). See also 2:4.
a
3:192.
b
2:240.
1
یعنی جنگ اور خطرہ کی حالت کی طرح جلدی جلدی نہیں۔
a
3:192.
b
2:240.
572
Commentary:
As in the midst of a battle, formal Prayers are either said in haste, or performed in the form of one Rak‘at only. Muslims are enjoined in this verse, with a view to making up the deficiency, to continue remembering God and praying to Him in an informal manner after the obligatory service is over. This was to compensate, on the one hand, for the shortening of Prayer and, on the other, to serve as a means of drawing the special aid and help of God in a time of great danger.
The expression, And when you are secure (from danger), then observe Prayer (in the prescribed form), very clearly brings out the difference between the words صلوا or اقضوا الصلوة (pray or offer Prayer) and the words اقیموا الصلوة (observe Prayer). The latter expression signifies observing Prayer attentively with all its necessary conditions. The verse thus clearly shows that Islam does not look upon the hasty performance of Prayer as coming under the injunction, اقیموا الصلوة (observe Prayer). See also 2:4.
a
3:192.
b
2:240.
662
As in the midst of a battle formal Prayers are either said in haste, or performed in the form of one Rak‘at, Muslims are enjoined in this verse, that in order to make up the deficiency, they should remember God and pray to Him in an informal manner after the obligatory service is over. This is to compensate for the shortening of Prayer.
وَلَا تَهِنُوا۟ فِى ٱبْتِغَآءِ ٱلْقَوْمِ ۖ إِن تَكُونُوا۟ تَأْلَمُونَ فَإِنَّهُمْ يَأْلَمُونَ كَمَا تَأْلَمُونَ ۖ وَتَرْجُونَ مِنَ ٱللَّهِ مَا لَا يَرْجُونَ ۗ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ عَلِيمًا حَكِيمًا
3:147.
3:147.
3:147.
Commentary:
The expression, you hope from Allah, does not merely signify "hoping to get a reward or recompense", but also includes "hoping to win the pleasure of God and attain His nearness." There can be no bigger incentive for making sacrifices in the cause of religion than the hope that one will thereby win the pleasure and nearness of one’s Lord and Master.
c
3:147.
a
3:147.
573
Commentary:
The expression, you hope from Allah, does not merely signify "hoping to get a reward or recompense", but also includes "hoping to win the pleasure of God and attain His nearness." There can be no bigger incentive for making sacrifices in the cause of religion than the hope that one will thereby win the pleasure and nearness of one’s Lord and Master.
a
3:147.
إِنَّآ أَنزَلْنَآ إِلَيْكَ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ بِٱلْحَقِّ لِتَحْكُمَ بَيْنَ ٱلنَّاسِ بِمَآ أَرَىٰكَ ٱللَّهُ ۚ وَلَا تَكُن لِّلْخَآئِنِينَ خَصِيمًا
5:49.
5:49.
Commentary:
The Quran being the repository of all truth, all questions should be referred to it for decision and settlement. But no favour is to be shown, and no support given, to those who act dishonestly and faithlessly.
The address in this verse is not to the Holy Prophet in particular, but to every Muslim who accepts and studies the Quran.
d
5:49.
b
5:49.
574
Commentary:
The Quran being the repository of all truth, all questions should be referred to it for decision and settlement. But no favour is to be shown, and no support given, to those who act dishonestly and faithlessly.
The address in this verse is not to the Holy Prophet in particular, but to every Muslim who accepts and studies the Quran.
b
5:49.
663
The address is to every Muslim.
وَٱسْتَغْفِرِ ٱللَّهَ ۖ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ غَفُورًا رَّحِيمًا
اِسْتِغْفَارْ (Istighfar) 是一切精神进步的基本要素。它不仅是口头上祈求宽恕的, 而且要付诸行动, 以去消除缺点与罪过。
Istighfar constitutes the keystone of all spiritual progress. It does not merely mean verbal asking for forgiveness but extends to such acts as lead to the covering up of one’s sins and shortcomings.
Commentary:
استغفار (asking forgiveness) is the keystone of all spiritual progress. The word does not merely mean verbal asking for forgiveness, but also extends to acts leading to the covering up of one’s sins and shortcomings; and this covering up, implied in the root meaning of Istighfar (see 2:200) may be of diverse nature: (1) the covering up of evil propensities in man (2) the covering up of evil thoughts and their being restrained from being converted into actions; (3) the covering up of sins actually committed and preventing them from being exposed; and (4) finally the covering up of the sins, as it were, from the sight of God Himself, i.e. complete and absolute forgiveness and their being treated as non-existent. What a vista of bliss for a true believer!
343
اِسْتِغْفَارْ (Istighfar) 是一切精神进步的基本要素。它不仅是口头上祈求宽恕的, 而且要付诸行动, 以去消除缺点与罪过。
575
Commentary:
استغفار (asking forgiveness) is the keystone of all spiritual progress. The word does not merely mean verbal asking for forgiveness, but also extends to acts leading to the covering up of one’s sins and shortcomings; and this covering up, implied in the root meaning of Istighfar (see 2:200) may be of diverse nature: (1) the covering up of evil propensities in man (2) the covering up of evil thoughts and their being restrained from being converted into actions; (3) the covering up of sins actually committed and preventing them from being exposed; and (4) finally the covering up of the sins, as it were, from the sight of God Himself, i.e. complete and absolute forgiveness and their being treated as non-existent. What a vista of bliss for a true believer!
664
Istighfar constitutes the keystone of all spiritual progress. It does not merely mean verbal asking for forgiveness but extends to such acts as lead to the covering up of one’s sins and shortcomings.
وَلَا تُجَٰدِلْ عَنِ ٱلَّذِينَ يَخْتَانُونَ أَنفُسَهُمْ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يُحِبُّ مَن كَانَ خَوَّانًا أَثِيمًا
The word Anfusahum may also mean "their brethren" (2:85, 86; 4:67). The address is general as in the preceding verses.
8:59; 22:39.
Commentary:
The expression انفسھم (themselves) may also mean "their brethren" (see 2:85, 86 and 4:67), in which case the clause would mean "those who act dishonestly with regard to their brethren." The verse further emphasizes the fact, stated in 4:106 above, that those who act unfaithfully and dishonestly should not be supported. They do not deserve support not only because they are dishonest with regard to their own souls or those of their brethren and because the good name of their community suffers on their account, but also because they are encouraged in this way to persist in their evil practices. Here, too, the address is general as in 4:106.
a
8:59; 22:39.
576
Commentary:
The expression انفسھم (themselves) may also mean "their brethren" (see 2:85, 86 and 4:67), in which case the clause would mean "those who act dishonestly with regard to their brethren." The verse further emphasizes the fact, stated in 4:106 above, that those who act unfaithfully and dishonestly should not be supported. They do not deserve support not only because they are dishonest with regard to their own souls or those of their brethren and because the good name of their community suffers on their account, but also because they are encouraged in this way to persist in their evil practices. Here, too, the address is general as in 4:106.
665
The word Anfusahum may also mean "their brethren" (2:85, 86; 4:67). The address is general as in the preceding verses.
يَسْتَخْفُونَ مِنَ ٱلنَّاسِ وَلَا يَسْتَخْفُونَ مِنَ ٱللَّهِ وَهُوَ مَعَهُمْ إِذْ يُبَيِّتُونَ مَا لَا يَرْضَىٰ مِنَ ٱلْقَوْلِ ۚ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ بِمَا يَعْمَلُونَ مُحِيطًا
4:82.
4:82.
4:82.
a
4:82.
b
4:82.
c
4:82.
هَٰٓأَنتُمْ هَٰٓؤُلَآءِ جَٰدَلْتُمْ عَنْهُمْ فِى ٱلْحَيَوٰةِ ٱلدُّنْيَا فَمَن يُجَٰدِلُ ٱللَّهَ عَنْهُمْ يَوْمَ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ أَم مَّن يَكُونُ عَلَيْهِمْ وَكِيلًا
The word Antum (you) shows that in the previous verses it was not the Holy Prophet but Muslims in general who were addressed. The Holy Prophet could not be expected to dispute on behalf of dishonest people. The Qur’an addresses him because he was the recipient of Divine commandment for the believers.
Commentary:
The use in the present verse of the word انتم (you) which is in the plural number clearly shows that in the previous verses it was not the Holy Prophet, but Muslims in general who were addressed. The Holy Prophet could not be expected to dispute on behalf of dishonest people. The Quran addresses him merely because he is the recipient of the Word of God and it is through him that people receive Divine commands.
577
Commentary:
The use in the present verse of the word انتم (you) which is in the plural number clearly shows that in the previous verses it was not the Holy Prophet, but Muslims in general who were addressed. The Holy Prophet could not be expected to dispute on behalf of dishonest people. The Quran addresses him merely because he is the recipient of the Word of God and it is through him that people receive Divine commands.
666
The word Antum (you) shows that in the previous verses it was not the Holy Prophet but Muslims in general who were addressed. The Holy Prophet could not be expected to dispute on behalf of dishonest people. The Qur’an addresses him because he was the recipient of Divine commandment for the believers.
وَمَن يَعْمَلْ سُوٓءًا أَوْ يَظْلِمْ نَفْسَهُۥ ثُمَّ يَسْتَغْفِرِ ٱللَّهَ يَجِدِ ٱللَّهَ غَفُورًا رَّحِيمًا
4:65.
4:65.
4:65.
Commentary:
The God of Islam is a God of mercy and is never revengeful. Whenever a servant of His commits a sin or does an evil act and then sincerely repents and asks for His forgiveness, he always finds Him most Forgiving and Merciful. Ah, what a loving God! Truly has the Holy Prophet said that the joy of God at the repentance of a sinful servant of His is greater than the joy of a lonely wayfarer who, while travelling in the desert, loses his camel laden with provisions and despairs of life but then suddenly finds it (Bukhari, ch. on Da‘wat).
b
4:65.
a
4:65.
578
Commentary:
The God of Islam is a God of mercy and is never revengeful. Whenever a servant of His commits a sin or does an evil act and then sincerely repents and asks for His forgiveness, he always finds Him most Forgiving and Merciful. Ah, what a loving God! Truly has the Holy Prophet said that the joy of God at the repentance of a sinful servant of His is greater than the joy of a lonely wayfarer who, while travelling in the desert, loses his camel laden with provisions and despairs of life but then suddenly finds it (Bukhari, ch. on Da‘wat).
a
4:65.
وَمَن يَكْسِبْ إِثْمًا فَإِنَّمَا يَكْسِبُهُۥ عَلَىٰ نَفْسِهِۦ ۚ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ عَلِيمًا حَكِيمًا
2:287; 99:9.
اصل لفظ کَسَبَ ہے جس کے معنے کمانے کے ہیں۔ لیکن یہ لفظ عربی میں کسی فعل کے ایسے طور پر کرنے کے لئے بھی استعمال ہوتا ہے جسے بالارادہ کیا جائے۔ گو اس کے نتیجہ کی امیدنہ ہو۔ اردو میں اس کا ترجمہ ’’کمانا‘‘ کرنا محاورہ کے خلاف ہے۔ اس لئے ’’کرے‘‘ ترجمہ کیا گیا ہے۔ لیکن مراد ایسے طور پر کام کرنا ہے کہ ارادہ شامل ہو اور نتیجہ کی توقع یا خوف نہ ہو۔
2:287; 99:9.
2:287; 99:9.
c
2:287; 99:9.
1
اصل لفظ کَسَبَ ہے جس کے معنے کمانے کے ہیں۔ لیکن یہ لفظ عربی میں کسی فعل کے ایسے طور پر کرنے کے لئے بھی استعمال ہوتا ہے جسے بالارادہ کیا جائے۔ گو اس کے نتیجہ کی امیدنہ ہو۔ اردو میں اس کا ترجمہ ’’کمانا‘‘ کرنا محاورہ کے خلاف ہے۔ اس لئے ’’کرے‘‘ ترجمہ کیا گیا ہے۔ لیکن مراد ایسے طور پر کام کرنا ہے کہ ارادہ شامل ہو اور نتیجہ کی توقع یا خوف نہ ہو۔
b
2:287; 99:9.
b
2:287; 99:9.
وَمَن يَكْسِبْ خَطِيٓـَٔةً أَوْ إِثْمًا ثُمَّ يَرْمِ بِهِۦ بَرِيٓـًٔا فَقَدِ ٱحْتَمَلَ بُهْتَٰنًا وَإِثْمًا مُّبِينًا
24:2, 24; 33:59.
خَطِيْئَة (Khati’ah) (过错) 和 اِثْم (Ithm) (罪恶) 在这节经文中同时谈及。它们的区别是, 前者可能是有意和无意的, 而且常常只限于行为者本身; 而后者是有
意的, 而它的范围可能涉及其他人。而且, 前者可以意指对安拉玩忽职责, 而后者常常是既触犯安拉又触犯他人, 因此, 更为严重而应受比前者更大的惩罚。请看 2:82 和 2:174。如果犯了过错或罪恶的人试图归咎无辜, 其犯错误或罪恶的严重性倍增。这就是为什么这样的企图不仅叫做 بُهْتَانْ (Buhtan) (诽谤), 也叫做 اِثْمُ مُبِيْن (Ithmu Mubin) (明显罪恶)。
24:2, 24; 33:59.
The difference between Khati’ah (fault) and Ithm (sin) mentioned side by side in this verse is that the former can be both intentional and unintentional and is often confined to the doer, while the latter is intentional and its scope may extend to other people as well. Moreover, the former may signify a dereliction of duty due to God, but the latter is often an offence against both God and man and is, therefore, more serious and is deserving of greater punishment than the former. See also 2:82 and 2:174. The commission of a fault or a sin makes it doubly grave, if the offender tries to shift the blame to an innocent person. This is why such an attempt has been termed not only as Buhtan (calumny) but also as Ithmun Mubin (manifest sin).
24:12, 24; 33:59.
Important Words:
The difference between خطیئة (fault) and اثم (sin) mentioned side by side in this verse is that the former can be both intentional and unintentional and is often confined to the doer; while the latter is intentional and its scope may extend to other people as well. Moreover, the former may be a dereliction of duty due to God; while the latter is often an offence against both God and man and is, therefore, more serious and deserving of greater punishment than the former. See also 2:82 and 2:174.
Commentary:
The commission of a fault or sin makes it doubly grave, if he who commits it tries to fix it on an innocent person. This is why such an attempt has not only been termed بھتان (calumny) but also اثم مبین (manifest sin). As the word مبین (manifest) also means "that which cuts asunder" (2:169), the expression اثما مبینا may also signify that a double sin, (i.e. committing a sin and then imputing it to an innocent person) is that which is likely to cut asunder the connection of the sinner with his Maker.
d
24:2, 24; 33:59.
344
خَطِيْئَة (Khati’ah) (过错) 和 اِثْم (Ithm) (罪恶) 在这节经文中同时谈及。它们的区别是, 前者可能是有意和无意的, 而且常常只限于行为者本身; 而后者是有
意的, 而它的范围可能涉及其他人。而且, 前者可以意指对安拉玩忽职责, 而后者常常是既触犯安拉又触犯他人, 因此, 更为严重而应受比前者更大的惩罚。请看 2:82 和 2:174。如果犯了过错或罪恶的人试图归咎无辜, 其犯错误或罪恶的严重性倍增。这就是为什么这样的企图不仅叫做 بُهْتَانْ (Buhtan) (诽谤), 也叫做 اِثْمُ مُبِيْن (Ithmu Mubin) (明显罪恶)。
c
24:12, 24; 33:59.
579
Important Words:
The difference between خطیئة (fault) and اثم (sin) mentioned side by side in this verse is that the former can be both intentional and unintentional and is often confined to the doer; while the latter is intentional and its scope may extend to other people as well. Moreover, the former may be a dereliction of duty due to God; while the latter is often an offence against both God and man and is, therefore, more serious and deserving of greater punishment than the former. See also 2:82 and 2:174.
Commentary:
The commission of a fault or sin makes it doubly grave, if he who commits it tries to fix it on an innocent person. This is why such an attempt has not only been termed بھتان (calumny) but also اثم مبین (manifest sin). As the word مبین (manifest) also means "that which cuts asunder" (2:169), the expression اثما مبینا may also signify that a double sin, (i.e. committing a sin and then imputing it to an innocent person) is that which is likely to cut asunder the connection of the sinner with his Maker.
c
24:2, 24; 33:59.
667
The difference between Khati’ah (fault) and Ithm (sin) mentioned side by side in this verse is that the former can be both intentional and unintentional and is often confined to the doer, while the latter is intentional and its scope may extend to other people as well. Moreover, the former may signify a dereliction of duty due to God, but the latter is often an offence against both God and man and is, therefore, more serious and is deserving of greater punishment than the former. See also 2:82 and 2:174. The commission of a fault or a sin makes it doubly grave, if the offender tries to shift the blame to an innocent person. This is why such an attempt has been termed not only as Buhtan (calumny) but also as Ithmun Mubin (manifest sin).
وَلَوْلَا فَضْلُ ٱللَّهِ عَلَيْكَ وَرَحْمَتُهُۥ لَهَمَّت طَّآئِفَةٌ مِّنْهُمْ أَن يُضِلُّوكَ وَمَا يُضِلُّونَ إِلَّآ أَنفُسَهُمْ ۖ وَمَا يَضُرُّونَكَ مِن شَىْءٍ ۚ وَأَنزَلَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَيْكَ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ وَٱلْحِكْمَةَ وَعَلَّمَكَ مَا لَمْ تَكُن تَعْلَمُ ۚ وَكَانَ فَضْلُ ٱللَّهِ عَلَيْكَ عَظِيمًا
یہاں فضل کَانَ کا اسم ہے لیکن ایسے موقع پر اردو میں اسے مبتدا نہیں بنا سکتے اس وجہ سے ’’اور اللہ کا فضل تجھ پر بہت بڑا ہے‘‘ کی بجائے ’’تجھ پر اللہ کا (بہت) بڑا فضل ہے‘‘ ترجمہ کیا گیا ہے۔
17:74.
42:53; 96:6.
The words Fadl (grace) and Rahmah (mercy), though general in their significance, sometimes denote, "worldly goods" and "spiritual blessings" respectively (2:65). Thus the verse would mean that the Holy Prophet enjoyed God’s protection in temporal as well as in spiritual matters.
The Hypocrites adopted various ways to bring the Holy Prophet to grief. They would try to mislead him into coming to a wrong decision in matters of vital importance. But their evil designs were always frustrated because he was invariably led by God to the right course concerning matters affecting the future of Islam.
17:74.
42:52; 96:6.
Important Words:
یضلوك (bring about thy ruin). See 2:27.
Commentary:
Various were the ways the hypocrites adopted to bring the Holy Prophet to grief. They would try to mislead him into coming to a wrong decision on a matter of vital importance. But their evil designs were always frustrated because the Holy Prophet was invariably led by God to the right course concerning matters affecting the future of Islam.
The words فضل (grace) and رحمة (mercy), though also general in their significance, sometimes denote "worldly good" and "spiritual blessings" respectively (see 2:65). In this case, the verse would mean that the Holy Prophet enjoyed God’s protection in temporal as well as spiritual matters.
a
17:74.
b
42:53; 96:6.
345
فَضْل (Fadl) (恩典) 和 رَحْمَةْ (Rahmah) (仁慈)这两个字有其一般的含义。但有时分别指 “财产” 和 “精神上的恩惠” (2:65)。因此, 这节经文的意思是, 穆圣受到安拉在精神和肉体方面的保护。
1
یہاں فضل کَانَ کا اسم ہے لیکن ایسے موقع پر اردو میں اسے مبتدا نہیں بنا سکتے اس وجہ سے ’’اور اللہ کا فضل تجھ پر بہت بڑا ہے‘‘ کی بجائے ’’تجھ پر اللہ کا (بہت) بڑا فضل ہے‘‘ ترجمہ کیا گیا ہے۔
a
17:74.
b
42:52; 96:6.
580
Important Words:
یضلوك (bring about thy ruin). See 2:27.
Commentary:
Various were the ways the hypocrites adopted to bring the Holy Prophet to grief. They would try to mislead him into coming to a wrong decision on a matter of vital importance. But their evil designs were always frustrated because the Holy Prophet was invariably led by God to the right course concerning matters affecting the future of Islam.
The words فضل (grace) and رحمة (mercy), though also general in their significance, sometimes denote "worldly good" and "spiritual blessings" respectively (see 2:65). In this case, the verse would mean that the Holy Prophet enjoyed God’s protection in temporal as well as spiritual matters.
a
17:74.
b
42:53; 96:6.
668
The words Fadl (grace) and Rahmah (mercy), though general in their significance, sometimes denote, "worldly goods" and "spiritual blessings" respectively (2:65). Thus the verse would mean that the Holy Prophet enjoyed God’s protection in temporal as well as in spiritual matters.
669
The Hypocrites adopted various ways to bring the Holy Prophet to grief. They would try to mislead him into coming to a wrong decision in matters of vital importance. But their evil designs were always frustrated because he was invariably led by God to the right course concerning matters affecting the future of Islam.
۞ لَّا خَيْرَ فِى كَثِيرٍ مِّن نَّجْوَىٰهُمْ إِلَّا مَنْ أَمَرَ بِصَدَقَةٍ أَوْ مَعْرُوفٍ أَوْ إِصْلَٰحٍۭ بَيْنَ ٱلنَّاسِ ۚ وَمَن يَفْعَلْ ذَٰلِكَ ٱبْتِغَآءَ مَرْضَاتِ ٱللَّهِ فَسَوْفَ نُؤْتِيهِ أَجْرًا عَظِيمًا
2:225.
نَجْوٰی‘ نَاجٰی‘ یُنَاجِیْ‘ مُنَاجَاۃً سے اسم ہے اور اس کے معنی ہیں سَارَّہٗ اس نے خفیہ طور پر مشورہ کیا۔ (اقرب) بعض کے نزدیک نجویٰ کے معنی صرف راز کی بات کے ہی نہیں بلکہ کوئی بات چیت جو مجلس میں جائے اور لوگ اس پربحث کریں اور تبادلہ خیالات کریں اس کو نجویٰ کہیں گے۔ (لسان)
2:225.
Najwa means, a secret talk between two or more persons or telling secrets to another person or holding secret conferences. The word is not restricted to secret conferences but applies to all sorts of conferences whether secret or otherwise in which specially invited people meet to discuss vital matters (Lisan & Muhit).
2:225.
Important Words:
نجوی (conference) is derived from نجا which means, he became safe; he escaped. نجا الجلد عن الذبیحة means, he removed the skin of the slaughtered animal, laying bare the interior. نجا الرجل means, he discoursed secrets with the man, or simply he discoursed with him. ناجا الرجل means, he talked with him in private, or he discoursed secretly with him. نجوی therefore means, a secret between two or more persons; a person or persons discoursing or talking secretly, or holding secret talks, or telling secrets to one another, or talking confidentially, or holding confidential conference; the act of talking or discussing secrets with one another or holding confidential conferences (Aqrab & Taj). According to some authorities, the word نجوی is not restricted to secret conferences, but signifies all conferences whether secret or otherwise in which some people meet at a place and discuss matters or talk together (Lisan). Zajjaj also endorses the same view, saying that secrecy is not essential to نجوی which is applied to all conferences, whether open or secret (Muhit). The word thus extends to those conferences which, though not secret, are attended only by regular members or specially invited persons.
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it differentiates between good and bad conferences. The verse teaches that only three kinds of conferences or societies or meetings can be productive of good: Firstly, من امر بصدقة i.e. those that are founded or held with the object of promoting the welfare of the poor, the needy, etc. Secondly, من امر بمعروف i.e. those whose object is to promote the spread and propagation of, or investigation and research into, sciences, law, education, learning, the arts, etc. Thirdly, من امر باصلاح بین الناس i.e.those established for the purpose of settling disputes and removing causes of friction in domestic, social, national, or international matters. This would include associations for the purpose of conducting the political affairs of a nation or a country, for their object also is to promote peace among mankind. This teaching, if faithfully acted upon, should go a long way to establish peace and harmony in the world.
c
2:225.
2
نَجْوٰی‘ نَاجٰی‘ یُنَاجِیْ‘ مُنَاجَاۃً سے اسم ہے اور اس کے معنی ہیں سَارَّہٗ اس نے خفیہ طور پر مشورہ کیا۔ (اقرب) بعض کے نزدیک نجویٰ کے معنی صرف راز کی بات کے ہی نہیں بلکہ کوئی بات چیت جو مجلس میں جائے اور لوگ اس پربحث کریں اور تبادلہ خیالات کریں اس کو نجویٰ کہیں گے۔ (لسان)
a
2:225.
581
Important Words:
نجوی (conference) is derived from نجا which means, he became safe; he escaped. نجا الجلد عن الذبیحة means, he removed the skin of the slaughtered animal, laying bare the interior. نجا الرجل means, he discoursed secrets with the man, or simply he discoursed with him. ناجا الرجل means, he talked with him in private, or he discoursed secretly with him. نجوی therefore means, a secret between two or more persons; a person or persons discoursing or talking secretly, or holding secret talks, or telling secrets to one another, or talking confidentially, or holding confidential conference; the act of talking or discussing secrets with one another or holding confidential conferences (Aqrab & Taj). According to some authorities, the word نجوی is not restricted to secret conferences, but signifies all conferences whether secret or otherwise in which some people meet at a place and discuss matters or talk together (Lisan). Zajjaj also endorses the same view, saying that secrecy is not essential to نجوی which is applied to all conferences, whether open or secret (Muhit). The word thus extends to those conferences which, though not secret, are attended only by regular members or specially invited persons.
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it differentiates between good and bad conferences. The verse teaches that only three kinds of conferences or societies or meetings can be productive of good: Firstly, من امر بصدقة i.e. those that are founded or held with the object of promoting the welfare of the poor, the needy, etc. Secondly, من امر بمعروف i.e. those whose object is to promote the spread and propagation of, or investigation and research into, sciences, law, education, learning, the arts, etc. Thirdly, من امر باصلاح بین الناس i.e.those established for the purpose of settling disputes and removing causes of friction in domestic, social, national, or international matters. This would include associations for the purpose of conducting the political affairs of a nation or a country, for their object also is to promote peace among mankind. This teaching, if faithfully acted upon, should go a long way to establish peace and harmony in the world.
c
2:225.
670
Najwa means, a secret talk between two or more persons or telling secrets to another person or holding secret conferences. The word is not restricted to secret conferences but applies to all sorts of conferences whether secret or otherwise in which specially invited people meet to discuss vital matters (Lisan & Muhit).
وَمَن يُشَاقِقِ ٱلرَّسُولَ مِنۢ بَعْدِ مَا تَبَيَّنَ لَهُ ٱلْهُدَىٰ وَيَتَّبِعْ غَيْرَ سَبِيلِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ نُوَلِّهِۦ مَا تَوَلَّىٰ وَنُصْلِهِۦ جَهَنَّمَ ۖ وَسَآءَتْ مَصِيرًا
7:4.
یعنی وہ رسولؐ اور اس کے صحابہؓ کو تباہ کرنا چاہتا ہے۔ ہم وہی تباہی اس کی قسمت میں لکھ دیں گے۔
7:4.
7:4.
Commentary:
The verse means that people who oppose the Prophet openly or secretly and seek for themselves a way other than that of believers, in spite of the fact that the divine guidance has become clear to them, will be deprived of the means of guidance, and God will let them follow the wrong course they are pursuing, i.e. they will increase in their hypocrisy and disbelief.
d
7:4.
3
یعنی وہ رسولؐ اور اس کے صحابہؓ کو تباہ کرنا چاہتا ہے۔ ہم وہی تباہی اس کی قسمت میں لکھ دیں گے۔
a
7:4.
582
Commentary:
The verse means that people who oppose the Prophet openly or secretly and seek for themselves a way other than that of believers, in spite of the fact that the divine guidance has become clear to them, will be deprived of the means of guidance, and God will let them follow the wrong course they are pursuing, i.e. they will increase in their hypocrisy and disbelief.
a
7:4.
إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يَغْفِرُ أَن يُشْرَكَ بِهِۦ وَيَغْفِرُ مَا دُونَ ذَٰلِكَ لِمَن يَشَآءُ ۚ وَمَن يُشْرِكْ بِٱللَّهِ فَقَدْ ضَلَّ ضَلَٰلًۢا بَعِيدًا
a
4:49.
b
4:137.
b
4:49.
c
4:137.
583
Commentary:
See note on 4:49.
b
4:49.
c
4:137.
إِن يَدْعُونَ مِن دُونِهِۦٓ إِلَّآ إِنَٰثًا وَإِن يَدْعُونَ إِلَّا شَيْطَٰنًا مَّرِيدًا
اِنَاثْ (Inath) 这个词包括所有虚假的神, 不论是活的或死的。这个词用来表明所有虚假的神是虚弱和无用的。
ہم نے اِنَاثًا کا ترجمہ بے جان چیزیں کیا ہے۔ یہ لغت کے مطابق ہے۔ (دیکھو مفردات راغب و لسان العرب و تفسیر فتح البیان جلد۲ صفحہ ۳۱۶)
واؤ کا ترجمہ ’’بلکہ‘‘ کیا گیا ہے کیونکہ یہی اردو کے محاورہ کے مطابق بلکہ عربی کے محاورہ کے بھی مطابق ہے۔
The word Inath includes all false deities, whether living or dead. The word has been used to point to the utter weakness and helplessness of false deities.
Important Words:
اناثا (lifeless objects) is the plural of انثی which is derived from انث which means, it was or became female or feminine; or it (iron, etc.) was or became soft. انثی means, female; feminine; of the female sex or feminine gender. اناث, which is the plural of انثی, also means, inanimate or lifeless things; small stars (Lane).
مریدا (rebellious) is derived from مرد i.e. he was or became rebellious and transgressed proper limits. مارد means, one who rebels and transgresses proper limits. مرید means, mischievous, haughty and rebellious (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The word اناث (lifeless objects) explained above includes all false deities, whether living or dead. The word has been used to point to the utter weakness and helplessness of the false deities.
The use of the word "Satan" in the verse signifies that idolaters, while invoking their deities, in reality invoke Satan, because it is at his bidding that they invoke false gods.
The verse provides two reasons for the statement made in the previous verse: (1) the worship of false gods does the idolaters no good; (2) it positively does them harm, because it strengthens their relation with Satan, who is the avowed enemy of a man and a rebel against the true God.
346
اِنَاثْ (Inath) 这个词包括所有虚假的神, 不论是活的或死的。这个词用来表明所有虚假的神是虚弱和无用的。
1
ہم نے اِنَاثًا کا ترجمہ بے جان چیزیں کیا ہے۔ یہ لغت کے مطابق ہے۔ (دیکھو مفردات راغب و لسان العرب و تفسیر فتح البیان جلد۲ صفحہ ۳۱۶)
2
واؤ کا ترجمہ ’’بلکہ‘‘ کیا گیا ہے کیونکہ یہی اردو کے محاورہ کے مطابق بلکہ عربی کے محاورہ کے بھی مطابق ہے۔
584
Important Words:
اناثا (lifeless objects) is the plural of انثی which is derived from انث which means, it was or became female or feminine; or it (iron, etc.) was or became soft. انثی means, female; feminine; of the female sex or feminine gender. اناث, which is the plural of انثی, also means, inanimate or lifeless things; small stars (Lane).
مریدا (rebellious) is derived from مرد i.e. he was or became rebellious and transgressed proper limits. مارد means, one who rebels and transgresses proper limits. مرید means, mischievous, haughty and rebellious (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The word اناث (lifeless objects) explained above includes all false deities, whether living or dead. The word has been used to point to the utter weakness and helplessness of the false deities.
The use of the word "Satan" in the verse signifies that idolaters, while invoking their deities, in reality invoke Satan, because it is at his bidding that they invoke false gods.
The verse provides two reasons for the statement made in the previous verse: (1) the worship of false gods does the idolaters no good; (2) it positively does them harm, because it strengthens their relation with Satan, who is the avowed enemy of a man and a rebel against the true God.
671
The word Inath includes all false deities, whether living or dead. The word has been used to point to the utter weakness and helplessness of false deities.
لَّعَنَهُ ٱللَّهُ ۘ وَقَالَ لَأَتَّخِذَنَّ مِنْ عِبَادِكَ نَصِيبًا مَّفْرُوضًا
14:23; 17:65.
14:23; 17:65.
14:23; 17:65.
Commentary:
The opening part of the verse refers to Satan as mentioned in the preceding verse. When cursed by God, he vowed to mislead men; but he can lead astray only a "fixed portion" of them, i.e. those who themselves choose to accept his lead. The words "fixed portion" thus mean portion determined under the eternal laws of God.
c
14:23; 17:65.
a
14:23; 17:65.
585
Commentary:
The opening part of the verse refers to Satan as mentioned in the preceding verse. When cursed by God, he vowed to mislead men; but he can lead astray only a "fixed portion" of them, i.e. those who themselves choose to accept his lead. The words "fixed portion" thus mean portion determined under the eternal laws of God.
d
14:23; 17:65.
وَلَأُضِلَّنَّهُمْ وَلَأُمَنِّيَنَّهُمْ وَلَءَامُرَنَّهُمْ فَلَيُبَتِّكُنَّ ءَاذَانَ ٱلْأَنْعَٰمِ وَلَءَامُرَنَّهُمْ فَلَيُغَيِّرُنَّ خَلْقَ ٱللَّهِ ۚ وَمَن يَتَّخِذِ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنَ وَلِيًّا مِّن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ فَقَدْ خَسِرَ خُسْرَانًا مُّبِينًا
اس سے مراد یہ ہے کہ انسانی فطرت کو جو توحید کی طرف توجہ دلاتی ہے بدل کر وہ شرک کا رواج قائم کرنا چاہتے ہیں۔
As a mark of their devotion to false deities, the Arabs used to cut the ears of dedicated animals in order to distinguish them from other animals. This foolish practice persists even to this day in some countries
The 'alteration of Allah’s creation' is done by (1) deifying God’s creation; (2) by changing and corrupting the religion of God; (3) by deforming or disfiguring the body of a newborn child; and (4) by turning to evil use that which Allah has created for good use.
Important Words:
فلیبتکن (will cut) is derived from بتك. They say بتکه i.e. he cut it or severed it, or slit it, or cut it off entirely, or plucked it out (Lane).
Commentary:
The opening part of the verse is a continuation of the speech of Satan begun in the last verse, and the latter part embodies a pronouncement of the judgement of God.
As a mark of their dedication to false deities, the Arabs used to cut the ears of dedicated animals in order to distinguish them from other animals. This foolish practice persists even to this day among some ignorant people in India and elsewhere.
The "alteration of God’s creation" can be, and is, generally done in four ways: (1) by deifying God’s creation; (2) by changing and corrupting the religion of God; (3) by deforming or disfiguring the body of a newborn child; (4) by turning to an evil use that which God has created for a good purpose. For instance, God has endowed man with many faculties by making a right use of which he can make great progress in all departments of life, but not unoften he seeks to alter God’s creation by making an evil use of them and as a result thereof "suffers a manifest loss".
347
作为他们对虚假的神信仰的一种标志, 阿拉伯人过去常常刻作供奉用的牲畜的耳朵以示与其他牲畜的区别。这种愚蠢的做法, 至今尚见于一些国家。
348
“改变安拉的创造” 包括以下几种做法: (1) 蔑视安拉的创造; (2) 窜改和腐化安拉的宗教; (3) 使一个初生婴儿的身体变形; 以及 (4) 把安拉为行善而创造的东西改用来做邪恶的事情。
3
اس سے مراد یہ ہے کہ انسانی فطرت کو جو توحید کی طرف توجہ دلاتی ہے بدل کر وہ شرک کا رواج قائم کرنا چاہتے ہیں۔
586
Important Words:
فلیبتکن (will cut) is derived from بتك. They say بتکه i.e. he cut it or severed it, or slit it, or cut it off entirely, or plucked it out (Lane).
Commentary:
The opening part of the verse is a continuation of the speech of Satan begun in the last verse, and the latter part embodies a pronouncement of the judgement of God.
As a mark of their dedication to false deities, the Arabs used to cut the ears of dedicated animals in order to distinguish them from other animals. This foolish practice persists even to this day among some ignorant people in India and elsewhere.
The "alteration of God’s creation" can be, and is, generally done in four ways: (1) by deifying God’s creation; (2) by changing and corrupting the religion of God; (3) by deforming or disfiguring the body of a newborn child; (4) by turning to an evil use that which God has created for a good purpose. For instance, God has endowed man with many faculties by making a right use of which he can make great progress in all departments of life, but not unoften he seeks to alter God’s creation by making an evil use of them and as a result thereof "suffers a manifest loss".
672
As a mark of their devotion to false deities, the Arabs used to cut the ears of dedicated animals in order to distinguish them from other animals. This foolish practice persists even to this day in some countries
673
The 'alteration of Allah’s creation' is done by (1) deifying God’s creation; (2) by changing and corrupting the religion of God; (3) by deforming or disfiguring the body of a newborn child; and (4) by turning to evil use that which Allah has created for good use.
يَعِدُهُمْ وَيُمَنِّيهِمْ ۖ وَمَا يَعِدُهُمُ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنُ إِلَّا غُرُورًا
14:23; 17:75.
14:23; 17:75.
14:23; 17:65.
Important Words:
غرورا (vain things) is derived from غر. They say غرہ i.e. he deceived him; he beguiled him; he made him desire what was vain or false. غرور (ghurur) means, false or vain thing; vanity or what is false or vain; a deception; a thing by which one is deceived. غرور (gharur), (e.g. 31:34), with different vowel point, means, very deceitful, or what deceives one, the Devil; also the present world (Lane).
Commentary:
The promises made by Satan and the desires raised by him in the hearts of his votaries, as against the works and decrees of God, never materialize.
d
14:23; 17:75.
a
14:23; 17:65.
587
Important Words:
غرورا (vain things) is derived from غر. They say غرہ i.e. he deceived him; he beguiled him; he made him desire what was vain or false. غرور (ghurur) means, false or vain thing; vanity or what is false or vain; a deception; a thing by which one is deceived. غرور (gharur), (e.g. 31:34), with different vowel point, means, very deceitful, or what deceives one, the Devil; also the present world (Lane).
Commentary:
The promises made by Satan and the desires raised by him in the hearts of his votaries, as against the works and decrees of God, never materialize.
a
14:23; 17:75.
أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ مَأْوَىٰهُمْ جَهَنَّمُ وَلَا يَجِدُونَ عَنْهَا مَحِيصًا
14:22.
14:22.
14:22.
Important Words:
محیص (way of escape) is derived from حاص. They say حاص عنه i.e. he turned away from, and escaped it. محیص therefore means, a way or place of escape; a place of refuge; a place to which one turns or flees (Aqrab & Lane).
e
14:22.
b
14:22.
588
Important Words:
محیص (way of escape) is derived from حاص. They say حاص عنه i.e. he turned away from, and escaped it. محیص therefore means, a way or place of escape; a place of refuge; a place to which one turns or flees (Aqrab & Lane).
b
14:22.
وَٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ وَعَمِلُوا۟ ٱلصَّٰلِحَٰتِ سَنُدْخِلُهُمْ جَنَّٰتٍ تَجْرِى مِن تَحْتِهَا ٱلْأَنْهَٰرُ خَٰلِدِينَ فِيهَآ أَبَدًا ۖ وَعْدَ ٱللَّهِ حَقًّا ۚ وَمَنْ أَصْدَقُ مِنَ ٱللَّهِ قِيلًا
2:26.
See 2:26.
See 2:26.
a
2:26.
a
See 2:26.
c
See 2:26.
لَّيْسَ بِأَمَانِيِّكُمْ وَلَآ أَمَانِىِّ أَهْلِ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ ۗ مَن يَعْمَلْ سُوٓءًا يُجْزَ بِهِۦ وَلَا يَجِدْ لَهُۥ مِن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ وَلِيًّا وَلَا نَصِيرًا
4:46; 33:18, 66.
4:46; 33:18, 66.
4:46; 33:18, 66.
Commentary:
The expression, It shall not be according to your desires, does not mean that the desires of the Faithful will not materialize. The verse purports to lay down a general principle that it is only the Will of God which prevails. As the desires of true believers must coincide with the will of God, they are bound to materialize.
b
4:46; 33:18, 66.
b
4:46; 33:18, 66.
589
Commentary:
The expression, It shall not be according to your desires, does not mean that the desires of the Faithful will not materialize. The verse purports to lay down a general principle that it is only the Will of God which prevails. As the desires of true believers must coincide with the will of God, they are bound to materialize.
d
4:46; 33:18, 66.
وَمَن يَعْمَلْ مِنَ ٱلصَّٰلِحَٰتِ مِن ذَكَرٍ أَوْ أُنثَىٰ وَهُوَ مُؤْمِنٌ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ يَدْخُلُونَ ٱلْجَنَّةَ وَلَا يُظْلَمُونَ نَقِيرًا
40:41
40:41
The verse places men and women on the same level so far as their works and rewards are concerned. Both are equally entitled to good reward if they do good works.
40:41.
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it clearly places men and women on the same level so far as works and their rewards are concerned. Both alike are servants of the Lord and both are equally entitled to a good reward, if they do good works. It is indeed strange that in spite of such explicit teaching some Christian missionaries should have the hardihood to bring against Islam the charge that according to it women, unlike men, are devoid of souls.
It should also be noted that true belief is a necessary condition for salvation, as the words, and is a believer, clearly indicate.
c
40:41
c
40:41.
590
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it clearly places men and women on the same level so far as works and their rewards are concerned. Both alike are servants of the Lord and both are equally entitled to a good reward, if they do good works. It is indeed strange that in spite of such explicit teaching some Christian missionaries should have the hardihood to bring against Islam the charge that according to it women, unlike men, are devoid of souls.
It should also be noted that true belief is a necessary condition for salvation, as the words, and is a believer, clearly indicate.
a
40:41
674
The verse places men and women on the same level so far as their works and rewards are concerned. Both are equally entitled to good reward if they do good works.
وَمَنْ أَحْسَنُ دِينًا مِّمَّنْ أَسْلَمَ وَجْهَهُۥ لِلَّهِ وَهُوَ مُحْسِنٌ وَٱتَّبَعَ مِلَّةَ إِبْرَٰهِيمَ حَنِيفًا ۗ وَٱتَّخَذَ ٱللَّهُ إِبْرَٰهِيمَ خَلِيلًا
حَنِیْـفًا ابراہیمؑ کا حال ہے۔ لیکن چونکہ حال اور صفت کے معنی ایک ہوتے ہیں اور حال کا ترجمہ اردو میں نہیں ہو سکا۔ اس لئے صفت کا ترجمہ کر دیا گیا ہے۔
2:132.
This verse gives the essence of Islam which is complete submission to the will of God and the complete devotion of all one’s faculties and powers to His service and holds out Abraham as true model for a Muslim to imitate and follow.
2:132.
Important Words:
خلیل (special friend) is derived from خل. They say خل الشیء i.e. he bored a hole into the thing. خل فی دعائه means, he was particular in his prayer. خلیل means, a special and particular friend whose love penetrates your inner parts (Aqrab & Lane). See also 2:255.
Commentary:
This verse gives the essence of Islam which signifies submission to the Will of God and the devotion of one’s faculties and powers to His service (see also note on 2:113). Abraham has been held out to the People of the Book who revere him as a patriarch and to the Arabs who were proud of being descended from him, as an example who embodied in his person the essence of Islam by his full submission to the Will of God; and both these people are herein told that it is only the true observance of the teachings of Islam that can make one like Abraham—beloved of God and His special friend.
There is a hadith in which the Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "If I had taken anyone from among men as my خلیل (special friend whose love penetrates one’s heart), I would have certainly taken Abu Bakr as such. But such friendship is permissible with God alone Who is my خلیل" (Bukhari, ch. on Fada’il of the Holy Companions).
d
2:132.
349
这节经文述及伊斯兰教的要旨: 完全服从安拉的旨意并把个人的全部才能和力量完全奉献给安拉而为安拉服务。经文提出伊布拉欣为穆斯林摹仿和学习的真正的榜样。
1
حَنِیْـفًا ابراہیمؑ کا حال ہے۔ لیکن چونکہ حال اور صفت کے معنی ایک ہوتے ہیں اور حال کا ترجمہ اردو میں نہیں ہو سکا۔ اس لئے صفت کا ترجمہ کر دیا گیا ہے۔
a
2:132.
591
Important Words:
خلیل (special friend) is derived from خل. They say خل الشیء i.e. he bored a hole into the thing. خل فی دعائه means, he was particular in his prayer. خلیل means, a special and particular friend whose love penetrates your inner parts (Aqrab & Lane). See also 2:255.
Commentary:
This verse gives the essence of Islam which signifies submission to the Will of God and the devotion of one’s faculties and powers to His service (see also note on 2:113). Abraham has been held out to the People of the Book who revere him as a patriarch and to the Arabs who were proud of being descended from him, as an example who embodied in his person the essence of Islam by his full submission to the Will of God; and both these people are herein told that it is only the true observance of the teachings of Islam that can make one like Abraham—beloved of God and His special friend.
There is a hadith in which the Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "If I had taken anyone from among men as my خلیل (special friend whose love penetrates one’s heart), I would have certainly taken Abu Bakr as such. But such friendship is permissible with God alone Who is my خلیل" (Bukhari, ch. on Fada’il of the Holy Companions).
b
2:132.
675
This verse gives the essence of Islam which is complete submission to the will of God and the complete devotion of all one’s faculties and powers to His service and holds out Abraham as true model for a Muslim to imitate and follow.
وَلِلَّهِ مَا فِى ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَمَا فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ ۚ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ بِكُلِّ شَىْءٍ مُّحِيطًا
مُحِیْط کے معنے گھیرنے والے کے ہیں لیکن اس جگہ اس کے معنے کامل علم کے ہیں اور وہی معنے ہم نے کیے ہیں۔ اقرب الموارد میں ہے: اَحَاطَ بِہٖ عِلْمًا اَیْ اَحْدَقَ عِلْمُہٗ بِہٖ مِنْ جَمِیْعِ جِھَاتِہٖ وَعَرَفَہٗ یعنی اَحَاطَ کے معنے کسی چیز کا کامل علم رکھنے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں۔
2:285; 4:132; 10:56; 16:53; 24:65.
41:55; 85:21.
Commentary:
The word محیط (One Who encompasses) signifies two things: (1) that God encompasses everything with His knowledge; and (2) that He encompasses all with His power. There is nothing that He does not know and nothing that He does not hold in His power.
e
2:285; 4:132; 10:56; 16:53; 24:65.
f
41:55; 85:21.
2
مُحِیْط کے معنے گھیرنے والے کے ہیں لیکن اس جگہ اس کے معنے کامل علم کے ہیں اور وہی معنے ہم نے کیے ہیں۔ اقرب الموارد میں ہے: اَحَاطَ بِہٖ عِلْمًا اَیْ اَحْدَقَ عِلْمُہٗ بِہٖ مِنْ جَمِیْعِ جِھَاتِہٖ وَعَرَفَہٗ یعنی اَحَاطَ کے معنے کسی چیز کا کامل علم رکھنے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں۔
b
2:285; 4:132; 10:56; 16:53; 24:65.
c
41:55; 85:21.
592
Commentary:
The word محیط (One Who encompasses) signifies two things: (1) that God encompasses everything with His knowledge; and (2) that He encompasses all with His power. There is nothing that He does not know and nothing that He does not hold in His power.
c
2:285; 4:132; 10:56; 16:53; 24:65.
d
41:55; 85:21.
وَيَسْتَفْتُونَكَ فِى ٱلنِّسَآءِ ۖ قُلِ ٱللَّهُ يُفْتِيكُمْ فِيهِنَّ وَمَا يُتْلَىٰ عَلَيْكُمْ فِى ٱلْكِتَٰبِ فِى يَتَٰمَى ٱلنِّسَآءِ ٱلَّٰتِى لَا تُؤْتُونَهُنَّ مَا كُتِبَ لَهُنَّ وَتَرْغَبُونَ أَن تَنكِحُوهُنَّ وَٱلْمُسْتَضْعَفِينَ مِنَ ٱلْوِلْدَٰنِ وَأَن تَقُومُوا۟ لِلْيَتَٰمَىٰ بِٱلْقِسْطِ ۚ وَمَا تَفْعَلُوا۟ مِنْ خَيْرٍ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ بِهِۦ عَلِيمًا
4:4.
یعنی سورۂ نساء آیت ۴ میں۔
مقرر کردہ حق سے یہ مراد ہے کہ ان کے مہر نہیں دیتے۔
کمزور بچیوں سے مراد یتیم لڑکیاں ہیں۔ کیونکہ وہ خود اپنے حق نہیں لے سکتیں۔
یہاں وِلْدَان کا لفظ ہے جو وَلَدٌ کی جمع ہے اور لڑکے اور لڑکی دونوں پر بولا جاتا ہے۔ لیکن عبارت کے مضمون سے ظاہر ہے کہ یہاں لڑکیاں مراد ہیں۔ کیونکہ انہی سے نکاح کا امکان ہے۔
4:4.
The "decision" is referred to in the following three verses.
The allusion in the words, that which is recited to you in the Book, is to the 4th verse of the present Surah. It was prohibited to Muslims to marry those orphan girls whose rights they could not adequately safeguard. ‘Umar, the Second Caliph would not allow the guardians of wealthy and handsome orphan girls to marry them and would insist on other and better husbands being found for them. The verse signifies that some instructions about women have already been given in the Qur’an and that other instructions follow.
Walad which is singular of Wildan is used both for a boy and a girl, but here Wildan signifies girls, marriage with whom is mentioned here.
4:4.
Important Words:
یستفتونك (they seek of thee the decision of the Law) and یفتیکم (gives you His decision) are both derived from فتو or فتی i.e.he was or became youthful, or he was in the prime of life. فتا الرجل means, he surpassed the man in فتوة i.e. in generosity. افتاه فی الامر means, he made known or explained to him the decision of the Shari‘ah respecting the matter; or he gave him an answer stating the decision of the Law respecting a question. استفتیت الفقیه فی الامر means, I asked or sought of the jurist or the lawyer or the learned man the decision of the Shari‘ah respecting the matter. فتوی therefore means, an explanation or notification or pronouncement of the decision of the Law in some dubious or difficult matter given by a jurist or a lawyer or a man learned in religious Law. استفتاء means, asking or seeking of a jurist or a lawyer or a learned man the decision of the Law (Shari‘ah) in a certain dubious or difficult matter (Lane & Aqrab). The expression إفتا rendered in the verse as gives you the decision, is also sometimes used in the sense of permitting or giving permission, as in the well-known hadith الاثم ماحك فی صدرك وان افتاك الناس i.e. a sin is that which pricks in thy mind even if people should say that it is permissible (Lisan). In this case the Quranic clause الله یفتیکم rendered as, Allah gives you His decision, may also be translated as "Allah gives you permission".
Commentary:
The verse which has been differently translated is considered to be a rather difficult one. The decision spoken of in the clause, Allah gives you His decision, refers to what follows in the succeeding verses, i.e. 4:129-131.
The allusion in the words, that which is recited to you in the Book, is to verse 4:4 in the beginning of the present Surah. It was prohibited to Muslims to marry those orphan girls whose rights they could not adequately discharge. ‘Umar, the Holy Prophet’s Second Successor, would not allow the guardians of wealthy and handsome orphan girls to marry them but would insist on better husbands being found for them. On the other hand, if they were not so wealthy or handsome, he recommended them to their guardians for marriage so that, being acquainted with their defects and weaknesses, they might overlook their shortcomings and deal kindly with them. For further instructions about good treatment of orphans; see 4: 6, 7.
Generally speaking the clause, Allah gives you His decision regarding them (women) and so does that which is recited to you in the Book concerning the orphan girls, means that some instructions about women have already been given in the Quran and other instructions follow.
g
4:4.
3
یعنی سورۂ نساء آیت ۴ میں۔
4
مقرر کردہ حق سے یہ مراد ہے کہ ان کے مہر نہیں دیتے۔
5
کمزور بچیوں سے مراد یتیم لڑکیاں ہیں۔ کیونکہ وہ خود اپنے حق نہیں لے سکتیں۔
6
یہاں وِلْدَان کا لفظ ہے جو وَلَدٌ کی جمع ہے اور لڑکے اور لڑکی دونوں پر بولا جاتا ہے۔ لیکن عبارت کے مضمون سے ظاہر ہے کہ یہاں لڑکیاں مراد ہیں۔ کیونکہ انہی سے نکاح کا امکان ہے۔
a
4:4.
593
Important Words:
یستفتونك (they seek of thee the decision of the Law) and یفتیکم (gives you His decision) are both derived from فتو or فتی i.e.he was or became youthful, or he was in the prime of life. فتا الرجل means, he surpassed the man in فتوة i.e. in generosity. افتاه فی الامر means, he made known or explained to him the decision of the Shari‘ah respecting the matter; or he gave him an answer stating the decision of the Law respecting a question. استفتیت الفقیه فی الامر means, I asked or sought of the jurist or the lawyer or the learned man the decision of the Shari‘ah respecting the matter. فتوی therefore means, an explanation or notification or pronouncement of the decision of the Law in some dubious or difficult matter given by a jurist or a lawyer or a man learned in religious Law. استفتاء means, asking or seeking of a jurist or a lawyer or a learned man the decision of the Law (Shari‘ah) in a certain dubious or difficult matter (Lane & Aqrab). The expression إفتا rendered in the verse as gives you the decision, is also sometimes used in the sense of permitting or giving permission, as in the well-known hadith الاثم ماحك فی صدرك وان افتاك الناس i.e. a sin is that which pricks in thy mind even if people should say that it is permissible (Lisan). In this case the Quranic clause الله یفتیکم rendered as, Allah gives you His decision, may also be translated as "Allah gives you permission".
Commentary:
The verse which has been differently translated is considered to be a rather difficult one. The decision spoken of in the clause, Allah gives you His decision, refers to what follows in the succeeding verses, i.e. 4:129-131.
The allusion in the words, that which is recited to you in the Book, is to verse 4:4 in the beginning of the present Surah. It was prohibited to Muslims to marry those orphan girls whose rights they could not adequately discharge. ‘Umar, the Holy Prophet’s Second Successor, would not allow the guardians of wealthy and handsome orphan girls to marry them but would insist on better husbands being found for them. On the other hand, if they were not so wealthy or handsome, he recommended them to their guardians for marriage so that, being acquainted with their defects and weaknesses, they might overlook their shortcomings and deal kindly with them. For further instructions about good treatment of orphans; see 4: 6, 7.
Generally speaking the clause, Allah gives you His decision regarding them (women) and so does that which is recited to you in the Book concerning the orphan girls, means that some instructions about women have already been given in the Quran and other instructions follow.
a
4:4.
676
The "decision" is referred to in the following three verses.
677
The allusion in the words, that which is recited to you in the Book, is to the 4th verse of the present Surah. It was prohibited to Muslims to marry those orphan girls whose rights they could not adequately safeguard. ‘Umar, the Second Caliph would not allow the guardians of wealthy and handsome orphan girls to marry them and would insist on other and better husbands being found for them. The verse signifies that some instructions about women have already been given in the Qur’an and that other instructions follow.
677A
Walad which is singular of Wildan is used both for a boy and a girl, but here Wildan signifies girls, marriage with whom is mentioned here.
وَإِنِ ٱمْرَأَةٌ خَافَتْ مِنۢ بَعْلِهَا نُشُوزًا أَوْ إِعْرَاضًا فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْهِمَآ أَن يُصْلِحَا بَيْنَهُمَا صُلْحًا ۚ وَٱلصُّلْحُ خَيْرٌ ۗ وَأُحْضِرَتِ ٱلْأَنفُسُ ٱلشُّحَّ ۚ وَإِن تُحْسِنُوا۟ وَتَتَّقُوا۟ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ خَبِيرًا
4:35.
یعنی عورت یہ دیکھ کر کہ معاملہ لمبا ہو جائے گا اور میری تکلیف ناقابل برداشت ہو جائے گی‘ اس لئے بہتر ہے کہ اپنے حق میں سے کچھ چھوڑ دوں۔ اگر قاضی دیکھے کہ ایسا کرنے میں حرج نہیں تو وہ اس کی اجازت دے سکتا ہے۔
یعنی لوگ بخل کی طرف مائل رہتے ہیں اور خرچ سے خواہ وہ مفید ہو پرہیز کرتے ہیں۔
4:35.
The words, it shall be no sin for them that they be suitably reconciled to each other, constitute a peculiar Quranic expression denoting both exhortation and rebuke. They may be interpreted as something like this: "Do the contending parties think that they would be committing a sin if they became reconciled to each other? It is no sin to do so. On the contrary, it is a commendable thing."
These words give the real cause that often leads to estrangement between husband and wife. It is niggardliness on the part of the husband and covetousness on the part of the wife.
4:35.
Commentary:
The words, it shall be no sin on them that they be suitably reconciled to each other, constitute a peculiar Quranic expression denoting both exhortation and rebuke. They may be interpreted as something like this: "Do the contending parties think that they would be committing a sin if they became reconciled to each other? It is no sin to do so. On the contrary, it is a commendable thing."
The words احضرت الانفس الشح (people are prone to covetousness) literally mean, "souls have been put face to face with covetousness." These words thus give the real cause that often leads to estrangement between husband and wife. It may be expressed as niggardliness on the part of the husband and covetousness on the part of the wife. When the husband does not like his wife, he thinks it a burden to support her. On the other hand, the wife sometimes makes excessive demands on her husband. The verse exhorts both to treat each other equitably and fairly.
The words, and reconciliation is best, embody an appeal to the married couple to live amicably and avoid disagreements; for that is in their own interest in all respects.
a
4:35.
3
یعنی عورت یہ دیکھ کر کہ معاملہ لمبا ہو جائے گا اور میری تکلیف ناقابل برداشت ہو جائے گی‘ اس لئے بہتر ہے کہ اپنے حق میں سے کچھ چھوڑ دوں۔ اگر قاضی دیکھے کہ ایسا کرنے میں حرج نہیں تو وہ اس کی اجازت دے سکتا ہے۔
4
یعنی لوگ بخل کی طرف مائل رہتے ہیں اور خرچ سے خواہ وہ مفید ہو پرہیز کرتے ہیں۔
a
4:35.
594
Commentary:
The words, it shall be no sin on them that they be suitably reconciled to each other, constitute a peculiar Quranic expression denoting both exhortation and rebuke. They may be interpreted as something like this: "Do the contending parties think that they would be committing a sin if they became reconciled to each other? It is no sin to do so. On the contrary, it is a commendable thing."
The words احضرت الانفس الشح (people are prone to covetousness) literally mean, "souls have been put face to face with covetousness." These words thus give the real cause that often leads to estrangement between husband and wife. It may be expressed as niggardliness on the part of the husband and covetousness on the part of the wife. When the husband does not like his wife, he thinks it a burden to support her. On the other hand, the wife sometimes makes excessive demands on her husband. The verse exhorts both to treat each other equitably and fairly.
The words, and reconciliation is best, embody an appeal to the married couple to live amicably and avoid disagreements; for that is in their own interest in all respects.
b
4:35.
678
The words, it shall be no sin for them that they be suitably reconciled to each other, constitute a peculiar Quranic expression denoting both exhortation and rebuke. They may be interpreted as something like this: "Do the contending parties think that they would be committing a sin if they became reconciled to each other? It is no sin to do so. On the contrary, it is a commendable thing."
679
These words give the real cause that often leads to estrangement between husband and wife. It is niggardliness on the part of the husband and covetousness on the part of the wife.
وَلَن تَسْتَطِيعُوٓا۟ أَن تَعْدِلُوا۟ بَيْنَ ٱلنِّسَآءِ وَلَوْ حَرَصْتُمْ ۖ فَلَا تَمِيلُوا۟ كُلَّ ٱلْمَيْلِ فَتَذَرُوهَا كَٱلْمُعَلَّقَةِ ۚ وَإِن تُصْلِحُوا۟ وَتَتَّقُوا۟ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ غَفُورًا رَّحِيمًا
یعنی ظاہری مساوات نہ کرنے کی صورت میں تعدد ازواج سے منع کیا گیا ہے۔ ورنہ نہ باطنی سلوک ایک سا ہوسکتا ہے نہ وہ موجب مناعی ہے۔
4:4.
2:232.
It is humanly impossible for a man to keep perfect balance between his wives in all respects; for instance love being an affair of the heart over which man has no control, a husband cannot be expected to have equal love for all his wives. But he can certainly deal by them with equity in other respects, and this he must do. So acting equitably between one’s wives pertains only to such acts over which one has control. This is the interpretation the Holy Prophet himself put upon this verse.
4:4.
2:232.
Important Words:
معلقة (a thing suspended) is derived from علق. They say علقه i.e. he hung it up or suspended it. علق الامر means, he left the affair suspended, i.e. undecided. معلقه is, therefore, a woman whose husband neither keeps her properly as a wife nor divorces her so that she might marry another man (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The words, And you cannot keep perfect balance between wives, however much you may desire it, mean that it is not humanly possible for a man to keep perfect balance between his different wives in every respect. For instance, love being an affair of the heart over which man has no control, a husband cannot be expected to have equal love for all his wives. But he can certainly treat them with equity in matters of money, time, etc., and this he must do. So acting equitably between the different wives, which has been laid down by Islam as an essential condition for polygamy, pertains only to such overt acts over which man has control. This is the interpretation which the Holy Prophet himself has put on this verse, both through his word and example. ‘A’ishah reports that the Holy Prophet used to treat his wives with equity in all matters over which man can have control and having done this, he used to pray to God, saying: "My Lord, these are my dealings in matters over which I have control; so blame me not for that which is in Thy power and not mine," meaning the feelings of the heart (Dawud, ch. on Nikah). The Holy Prophet is also reported to have said: "If a man has two wives and he is inclined to one of them (neglecting the other), he will rise on the Day of Resurrection with one of his sides having been torn off (Dawud, ch. on Nikah). Thus, both the example and the sayings of the Holy Prophet show that though a husband cannot love his wives equally, he should in his outward treatment, i.e. allotment of time, money, etc. be equally just and fair to all of them. In this connection see also 4:4.
b
4:4.
c
2:232.
350
一个丈夫要在几个妻子之间各方面都维持绝对公平的待遇, 那是非人力所能做到的事情; 例如, 爱情出于内心, 不是一个男人可以控制得了的, 不能指望一个丈夫同等地爱他所有的妻子。但他当然能在其他方面相等对待她们。这一点他必须做到。因此, 只要是在他能力范围以内的, 就得相等对待他所有的妻子。这是穆圣亲自对这节经文的解释。
5
یعنی ظاہری مساوات نہ کرنے کی صورت میں تعدد ازواج سے منع کیا گیا ہے۔ ورنہ نہ باطنی سلوک ایک سا ہوسکتا ہے نہ وہ موجب مناعی ہے۔
a
4:4.
b
2:232.
595
Important Words:
معلقة (a thing suspended) is derived from علق. They say علقه i.e. he hung it up or suspended it. علق الامر means, he left the affair suspended, i.e. undecided. معلقه is, therefore, a woman whose husband neither keeps her properly as a wife nor divorces her so that she might marry another man (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The words, And you cannot keep perfect balance between wives, however much you may desire it, mean that it is not humanly possible for a man to keep perfect balance between his different wives in every respect. For instance, love being an affair of the heart over which man has no control, a husband cannot be expected to have equal love for all his wives. But he can certainly treat them with equity in matters of money, time, etc., and this he must do. So acting equitably between the different wives, which has been laid down by Islam as an essential condition for polygamy, pertains only to such overt acts over which man has control. This is the interpretation which the Holy Prophet himself has put on this verse, both through his word and example. ‘A’ishah reports that the Holy Prophet used to treat his wives with equity in all matters over which man can have control and having done this, he used to pray to God, saying: "My Lord, these are my dealings in matters over which I have control; so blame me not for that which is in Thy power and not mine," meaning the feelings of the heart (Dawud, ch. on Nikah). The Holy Prophet is also reported to have said: "If a man has two wives and he is inclined to one of them (neglecting the other), he will rise on the Day of Resurrection with one of his sides having been torn off (Dawud, ch. on Nikah). Thus, both the example and the sayings of the Holy Prophet show that though a husband cannot love his wives equally, he should in his outward treatment, i.e. allotment of time, money, etc. be equally just and fair to all of them. In this connection see also 4:4.
a
4:4.
b
2:232.
680
It is humanly impossible for a man to keep perfect balance between his wives in all respects; for instance love being an affair of the heart over which man has no control, a husband cannot be expected to have equal love for all his wives. But he can certainly deal by them with equity in other respects, and this he must do. So acting equitably between one’s wives pertains only to such acts over which one has control. This is the interpretation the Holy Prophet himself put upon this verse.
وَإِن يَتَفَرَّقَا يُغْنِ ٱللَّهُ كُلًّا مِّن سَعَتِهِۦ ۚ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ وَٰسِعًا حَكِيمًا
如果丈夫和妻子虽然竭尽全力想和睦相处, 但实在觉得难以生活在一起, 非要离异不可, 安拉答应给双方更合适的配偶。可是根据 «古兰经», 离婚是 “在所有允许的事情中, 是安拉最不愿见到的” (دَاؤُدْ كِتَابُ الطَّلَاق, Da’ud, Kitabut-Talaq)。
If, in spite of the husband and the wife having done their utmost to live amicably, they find that they cannot pull on together, and separation takes place, then God promises to provide for both parties more suitable matches. But according to Islam divorce is "Of all permissible things most hateful in the eyes of God" (Dawud, ch. on Talaq).
Commentary:
If, in spite of the husband and the wife having done their best to live amicably, they find that they cannot pull on together, and separation takes place, then God promises to provide for both parties out of His beneficence, i.e. they may find other and more suitable matches. How Islam looks upon divorce is vividly portrayed in a well-known hadith of the Holy Prophet, viz. "Of all permissible things divorce is most hateful in the eyes of God" (Dawud, ch. on Talaq).
351
如果丈夫和妻子虽然竭尽全力想和睦相处, 但实在觉得难以生活在一起, 非要离异不可, 安拉答应给双方更合适的配偶。可是根据 «古兰经», 离婚是 “在所有允许的事情中, 是安拉最不愿见到的” (دَاؤُدْ كِتَابُ الطَّلَاق, Da’ud, Kitabut-Talaq)。
596
Commentary:
If, in spite of the husband and the wife having done their best to live amicably, they find that they cannot pull on together, and separation takes place, then God promises to provide for both parties out of His beneficence, i.e. they may find other and more suitable matches. How Islam looks upon divorce is vividly portrayed in a well-known hadith of the Holy Prophet, viz. "Of all permissible things divorce is most hateful in the eyes of God" (Dawud, ch. on Talaq).
681
If, in spite of the husband and the wife having done their utmost to live amicably, they find that they cannot pull on together, and separation takes place, then God promises to provide for both parties more suitable matches. But according to Islam divorce is "Of all permissible things most hateful in the eyes of God" (Dawud, ch. on Talaq).
وَلِلَّهِ مَا فِى ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَمَا فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ ۗ وَلَقَدْ وَصَّيْنَا ٱلَّذِينَ أُوتُوا۟ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ مِن قَبْلِكُمْ وَإِيَّاكُمْ أَنِ ٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ ۚ وَإِن تَكْفُرُوا۟ فَإِنَّ لِلَّهِ مَا فِى ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَمَا فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ ۚ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ غَنِيًّا حَمِيدًا
See 4:127.
42:14.
See 4:127.
42:14.
Important Words:
حمید (Praiseworthy) is derived from حمد which means, he praised or eulogized him; or he praised him for something depending on the latter’s will. Thus the describing of a pearl as lustrous is not حمد but مدح (see also 1:2). حمید or محمود with which it is almost synonymous, means, praised, eulogized or commended; praise-worthy or laudable. الحمید which is one of the names of God, means, He Who is praised or is praiseworthy in every case (Lane).
Commentary:
See the next verse.
a
4:127.
b
42:14.
a
See 4:127.
b
42:14.
597
Important Words:
حمید (Praiseworthy) is derived from حمد which means, he praised or eulogized him; or he praised him for something depending on the latter’s will. Thus the describing of a pearl as lustrous is not حمد but مدح (see also 1:2). حمید or محمود with which it is almost synonymous, means, praised, eulogized or commended; praise-worthy or laudable. الحمید which is one of the names of God, means, He Who is praised or is praiseworthy in every case (Lane).
Commentary:
See the next verse.
c
See 4:127.
d
42:14.
وَلِلَّهِ مَا فِى ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَمَا فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ ۚ وَكَفَىٰ بِٱللَّهِ وَكِيلًا
4:127.
See 4:127.
See 4:127.
Commentary:
The expression, And to Allah belongs whatever is in the heavens and whatever is in the earth, is repeated thrice in this and the preceding verse to emphasize the fact that God will amply reward and protect from all harm and loss those who sincerely obey His commandments, because He is the Lord and Master of all that is in the heavens and the earth and because He is the Guardian over everything, so that He is in a position to help and reward those who act righteously and punish those who defy and break His laws.
c
4:127.
a
See 4:127.
598
Commentary:
The expression, And to Allah belongs whatever is in the heavens and whatever is in the earth, is repeated thrice in this and the preceding verse to emphasize the fact that God will amply reward and protect from all harm and loss those who sincerely obey His commandments, because He is the Lord and Master of all that is in the heavens and the earth and because He is the Guardian over everything, so that He is in a position to help and reward those who act righteously and punish those who defy and break His laws.
a
See 4:127.
إِن يَشَأْ يُذْهِبْكُمْ أَيُّهَا ٱلنَّاسُ وَيَأْتِ بِـَٔاخَرِينَ ۚ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَىٰ ذَٰلِكَ قَدِيرًا
مَّن كَانَ يُرِيدُ ثَوَابَ ٱلدُّنْيَا فَعِندَ ٱللَّهِ ثَوَابُ ٱلدُّنْيَا وَٱلْءَاخِرَةِ ۚ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ سَمِيعًۢا بَصِيرًا
2:201, 202; 42:21.
2:201, 202; 42:21.
2:201, 202; 42:21.
Commentary:
The verse contains a beautiful exhortation to the people to seek after the good things of the world to come, along with those of the present. When God can bestow on man in an ample measure both the good things of this world and the blessings of the life to come, why should man neglect to strive after both, particularly the good things of the next world which are far superior and are everlasting. Being All-Hearing, God hears our prayers and we can get what we desire by praying to Him; and being All-Seeing, He knows our needs and requirements and He can satisfy them even without our asking for them, in case we are not aware of any of our needs.
d
2:201, 202; 42:21.
b
2:201, 202; 42:21.
599
Commentary:
The verse contains a beautiful exhortation to the people to seek after the good things of the world to come, along with those of the present. When God can bestow on man in an ample measure both the good things of this world and the blessings of the life to come, why should man neglect to strive after both, particularly the good things of the next world which are far superior and are everlasting. Being All-Hearing, God hears our prayers and we can get what we desire by praying to Him; and being All-Seeing, He knows our needs and requirements and He can satisfy them even without our asking for them, in case we are not aware of any of our needs.
b
2:201, 202; 42:21.
۞ يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ كُونُوا۟ قَوَّٰمِينَ بِٱلْقِسْطِ شُهَدَآءَ لِلَّهِ وَلَوْ عَلَىٰٓ أَنفُسِكُمْ أَوِ ٱلْوَٰلِدَيْنِ وَٱلْأَقْرَبِينَ ۚ إِن يَكُنْ غَنِيًّا أَوْ فَقِيرًا فَٱللَّهُ أَوْلَىٰ بِهِمَا ۖ فَلَا تَتَّبِعُوا۟ ٱلْهَوَىٰٓ أَن تَعْدِلُوا۟ ۚ وَإِن تَلْوُۥٓا۟ أَوْ تُعْرِضُوا۟ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ خَبِيرًا
یعنی خداتعالیٰ کی خاطر سچی گواہی دیا کرو۔
5:9.
The expression, "against yourselves" may also signify "against your people or kith and kin". The words "parents and kindred" have been added to emphasize the force of the injunction.
The words also mean, lest you deviate.
5:9.
Important Words:
اولی (more regardful) is derived from ولی. They say ولیه i.e. he was or became near unto him; he loved him and was a friend to him. ولی الشیء means, he managed and looked after the thing. الولی means, friend; one who loves; helper; one who looks after your affairs. اولی means, more entitled, having a better right (Aqrab). They say فلان اولی بکذا i.e. such a one is more entitled to such a thing or has a better right or better title or claim to it; or is more deserving or worthy of it; or is more competent or fit for it (Lane). اولی also means, more regardful or more thoughtful or more considerate (Kashshaf & Muhit).
Commentary:
As in the settlement of differences between husband and wife, a subject dealt with in the preceding verses, witnesses have often to be called in, therefore the Quran here fittingly turns to that subject.
The expression, be witnesses for Allah, means that one should bear witness truly for the sake of God and in strict accordance with His injunctions. The words علی انفسکم rendered as "against yourselves" may also be rendered as "against your people or against your kith and kin", signifying that one should give true evidence in all cases, even against the members of one’s own community or one’s near relations or even when one’s own honour or property is at stake.
The words, parents or kindred, have been added to increase the force of the injunction, i.e. you should give true evidence not only against the members of your own community, but even against those who are closely related to you by blood—your own parents and others near and dear. As one has to more often bear witness against other people than against near relatives, therefore, the former class of persons has been put before the latter.
e
5:9.
352
“不利于你们自己” 这一用语, 也可意指 “不利于你们的宗教或亲戚朋友。” “父母和亲戚” 这几个字, 是加上去强调这一旨令的。
1
یعنی خداتعالیٰ کی خاطر سچی گواہی دیا کرو۔
a
5:9.
600
Important Words:
اولی (more regardful) is derived from ولی. They say ولیه i.e. he was or became near unto him; he loved him and was a friend to him. ولی الشیء means, he managed and looked after the thing. الولی means, friend; one who loves; helper; one who looks after your affairs. اولی means, more entitled, having a better right (Aqrab). They say فلان اولی بکذا i.e. such a one is more entitled to such a thing or has a better right or better title or claim to it; or is more deserving or worthy of it; or is more competent or fit for it (Lane). اولی also means, more regardful or more thoughtful or more considerate (Kashshaf & Muhit).
Commentary:
As in the settlement of differences between husband and wife, a subject dealt with in the preceding verses, witnesses have often to be called in, therefore the Quran here fittingly turns to that subject.
The expression, be witnesses for Allah, means that one should bear witness truly for the sake of God and in strict accordance with His injunctions. The words علی انفسکم rendered as "against yourselves" may also be rendered as "against your people or against your kith and kin", signifying that one should give true evidence in all cases, even against the members of one’s own community or one’s near relations or even when one’s own honour or property is at stake.
The words, parents or kindred, have been added to increase the force of the injunction, i.e. you should give true evidence not only against the members of your own community, but even against those who are closely related to you by blood—your own parents and others near and dear. As one has to more often bear witness against other people than against near relatives, therefore, the former class of persons has been put before the latter.
c
5:9.
682
The expression, "against yourselves" may also signify "against your people or kith and kin". The words "parents and kindred" have been added to emphasize the force of the injunction.
682A
The words also mean, lest you deviate.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوٓا۟ ءَامِنُوا۟ بِٱللَّهِ وَرَسُولِهِۦ وَٱلْكِتَٰبِ ٱلَّذِى نَزَّلَ عَلَىٰ رَسُولِهِۦ وَٱلْكِتَٰبِ ٱلَّذِىٓ أَنزَلَ مِن قَبْلُ ۚ وَمَن يَكْفُرْ بِٱللَّهِ وَمَلَٰٓئِكَتِهِۦ وَكُتُبِهِۦ وَرُسُلِهِۦ وَٱلْيَوْمِ ٱلْءَاخِرِ فَقَدْ ضَلَّ ضَلَٰلًۢا بَعِيدًا
2:5, 137; 4:163: 5:60.
4:151.
4:117.
O ye who profess to be believers show by your deeds and actions that your faith is genuine and firmly founded.
2:5, 137; 4:163; 5:60.
4:151.
4:117.
Commentary:
In the clause: O ye who believe, believe in Allah and His Messenger… the first-mentioned belief refers to lip-profession and the second to true and genuine belief which really matters. The words thus show that sometimes expressions like "O ye who believe" or "believers" may be used for those who profess to be believers in Islam but do not live up to its teachings by carrying out faithfully its precepts into practice. Their assertion is a mere lip-profession that carries no weight.
a
2:5, 137; 4:163: 5:60.
b
4:151.
c
4:117.
a
2:5, 137; 4:163; 5:60.
b
4:151.
c
4:117.
601
Commentary:
In the clause: O ye who believe, believe in Allah and His Messenger… the first-mentioned belief refers to lip-profession and the second to true and genuine belief which really matters. The words thus show that sometimes expressions like "O ye who believe" or "believers" may be used for those who profess to be believers in Islam but do not live up to its teachings by carrying out faithfully its precepts into practice. Their assertion is a mere lip-profession that carries no weight.
a
2:5, 137; 4:163: 5:60.
b
4:151.
c
4:117.
683
O ye who profess to be believers show by your deeds and actions that your faith is genuine and firmly founded.
إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ ثُمَّ كَفَرُوا۟ ثُمَّ ءَامَنُوا۟ ثُمَّ كَفَرُوا۟ ثُمَّ ٱزْدَادُوا۟ كُفْرًا لَّمْ يَكُنِ ٱللَّهُ لِيَغْفِرَ لَهُمْ وَلَا لِيَهْدِيَهُمْ سَبِيلًۢا
3:91; 63:4.
3:91; 63:4.
Commentary:
The verse incidentally refutes the allegation that apostasy in Islam is punishable with death. If such had been the law of Islam, apostates would have had no opportunity of apostatizing from Islam again and again, as appears from this verse. For an exposition of the teachings of Islam about apostasy see "Islam and the Law relating to Apostasy" (published from Qadian).
The verse does not signify that after so many successive acts of apostasy the repentance of an apostate is not accepted. Rather it is intended to point out that even after repeated acts of apostasy the door of repentance remains open. That door is closed only when, after apostatizing, an apostate goes on "increasing in disbelief" as the verse clearly puts it.
d
3:91; 63:4.
d
3:91; 63:4.
602
Commentary:
The verse incidentally refutes the allegation that apostasy in Islam is punishable with death. If such had been the law of Islam, apostates would have had no opportunity of apostatizing from Islam again and again, as appears from this verse. For an exposition of the teachings of Islam about apostasy see "Islam and the Law relating to Apostasy" (published from Qadian).
The verse does not signify that after so many successive acts of apostasy the repentance of an apostate is not accepted. Rather it is intended to point out that even after repeated acts of apostasy the door of repentance remains open. That door is closed only when, after apostatizing, an apostate goes on "increasing in disbelief" as the verse clearly puts it.
d
3:91; 63:4.
684
The verse incidentally refutes the baseless allegation that apostasy in Islam is punishable with death.
بَشِّرِ ٱلْمُنَٰفِقِينَ بِأَنَّ لَهُمْ عَذَابًا أَلِيمًا
9:3.
9:3.
9:3.
e
9:3.
a
9:3.
e
9:3.
ٱلَّذِينَ يَتَّخِذُونَ ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ أَوْلِيَآءَ مِن دُونِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ ۚ أَيَبْتَغُونَ عِندَهُمُ ٱلْعِزَّةَ فَإِنَّ ٱلْعِزَّةَ لِلَّهِ جَمِيعًا
f
3:29, 119; 4:145.
g
10:66; 35:11.
b
3:29, 119; 4:145.
c
10:66; 35:11.
603
Commentary:
The verse gives a most graphic and painful portrait of many present-day Muslims.
f
3:29, 119; 4:145.
g
10:66; 35:11.
وَقَدْ نَزَّلَ عَلَيْكُمْ فِى ٱلْكِتَٰبِ أَنْ إِذَا سَمِعْتُمْ ءَايَٰتِ ٱللَّهِ يُكْفَرُ بِهَا وَيُسْتَهْزَأُ بِهَا فَلَا تَقْعُدُوا۟ مَعَهُمْ حَتَّىٰ يَخُوضُوا۟ فِى حَدِيثٍ غَيْرِهِۦٓ ۚ إِنَّكُمْ إِذًا مِّثْلُهُمْ ۗ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ جَامِعُ ٱلْمُنَٰفِقِينَ وَٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ فِى جَهَنَّمَ جَمِيعًا
6:69.
6:69.
The reference in the words, He has already revealed to you in the Book, is to 6:69 which was revealed at Mecca prior to the verse under comment; yet 6:69 has been placed after it in the existing arrangement of the Qur’an which shows that the present arrangement of the Quranic verses is not the same in which they were revealed.
The underlying principle in the injunction contained in the present verse is threefold: (1) To emphasize the seriousness and importance of religious matters; (2) to protect the believers against the demoralizing influences of the disbelievers’ company and (3) to engender and promote feelings of pious jealousy for religion in the hearts of Muslims.
6:69.
Commentary:
The reference in the words, has already revealed to you, is to 6:69 where we read, And when thou seest those who engage in vain discourse concerning Our Signs, then turn thou away from them until they enter into a discourse other than that; and if Satan cause thee to forget, then sit not, after recollection, with the unjust people.
The Surah in which the above-quoted verse occurs was revealed at Mecca, i.e. before the present Surah which is a Medinite one. This clearly shows that the present order of the verses and the Surahs of the Quran is not the same as that in which they were revealed. The reference in the words, He has already revealed to you in the Book, is, as stated above, to 6:69 which was revealed prior to the verse under comment; yet the former has been placed after the latter in the existing arrangement of the Quran.
It is also worthy of note here that while referring to a verse already revealed, the verse under comment uses the words نزل علیکم (has revealed to you) and not یتلی علیکم (is recited to you). The latter expression, i.e. "is recited to you" has been used in 4:128 with reference to 4:4 which had not only been already revealed but has also been placed before the former, i.e. 4:128, in the existing order of the Quran. Again 6:146 makes an allusion to 16:116 in the words اوحی الی (has been revealed to me). Thus, the fact that the Quran uses the words نزل and اوحی for alluding to verses that were revealed earlier but were to be placed later and the word یتلی for alluding to those verses that were not only revealed earlier but were also to be placed earlier, clearly shows that the present order was not devised by the Holy Prophet but was devised and revealed by God Himself.
Another noteworthy point that emerges from this verse is that when an address is made to the Holy Prophet, it is not always meant for him personally but is often meant for his followers, i.e. Muslims in general. In 6:69, the commandment appears to have been addressed to the Holy Prophet, because in that verse all the pronouns and verbs have been used in the second person singular number; but the verse under comment, while referring to the commandment contained in 6:69, clearly addresses Muslims generally, for the words used are, He has already revealed to you in the Book that, when you hear the Signs of God being denied and mocked at, sit not with them, which establishes the fact that the addressees in the commandment embodied in both these verses are the same, i.e. Muslims. If the pronoun "thou" in 6:69 was meant for the Holy Prophet himself, the present verse, while referring to the selfsame commandment, could not address Muslims generally by using the pronoun "you", particularly when besides 6:69 there is no verse in the Quran to which the verse under comment can possibly refer.
The substitution in the present verse of the words لا تقعدوا (sit not with them) for the words اعرض (turn away from them), occurring in 6:69, indicates that the latter expression as used at some places in the Quran is meant to convey the sense of "severing connection with".
The underlying principle in the injunction contained in the present verse is threefold: (1) to emphasize the seriousness and importance of religious matters; (2) to protect the Faithful against the demoralizing influences of disbelievers; and (3) to engender and promote feelings of pious jealousy for religion in the hearts of Muslims.
h
6:69.
d
6:69.
604
Commentary:
The reference in the words, has already revealed to you, is to 6:69 where we read, And when thou seest those who engage in vain discourse concerning Our Signs, then turn thou away from them until they enter into a discourse other than that; and if Satan cause thee to forget, then sit not, after recollection, with the unjust people.
The Surah in which the above-quoted verse occurs was revealed at Mecca, i.e. before the present Surah which is a Medinite one. This clearly shows that the present order of the verses and the Surahs of the Quran is not the same as that in which they were revealed. The reference in the words, He has already revealed to you in the Book, is, as stated above, to 6:69 which was revealed prior to the verse under comment; yet the former has been placed after the latter in the existing arrangement of the Quran.
It is also worthy of note here that while referring to a verse already revealed, the verse under comment uses the words نزل علیکم (has revealed to you) and not یتلی علیکم (is recited to you). The latter expression, i.e. "is recited to you" has been used in 4:128 with reference to 4:4 which had not only been already revealed but has also been placed before the former, i.e. 4:128, in the existing order of the Quran. Again 6:146 makes an allusion to 16:116 in the words اوحی الی (has been revealed to me). Thus, the fact that the Quran uses the words نزل and اوحی for alluding to verses that were revealed earlier but were to be placed later and the word یتلی for alluding to those verses that were not only revealed earlier but were also to be placed earlier, clearly shows that the present order was not devised by the Holy Prophet but was devised and revealed by God Himself.
Another noteworthy point that emerges from this verse is that when an address is made to the Holy Prophet, it is not always meant for him personally but is often meant for his followers, i.e. Muslims in general. In 6:69, the commandment appears to have been addressed to the Holy Prophet, because in that verse all the pronouns and verbs have been used in the second person singular number; but the verse under comment, while referring to the commandment contained in 6:69, clearly addresses Muslims generally, for the words used are, He has already revealed to you in the Book that, when you hear the Signs of God being denied and mocked at, sit not with them, which establishes the fact that the addressees in the commandment embodied in both these verses are the same, i.e. Muslims. If the pronoun "thou" in 6:69 was meant for the Holy Prophet himself, the present verse, while referring to the selfsame commandment, could not address Muslims generally by using the pronoun "you", particularly when besides 6:69 there is no verse in the Quran to which the verse under comment can possibly refer.
The substitution in the present verse of the words لا تقعدوا (sit not with them) for the words اعرض (turn away from them), occurring in 6:69, indicates that the latter expression as used at some places in the Quran is meant to convey the sense of "severing connection with".
The underlying principle in the injunction contained in the present verse is threefold: (1) to emphasize the seriousness and importance of religious matters; (2) to protect the Faithful against the demoralizing influences of disbelievers; and (3) to engender and promote feelings of pious jealousy for religion in the hearts of Muslims.
a
6:69.
685
The reference in the words, He has already revealed to you in the Book, is to 6:69 which was revealed at Mecca prior to the verse under comment; yet 6:69 has been placed after it in the existing arrangement of the Qur’an which shows that the present arrangement of the Quranic verses is not the same in which they were revealed.
686
The underlying principle in the injunction contained in the present verse is threefold: (1) To emphasize the seriousness and importance of religious matters; (2) to protect the believers against the demoralizing influences of the disbelievers’ company and (3) to engender and promote feelings of pious jealousy for religion in the hearts of Muslims.
ٱلَّذِينَ يَتَرَبَّصُونَ بِكُمْ فَإِن كَانَ لَكُمْ فَتْحٌ مِّنَ ٱللَّهِ قَالُوٓا۟ أَلَمْ نَكُن مَّعَكُمْ وَإِن كَانَ لِلْكَٰفِرِينَ نَصِيبٌ قَالُوٓا۟ أَلَمْ نَسْتَحْوِذْ عَلَيْكُمْ وَنَمْنَعْكُم مِّنَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ ۚ فَٱللَّهُ يَحْكُمُ بَيْنَكُمْ يَوْمَ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ ۗ وَلَن يَجْعَلَ ٱللَّهُ لِلْكَٰفِرِينَ عَلَى ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ سَبِيلًا
9:98; 57:15.
یعنی اس سے پہلے ایک موقع پر کیا مسلمان غالب نہیں آگئے تھے۔ جو ہماری ہی فتح تھی۔ مگر ہم نے ان سے سفارشیں کرکے تم کو بچا لیا۔
9:98; 57:15.
9:98; 57:15.
Important Words:
نستحوذ علیکم (get the better of you). نستحوذ is derived from حاذ. They say حاذہ i.e. he guarded or protected it and took care of it. حاذ الابل means, he drove the camels quickly or he gained mastery over the camels and collected them together. استحوذ علیهmeans, he overcame or mastered or gained mastery of him or it; he got the better of him or it (Taj).
نمنعکم (protected you) is derived from منع i.e. (1) he prevented or hindered: (2) he denied or refused (3) he protected or guarded (Lane).
Commentary:
The words, did we not get the better of you, are addressed by the hypocrites to the disbelievers and mean "we had you in our power but we spared you". Similarly, the words, and protect you against the believers, may be interpreted something like this: "We separated ourselves from the Muslims with the result that they became weak and you were thus saved from them." Or the words may mean, "some of the faint-hearted among you wished to make peace with the Muslims, but we prevented them from doing so, and now the result is that you are victorious." In the latter case the clause نمنعکم من المؤمنینwould be translated as "we prevented you from making peace with the believers".
The last sentence of the verse means that the hypocrites will never be able to bring a valid objection against Muslims.
a
9:98; 57:15.
1
یعنی اس سے پہلے ایک موقع پر کیا مسلمان غالب نہیں آگئے تھے۔ جو ہماری ہی فتح تھی۔ مگر ہم نے ان سے سفارشیں کرکے تم کو بچا لیا۔
a
9:98; 57:15.
605
Important Words:
نستحوذ علیکم (get the better of you). نستحوذ is derived from حاذ. They say حاذہ i.e. he guarded or protected it and took care of it. حاذ الابل means, he drove the camels quickly or he gained mastery over the camels and collected them together. استحوذ علیهmeans, he overcame or mastered or gained mastery of him or it; he got the better of him or it (Taj).
نمنعکم (protected you) is derived from منع i.e. (1) he prevented or hindered: (2) he denied or refused (3) he protected or guarded (Lane).
Commentary:
The words, did we not get the better of you, are addressed by the hypocrites to the disbelievers and mean "we had you in our power but we spared you". Similarly, the words, and protect you against the believers, may be interpreted something like this: "We separated ourselves from the Muslims with the result that they became weak and you were thus saved from them." Or the words may mean, "some of the faint-hearted among you wished to make peace with the Muslims, but we prevented them from doing so, and now the result is that you are victorious." In the latter case the clause نمنعکم من المؤمنینwould be translated as "we prevented you from making peace with the believers".
The last sentence of the verse means that the hypocrites will never be able to bring a valid objection against Muslims.
b
9:98; 57:15.
إِنَّ ٱلْمُنَٰفِقِينَ يُخَٰدِعُونَ ٱللَّهَ وَهُوَ خَٰدِعُهُمْ وَإِذَا قَامُوٓا۟ إِلَى ٱلصَّلَوٰةِ قَامُوا۟ كُسَالَىٰ يُرَآءُونَ ٱلنَّاسَ وَلَا يَذْكُرُونَ ٱللَّهَ إِلَّا قَلِيلًا
2:10.
9:54.
It is not God but the Holy Prophet whom, in reality, the hypocrites seek to deceive because the Prophet is an agent of God and all plots hatched against him are really so many plots hatched to frustrate the purpose of God. Therefore God Himself will punish them for their deceitful conduct. See also 2:16.
2:10.
9:54.
Important Words:
For the meaning of the word یخادعون and خادعھم see 2:10. The latter expression, though similar in root and construction, means "will punish them for their deception" and not "will deceive them". See also 2:16.
Commentary:
It is not the Holy Prophet but God Himself Whom in reality the hypocrites seek to deceive because the Prophet is only an agent of God and all plots hatched against him are really so many plots hatched to frustrate the purpose of God. Therefore, He Himself will punish them for their deceitful conduct.
Laziness and slowness are the characteristics of a hypocrite. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said, "The most burdensome of Prayers for the hypocrites are the late-evening and morning Prayers"; and "A hypocrite waits until the sun is about to set; then he gets up and hurriedly performs four Rak‘at of late-afternoon Prayer, and remembers God but little" (Muslim). It is only true faith and certainty that can engender in man the spirit of eagerness to live up to one’s conviction.
b
2:10.
c
9:54.
a
2:10.
b
9:54.
606
Important Words:
For the meaning of the word یخادعون and خادعھم see 2:10. The latter expression, though similar in root and construction, means "will punish them for their deception" and not "will deceive them". See also 2:16.
Commentary:
It is not the Holy Prophet but God Himself Whom in reality the hypocrites seek to deceive because the Prophet is only an agent of God and all plots hatched against him are really so many plots hatched to frustrate the purpose of God. Therefore, He Himself will punish them for their deceitful conduct.
Laziness and slowness are the characteristics of a hypocrite. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said, "The most burdensome of Prayers for the hypocrites are the late-evening and morning Prayers"; and "A hypocrite waits until the sun is about to set; then he gets up and hurriedly performs four Rak‘at of late-afternoon Prayer, and remembers God but little" (Muslim). It is only true faith and certainty that can engender in man the spirit of eagerness to live up to one’s conviction.
a
2:10.
b
9:54.
687
It is not God but the Holy Prophet whom, in reality, the hypocrites seek to deceive because the Prophet is an agent of God and all plots hatched against him are really so many plots hatched to frustrate the purpose of God. Therefore God Himself will punish them for their deceitful conduct. See also 2:16.
مُّذَبْذَبِينَ بَيْنَ ذَٰلِكَ لَآ إِلَىٰ هَٰٓؤُلَآءِ وَلَآ إِلَىٰ هَٰٓؤُلَآءِ ۚ وَمَن يُضْلِلِ ٱللَّهُ فَلَن تَجِدَ لَهُۥ سَبِيلًا
آیت میں اَضَلَّ کا لفظ ہے۔ جس کے ایک معنے ہلاک کرنے کے بھی ہیں۔ (اقرب)
The expression means, "between belief and disbelief" or "between believers and disbelievers".
Important Words:
مذبذبین (wavering) which is the plural of مذبذب is derived from ذب. They say ذب عنه meaning, he repelled from him, i.e. he defended him. ذبذب الشیء means, he made the thing move to and fro; he put it in a state of motion, commotion or agitation. ذبذبه means, he or it made him confounded or perplexed so that he could not know his right course; he left him wavering, vacillating, going to and fro. تذبذب الشیء means, the thing dangled or moved to and fro; or was in a state of motion or commotion. مذبذب means, driven away or repelled from this side and that; wavering or vacillating between two persons or parties or things, not attaching oneself steadily to either (Lane & Aqrab). Another قراءة (reading) of مذبذین is متذبذبین and yet another مذبذبین (mudhabdhibin) with different vowel point at the second ذ (Kashshaf).
The expression بین ذالك (between this and that) means, between belief and disbelief or between believers and disbelievers.
Commentary:
The verse very aptly describes the condition of the hypocrites. To quote a well-known Indian maxim, they have their feet in two separate boats. A hypocrite thinks himself to be acting wisely (2:14) but his action is really the height of folly.
2
آیت میں اَضَلَّ کا لفظ ہے۔ جس کے ایک معنے ہلاک کرنے کے بھی ہیں۔ (اقرب)
607
Important Words:
مذبذبین (wavering) which is the plural of مذبذب is derived from ذب. They say ذب عنه meaning, he repelled from him, i.e. he defended him. ذبذب الشیء means, he made the thing move to and fro; he put it in a state of motion, commotion or agitation. ذبذبه means, he or it made him confounded or perplexed so that he could not know his right course; he left him wavering, vacillating, going to and fro. تذبذب الشیء means, the thing dangled or moved to and fro; or was in a state of motion or commotion. مذبذب means, driven away or repelled from this side and that; wavering or vacillating between two persons or parties or things, not attaching oneself steadily to either (Lane & Aqrab). Another قراءة (reading) of مذبذین is متذبذبین and yet another مذبذبین (mudhabdhibin) with different vowel point at the second ذ (Kashshaf).
The expression بین ذالك (between this and that) means, between belief and disbelief or between believers and disbelievers.
Commentary:
The verse very aptly describes the condition of the hypocrites. To quote a well-known Indian maxim, they have their feet in two separate boats. A hypocrite thinks himself to be acting wisely (2:14) but his action is really the height of folly.
688
The expression means, "between belief and disbelief" or "between believers and disbelievers".
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ لَا تَتَّخِذُوا۟ ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ أَوْلِيَآءَ مِن دُونِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ ۚ أَتُرِيدُونَ أَن تَجْعَلُوا۟ لِلَّهِ عَلَيْكُمْ سُلْطَٰنًا مُّبِينًا
3:29, 119; 4:140.
3:29, 119; 4:140.
3:29, 119; 4:140.
Commentary:
He who makes friends with disbelievers when believers are engaged in a life-and-death struggle with them, helps the cause of disbelief against Islam and is thus sure to draw upon himself the wrath of God.
The expression, in preference to believers, is added to heighten the folly of the act.
d
3:29, 119; 4:140.
a
3:29, 119; 4:140.
608
Commentary:
He who makes friends with disbelievers when believers are engaged in a life-and-death struggle with them, helps the cause of disbelief against Islam and is thus sure to draw upon himself the wrath of God.
The expression, in preference to believers, is added to heighten the folly of the act.
c
3:29, 119; 4:140.
إِنَّ ٱلْمُنَٰفِقِينَ فِى ٱلدَّرْكِ ٱلْأَسْفَلِ مِنَ ٱلنَّارِ وَلَن تَجِدَ لَهُمْ نَصِيرًا
The Qur’an’s strong denunciation of the hypocrites is a clear refutation of the charge that it exhorts its followers to spread Islam by means of the sword. If a man is forced to accept Islam against his will, he will never make a sincere believer.
Important Words:
درك (depth). They say, درك المطر i.e. the rain fell in close consecutiveness. ادرك الشیء means, he attained, reached or overtook the thing; he sought or pursued and attained it. درك means, the act of attaining, or overtaking; the attainment or acquisition of an object; a consequence; an evil consequence; the bottom or lowest depth of a thing or of anything deep as of a well or sea. درك signifies, a stage counting downwards whereas درج is a stage upwards (Lane & Aqrab).
الاسفل (lowest) is both comparative and superlative degree from سافل meaning, low or base or vile. اسفل means, lower or lowest, both physically and in rank (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The Quran’s strong denunciation of the hypocrites is a clear refutation of the charge brought against it that it exhorts its followers to spread Islam by means of the sword. If a man is forced to accept Islam against his will, he can never make a sincere believer. In other words, such a one will be a hypocrite and the last thing that can be alleged against the Quran is that it enjoins its followers to augment their numbers by admitting hypocrites into their fold.
The hypocrites will be placed in the lowest depth of Hell, because they combine the sin of disbelief with
that of hypocrisy. The lowest depth does not necessarily signify a depth which is the physically lowest, but a depth which is the hardest in torment and is meant for offenders of the lowest type.
609
Important Words:
درك (depth). They say, درك المطر i.e. the rain fell in close consecutiveness. ادرك الشیء means, he attained, reached or overtook the thing; he sought or pursued and attained it. درك means, the act of attaining, or overtaking; the attainment or acquisition of an object; a consequence; an evil consequence; the bottom or lowest depth of a thing or of anything deep as of a well or sea. درك signifies, a stage counting downwards whereas درج is a stage upwards (Lane & Aqrab).
الاسفل (lowest) is both comparative and superlative degree from سافل meaning, low or base or vile. اسفل means, lower or lowest, both physically and in rank (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The Quran’s strong denunciation of the hypocrites is a clear refutation of the charge brought against it that it exhorts its followers to spread Islam by means of the sword. If a man is forced to accept Islam against his will, he can never make a sincere believer. In other words, such a one will be a hypocrite and the last thing that can be alleged against the Quran is that it enjoins its followers to augment their numbers by admitting hypocrites into their fold.
The hypocrites will be placed in the lowest depth of Hell, because they combine the sin of disbelief with
that of hypocrisy. The lowest depth does not necessarily signify a depth which is the physically lowest, but a depth which is the hardest in torment and is meant for offenders of the lowest type.
689
The Qur’an’s strong denunciation of the hypocrites is a clear refutation of the charge that it exhorts its followers to spread Islam by means of the sword. If a man is forced to accept Islam against his will, he will never make a sincere believer.
إِلَّا ٱلَّذِينَ تَابُوا۟ وَأَصْلَحُوا۟ وَٱعْتَصَمُوا۟ بِٱللَّهِ وَأَخْلَصُوا۟ دِينَهُمْ لِلَّهِ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ مَعَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ ۖ وَسَوْفَ يُؤْتِ ٱللَّهُ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ أَجْرًا عَظِيمًا
See 2:161.
3:102.
Important Words:
For the meaning of مع see note on 4:70.
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it helps definitely to determine the meaning of the word مع (among) which does not, and indeed cannot, convey here the sense of "with", for the obvious reason that the penitent from among the hypocrites are not only to be reckoned "with the believers as mere companions" but are to become members and, as it were, part and parcel, of the Muslim community, being definitely reckoned among them. The verse also hints that the door of repentance is open even for the hypocrites who have been so strongly condemned in the foregoing verse.
a
2:161.
b
3:102.
a
See 2:161.
b
3:102.
610
Important Words:
For the meaning of مع see note on 4:70.
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it helps definitely to determine the meaning of the word مع (among) which does not, and indeed cannot, convey here the sense of "with", for the obvious reason that the penitent from among the hypocrites are not only to be reckoned "with the believers as mere companions" but are to become members and, as it were, part and parcel, of the Muslim community, being definitely reckoned among them. The verse also hints that the door of repentance is open even for the hypocrites who have been so strongly condemned in the foregoing verse.
a
See 2:161.
b
3:102.
مَّا يَفْعَلُ ٱللَّهُ بِعَذَابِكُمْ إِن شَكَرْتُمْ وَءَامَنتُمْ ۚ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ شَاكِرًا عَلِيمًا
2:159.
Shukr on the part of God consists in forgiving a person or commending him or regarding him with satisfaction, goodwill or favour and hence necessarily recompensing him or rewarding him (Lane).
2:159.
Commentary:
شکر (gratitude) on the part of man is to have a due sense of the favours of God and render thanks for them both by words of mouth and by action; and on the part of God, it is to give proper rewards to men for their obedience and righteousness. See also 1:2.
c
2:159.
353
شُكْر (Shukr) 用于安拉时是表示安拉宽恕一个人, 或者赞扬他, 或者对他感到满意及有好意或恩宠的意思, 因此必然给他报偿或酬答。(Lane)
c
2:159.
611
Commentary:
شکر (gratitude) on the part of man is to have a due sense of the favours of God and render thanks for them both by words of mouth and by action; and on the part of God, it is to give proper rewards to men for their obedience and righteousness. See also 1:2.
c
2:159.
690
Shukr on the part of God consists in forgiving a person or commending him or regarding him with satisfaction, goodwill or favour and hence necessarily recompensing him or rewarding him (Lane).